4 Els

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 360

OLYMPUS

M514 M516
AU400

EL Software Manual

Rev. 0700

Service Group
Mishina Olympus Optical Co. Ltd.

Revision Date Revision Date


Issued 1998.06.05
0100 1998.07.27
0200 1998.09.09
0300 2000.03.06
0400 2000.09.13
0500 2002.01.28
0600 2002.01.28
0700 2002.08.06

Cover page ES_CV_1.DOC


AU400 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL HISTORY TABLE
P. 1
REV. PAGE REPLACE HISTORY
0100 1-4 Yes Revise ( 12.SIO ) , Revise ( Structure of Dir )
22-1 Yes Revise ( Contents of R , Contents of % )
0200 1-4 Yes Revise ( Port Address )
1-5 Yes Addition ( Ver. )
22-1 Yes Revise ( Contents og “(“ , Contents of “?” )
Cover Yes Addition ( Rev. 0200 )
0300 Cover Yes Addition ( Rev. 0300 )
TC Page 1 Yes Addition page 1-6
TC Page 3 Yes Addition page 22-2
1-5 Yes Addition version of program
1-6 Yes Addition version of program
22-1 Yes Addition information
22-2 Yes New addition
24-11 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 2131,etc )
24-12 Yes Revise ( Alarm No 4002 )
25-47 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 3220 )
25-49 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 3228 )
0400 Cover Yes Addition ( Rev. 0400 )
TC Page 3 Yes Revise
TC Page 4 Yes Revise
1-5 Yes Revise
1-6 Yes Addition (Program version 3.2)
22-3 Yes All renewal
23-2 Yes All renewal
23-3 Yes All renewal
23-4 Yes All renewal
23-5 Yes All renewal
23-6 Yes All renewal
23-7 Yes All renewal
23-8 Yes All renewal
23-9 Yes All renewal
23-10 Yes All renewal
Chapter 24 Yes All renewal
Chapter 25 Yes Deleted
0500 1-6 Yes Addition information ( MV1005 Ver. 1.1)
0600 23-2 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 2085,2086,2097)
Yes Changing page ( Alarm No 2091,2101 )
23-3 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 2148 )
Changing page ( Alarm No 2134,2135,2136
2137,2138,2139,2140,2146,2147)
23-7 Yes Changing page ( Alarm No 4001,4002,4006,4018,
4019)
23-8 Yes Addition information ( Alarm No 4055,4057)
AU400 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL HISTORY TABLE
P. 2
REV. PAGE REPLACE HISTORY
0600 24-6-1 No New making
24-6-2 No New making
24-8-1 No New making
24-15 Yes Changing the contents
24-16 Yes Changing the contents
24-17 Yes Changing the contents
24-18 Yes Changing the contents
24-19 Yes Changing the contents
24-20 Yes Changing the contents
24-21 Yes Changing the contents
24-22 Yes Changing the contents
24-23 Yes Changing the contents
24-24 Yes Changing the contents
24-25 Yes Changing the contents
24-26 Yes Changing the contents
24-27 Yes Changing the contents
24-28 Yes Changing the contents
24-28-1 No New making
24-28-2 No New making
24-28-3 No New making
24-86-1 No New making
24-96 Yes Changing the contents
24-96-1 No New making
24-97 Yes Changing the contents
24-99 Yes Changing the contents
24-101 Yes Changing the contents
24-101-1 No New making
24-102 Yes Changing the contents
24-106 Yes Changing the contents
24-107 Yes Changing the contents
24-107-1 No New making
1-6 Yes
0700 24-97-1 No Eliminated page 24-97-1
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Table of Contents
1
0300

0. Use method and Precautions


1. Use method and Precautions ..........................................................0-1
2. Electric parts name & list ..............................................................0-2 to 0-16

1. Configuration of AU400 program


1. Outline of the structure of the program .........................................1-1
2. Outline of system forwarding in the program................................1-2
3. AU400 program Operation Requirements (Hardware).................1-3 to 1-4
4. Construction of the program..........................................................1-5 to 1-6

3. Sample Work Sheet Management


Operation explanation........................................................................3-1
Inquiry flow........................................................................................3-2 to 3-5
Inquiry list..........................................................................................3-6
C-1-1: Normal analysis, sequential analysis.......................................3-7 to 3-8
C-1-2: Normal analysys, rack no. analysis.........................................3-9 to 3-10
C-1-3: Normal analysis, STAT samples.............................................3-11 to 3-12
C-2-1: Bar code inquiry (general, emergency samples) .....................3-13 to 3-14
C-2-3: Bar code inquiry (STAT samples)..........................................3-15 to 3-16
i-1-1: Reanalysis, sequential analysis
(general, emergency samples) .....................................3-17 to 3-18
i-1-2: Reanalysis, sequential analysis (STAT samples) ......................3-19
i-2-1: Bar code inquiry list
(general, emergency samples), Standard Reanalysis..........3-20
i-2-2: Bar code inquiry(STAT samples), Standard Reanalysis..........3-21
J-1-1: Automatic reanalysis, sequential analysis
(general/emergency samples).....................................................3-22
J-2-1: Automatic reanalysis, bar code analysis
(general/emergency samples) ......................................3-23
K-1-1: Reagent blank, calibration,
accuracy management samples ....................................3-24
K-2-1: Calibration, accuracy management samples
(bar code analysis) .......................................................3-25

el_tc_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Table of Contents
2

4. Special operation
Operation for Service Engineers........................................................4-1

5. Mode outline
Mode outline ......................................................................................5-1 to 5-2
Outline of ISE mode...........................................................................5-3
Outline of operation mode..................................................................5-4 to 5-5

6. Mode shift drawing


Mode shift flow...................................................................................6-1
Mode shift drawing ............................................................................6-2 to 6-5

7. Mode shift triggers


Triggers to shift modes .....................................................................7-1 to 7-4
Initial..................................................................................................7-5
Stop mode ..........................................................................................7-6 to 7-7
MEASURE mode...............................................................................7-8 to 7-9
End mode ...........................................................................................7-10

8. File configuration
Program file information....................................................................8-1
(* Documents being prepared by P.D.Dept.)
9. Initialize
ANL-DPR communication outline .....................................................9-1 to 9-5
LED control .......................................................................................9-6
Abstract of initialization.....................................................................9-7
Macro action ......................................................................................9-7 to 9-8
For control line...................................................................................9-8 to 9-11
Mechanism line control ......................................................................9-12 to 9-19
ISE initialization action......................................................................9-20 to 9-25

el_tc_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Table of Contents
3
0400 0300

10. Explanation of action


Explanation of actions ..........................................................................10-1
Reagent check........................................................................................10-2 to 10-7
STAT check ...........................................................................................10-8 to 10-9
W1 action ...............................................................................................10-10
W2 action ...............................................................................................10-11 to 10-12
Action for PHOTOCAL .......................................................................10-13
ISE action...............................................................................................10-14 to 10-15

20. Photometry data processing


1. Basis of analysis data calculation ....................................................20-1
2. Processing flow..................................................................................20-2 to 20-4
3. Processing for calculating the value for reaction OD....................20-5 to 20-10
4. Processing the data check ................................................................20-11 to 20-16
5. Processing of data correction...........................................................20-17 to 20-18
6. Processing for concentration conversion........................................20-19
7. Processing of LIH data.....................................................................20-20 to 20-22
8. ISE data processing ..........................................................................20-23 to 20-26
9. Reagent blank sample data processing ...........................................20-26
10. Processing of calibration sample ...................................................20-27 to 20-31
11. QC sample special processing........................................................20-32
12. The processing for re-run sample .................................................20-33
13. Reaction data processing................................................................20-34

22. Abnormal data mark


Data mark..............................................................................................22-1 to 22-3

23. Alarm list


Outline of alarms ..................................................................................23-1
Alarm list ...............................................................................................23-2 to 23-10

es_tc_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Table of Contents
4
0400

24. Alarm list


Detailed explanation of alarms ............................................................24-1 to 24-133

26. User maintenance diagnosis


User maintenance type .........................................................................26-1
Replacing of probe syringe ..................................................................26-2 to 26-4
Mix rod replacing..................................................................................26-5
Washing for wash pot...........................................................................26-5
Wash nozzle ...........................................................................................26-6
Wash line prime ....................................................................................26-6
Detergent supply rolling tube replacing .............................................26-7

27 Maintenance and Diagnosis


DIAG outline .........................................................................................27-1
Control system diagnosis list ...............................................................27-2
Contents of the operations ...................................................................27-2 to 27-3
Diagnosis list for the ANL system .......................................................27-4 to 27-6
Operation details (general) ..................................................................27-7 to 27-8
Operation details (rack feed) ...............................................................27-8 to 27-14
Operation details (STAT).....................................................................27-15 to 27-22
Operation details (sample dispensing)................................................27-23
Operation details (reagent dispensing) ...............................................27-23
Operation details (reaction photometry)............................................27-24 to 27-25
Operation details (mixing) ...................................................................27-26
Operation details (washing).................................................................27-27
Operation details (water supply and discharge)................................27-28
Operation details (ISE DIAG) .............................................................27-29 to 27-31

28. ISE Maintenance, diagnosis outline


Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents ....................28-1 to 28-15

es_tc_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-1
for the use of this manual

n Position of the manual


This manual is one of the AU400 service manuals. It describes the specifications and function of the AU400
program and gives troubleshooting information.

n Use of this manual


Use this manual for the following.
• When checking the specifics of the DIAG function.
• When checking the specifics of the alarm and studying measures.
• When checking the program configuration.
• When checking the specifics for data processing.
• When checking mode management.

n Cautions to be observed when using this manual


• If there is a problem with analysis, consider the problem and consult the appropriate section of
this manual.
• For DPR a commercially available computer is used but in order to protect the functional
capabilities of the analyzer, do not install application software such as MS-DOS or Windows.
Other software may cause conflicts.
• The AU400 DPR has a large vacant space at the time setup has been completed but the vacant
space determines the specifications including possible data storage numders.
Therefore do not use hard disk space for other OSs, software, or data. Explain this point to the customer.

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-2
for the use of this manual

n The abbreviations and symbols used for the electric parts (sensor, motor , etc.) described in this manual are
summarized here. Please check the relevant nomenclature here.
The symbols (S** and M**) conform to the mechanical and electrical parts and the current nomenclature
assigns different nomenclature to these different fields. Please check the lists at the end of this chapter.

n Rack transfer (C portion)


1) Rack detection

2) Rack aspiration

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-3
for the use of this manual

n Rack transfer
3) Rack storage

n STAT transfer (DC)

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-4
for the use of this manual

n Sample dispense
1) Sample probe transfer (FA)

2) Sample dispense line

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-5
for the use of this manual

n Sample probe dispense


3) Sample probe washing

n Reagent dispense
1) Reagent probe transfer (FD)

2) Reagent fridge (DA)

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-6
for the use of this manual

n Reagent dispense
3) Reagent dispense line

4) Reagent probe wash line

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-7
for the use of this manual

n Reaction photometry (GA)

n Mix
1) Mix rod transfer (FC)

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-8
for the use of this manual

n Mix
2) Mixing rod washing

n Wash line
1) Wash nozzle (FB)

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-9
for the use of this manual

n Wash line
2) Cuvette washing

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-10
for the use of this manual

n Supply / Waste water


1) Water supply

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-11
for the use of this manual

n Supply / Waste water


1) Wash water generation

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-12
for the use of this manual

n Supply / Waste water


1) Waste water

n ISE

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-13
for the use of this manual

n Symbol & name list

Symbol Name Remarks


P1 DI water supply pump
P2
P3 Degasser pump
P4 Detergent A supply pump
P5 Detergent B supply pump
P6 Vacuum pump
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11 Degassed water supply pump
P12 Original detergent A supply pump
P13 Original detergent B supply pump
P14

Symbol Name of mechanical part Remarks


M1 Rack vertical feed motor
M2 Belt feed motor
M3 ID mirror motor
M4 Claw feed motor 1 (ID)
M5 Claw feed motor 2 (S)
M6 Re-run rack vertical feed motor
M7 Re-run belt feed motor
M8 Rack push out motor

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-14
for the use of this manual

n Symbol & name list

Symbol Name Remarks


V1 OPD valve
V2 Supply water valve
V3 Detergent A dilution valve
V4 Detergent B dilution valve
V5 S probe inner wash valve
V6 R probe inner wash valve
V7
V8
V9 Probe inner wash back valve
V10 SR probe outer wash valve
V11 Mix wash discharge valve
V12
V13
V14 Detergent B discharge valve for mix
V15
V16 Wash water pouring valve
V17 Detergent A pouring valve
V18 Detergent B pouring valve
V19 Wash water drip prevention valve
V20 Detergent A drip prevention valve
V21 Detergent B drip prevention valve
V22 Overflow open air valve
V23 Overflow aspiration valve
V24 Overflow drain valve
V25 Open air valve for dripping
V26 Aspiration valve for dripping
V27 Drain valve for dripping
V28 Open air valve for sample
V29 Sample aspiration valve
V30 Sample drain valve
V31 Open air valve for aspiration
V32 Wash water aspiration valve
V33 Aspiration drain valve
V34 Vacuum tank waste valve

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-15
for the use of this manual

n Symbol & name list

Symbol Name Remarks


S1 Rack feed pitch sensor CA
S2 Rack receive pitch sensor CA
S3 Rack presence sensor CA
S4 Rack type sensor 1 CA
S5 Rack type sensor 2 CA
S6 Rack type sensor 3 CA
S7 Rack detection sensor CB
S8 Sample cup detection sensor CB
S9 ID mirror origin sensor CB
S10 ID mirror stop position sensor CB
S11 Claw feed origin sensor 1 CG
S12
S13
S14 Claw feed origin sensor 2 (S) CG
S15
S16 Rack stepping sensor 2 CB
S17 Rack arrival sensor CC
S18 Repeat run rack receive pitch sensor CC
S19 Repeat run rack feed pitch sensor CC
S20 Repeat run rack detection sensor CD
S21 Storage rack presence sensor CD
S22
S23
S24 Stand by position sensor CE
S25 Push out position sensor CE
S26 Rack full sensor CH
S27 Re-run rack pass sensor CD
S28 Re-run rack arrival sensor CA
S29 Origin sensor DC
S30 specified point sensor DC
S31 Cup presence sensor DC
S32 Cover open sensor DC
S33 Rack position sensor DC
S34 Cuvette position sensor FA
S35 Position check sensor FA
S36 Upper point sensor FA
S37 Crash detection sensor FA
S38 Upper point sensor SA
S39 Lower point sensor SA
S40 S probe liquid level sensor FA
S41 Clogging detection sensor AA

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 0 Caution item and method 0-16
for the use of this manual

n Symbol & name list


Symbol Name Remarks
S42 FD
S43 Cuvette position sensor “
S44 Position check sensor “
S45 Reagent position sensor “
S46 Upper point sensor “
S47 Crash detection sensor “
S48 Origin sensor DA
S49 Outer specified point sensor “
S50 Inside specified point sensor “
S51 Cover open sensor “
S52 Bottle presence sensor “
S53 Upper point sensor SA
S54 Lower point sensor SA
S55 R probe liquid level sensor FD
S56 Origin sensor GA
S57 Specified point sensor GA
S58 Origin sensor FC
S59 Specified sensor “
S60 Upper point sensor “
S61 Upper point sensor FB
S62 Lower point sensor FB
S63 Upper point sensor Vacuum tank (AA)
S64 Abnormal pressure sensor “
S65 Upper limit point sensor Water supply
S66 Upper point sensor “
S67 Lower point sensor “
S68 Lower limit point “
S69 Lower point sensor Original liquid A
S70 Lower point sensor Original liquid B
S71 Upper limit point sensor Detergent A
S72 Upper point sensor “
S73 Lower point sensor “
S74 Lower limit point sensor “
S75 Upper limit point sensor Detergent B
S76 Upper point sensor “
S77 Lower point sensor “
S78 Lower limit point sensor “
S79 Upper point sensor Strong waste
S80 Lower point sensor Weak waste
S81 Upper point sensor Forced waste
S82 Lower point sensor Strong waste
S83 Upper point sensor SA (ISE)
S84 Lower point sensor SA (ISE)
S85 Level detection sensor ISE
S86 Lower point sensor “
S87 Lower point sensor “
S88 Lower point sensor “
S89 Cover open sensor “

ES00_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-1
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program

n Outline of the structure of the program


For the AU400 to function as a system, all of the following program elements must be installed in the DPR and the
control programs must be forwarded to the ANL or ISE.

1. MS-Windows NT (Workstation)
This is the basic OS for the AU400 system. The AU400 program functions as an application running under this OS.

2. System Maintenance Program (supplied on the AU400 Program Disk)


This is a tool for the Service Engineer. Program installation, system parameter designation, and
maintenance/preservation of the DPR environment can be performed with it.

3. AU400 DPR Program (supplied on the AU400 Program Disk)


This is the main body of the AU400 DPR Program. It handles ANL-DPR communication, analysis control, data
processing, on-line communication, etc.

4. AU400 ANL Control Program (supplied on the AU400 Program Disk)


This is the main body of the AU400 ANL Program. It is forwarded to the SRAM of the ANL CPU board and
operates ANL control.

5. AU400 ISE Control Program (supplied on the AU400 Program Disk)


This is the main body of the AU400 ISE Program.

6. Individual firmware
Each optical communication secondary station connected to the network has an exclusive program in ROM.

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-2
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program

n Outline of system forwarding in the program


For the AU400 to function as a system, the control programs must be forwarded to the ANL or ISE.

1. AU400 ANL Control Program

• Turn off the power source to the AU400 and then turn it on. The system automatically forwards the program to the
SRAM of the ANL CPU PCB. ( See (1) in the figure below.)
• If using the Automatic Start function, the system forwards the program as well.
If the system is turned on manually before you set the Automatic Start function, the system forwards the program as
well.
• If the normal END process is operated and then the system turns off, the ANL CPU is continuously supplied power.
So the power does not need to be turned on to forward the program again. However if the power source is turned of
by E. STOP or the breaker, or if power is cut to the facility, it is necessary to forward the program again the next
time the power is turned on. There is no need to be aware of the above condition, because the system senses the
condition when the power is cut (E.STOP, breaker) and then automatically forwards the program.

* While the system forwards the program, the download condition can be monitored by the 8 bit LED. For more
information refer to page 9-6.
(Caution !) If there is no communication between DPR and ANL (including ISE) for more than 10 minutes, the
program cannot be loaded to the ISE because communication is automatically disconnected. (It must be restarted.)

2. AU400 ISE Control Program

• Turn off the power to the AU400 and then turn it on. By executing [ISE PROGRAM INSTALL] in the System
Maintenance Program, the program is forwarded to the flash ROM of the ISE Control PCB through the ANL PCB.
( See (2) in the figure below.)
• Dissimilar to the ANL Control Program, program forwarding is not executed without directions. Exercise care,
because even though the new ISE Control Program is installed in the DPR, it is not updated.
* For more information about program loading, please refer to “ System Maintenance ”.

n Image of program forwarding

AU400 Program Disk

Install Program

DPR Hard Disk

(1) (2)

ANL CPU
MV2074

(2)

ISE Controller
MV2190

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-3
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program

n AU400 Program Operation Requirements (Hardware)


• Hardware requirements
1. Personal Computer (which can run Windows-NT)
• Compatible with IBM PC/AT, or compatible with the IBM Co. standards

2. MPU (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirement)
• Pentium 166MHz or better

3. RAM (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirement)
• 48MB or more (64 MB is recommended)

4. FD
• 3.5inch, 1 drive minimum

5. CD
• 1 drive minimum

6. HD (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirements)


• IDE, EIDE type which can be recognized by Windows-NT
• 1 GB or more

7. Mouse (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirement)
• PS/2 Mouse which can be recognized Windows-NT

8. Sound board (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirements)
• Sound board which can be recognized by Windows-NT
• With adjustable volume speaker

9. CRT (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirements)
• CRT which can be recognized by Windows-NT
• 15 or 17 inch color
• Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels and 65,536 colors

10. Touch Panel (option) (functions with Windows-NT standard and conforms following requirements)
• Touch Panel which can be recognized by Windows-NT
• Resolution can be set to 1024 x 768
• Windows-NT can recognize it as a mouse
• SIO standard and can be connected to extension board 1 or extension board 2

11. Modem (option) (which can run Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirements)
• Modem which can be recognized by Windows-NT
• SIO standard and can be connected to extension board 1 and extension board 2

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-4
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program 0200 0100

• AU400 Program Operation Requirements (Hardware)


12. SIO (functions with Windows-NT and conforms to the following requirements)

1) OAI
Port Name Type Use Port Address IRQ
COM 1 Standard ANL Communication 0x3F8~0x3FF 4
COM 2 Standard Online Communication 0x2F8~0x2FF 3
COM 3 A Modem with a built-in Modem 0x3E8~0x3EF 10

2) ODH
Port Name Type Use Port Address IRQ
COM 1 Standard ANL Communication 0x3F8~0x3FF 4
COM 2 Standard Online Communication 0x2F8~0x2FF 3
COM 3 A Modem with a built-in Modem 0x3E8~0x3EF 7
COM 4 Extension B. 1 Serial 1 Touch Panel 0x2E8~0x2EF 11

3) ASIA
Port Name Type Use Port Address IRQ
COM 1 Standard ANL Communication 0x3F8~0x3FF 4
COM 2 Standard Online Communication 0x2F8~0x2FF 3
COM 3
COM 4

13. Parallel Port (functions with Windows-NT standard and conforms to the following requirements)
Port Name Type Use Port Address IRQ
LPT 1 Standard Standard Printer 0x378~0x37F 7
LPT 2 Extension B. Optional Printer 0x278~0x27F (5)

n Environmental requirements to operate the system program


1) Windows-NT.
2) Must be installed under C\Winnt.
3) Must be installed in the following structure.
DIRECTORY CONTENTS
C:\ Root Windows-NT, default install
WINNT\ Windows-NT, default install
ProgramFiles\ Windows-NT, default install
AU400\ Analyzer\ ANL System Program
Data Processor\ DPR System Program, Parameter
Data\ Datafile\ Data related files ( index, data, etc.)
Otherfile\ Other date files (reagent remaining amount, etc)
Parameter\ Parameter related files
Message\ Message files (alarm, printer, etc)
Help\ Help files
SystemMaintenance\ System Maintenance Program
Dao\ Data Access Object
Utility\ Utility file related
Acrobat3\ Acrobat Reader, default install
Temp\ Windows-NT, default install

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-5
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program 0400 0300 0200

n Construction of the program


Construction of the Program
Issue date
Order No. Drawing No. Function, PRG-Type PCB
MU8110 MV2314 OAI 1.0 - - 1.4 2.1
EC-No 514-0044 514-0064
MU8111 MV2315 ODH 1.0 - - 1.4
EC-No 514-0039
MU8112 MV2316 Gen. Region - 1.1 1.3 - 2.1
Australia EC-No 514-0033 514-0065
MU5354 MV2181 ANL IPL MV2074 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5360 MV2191 ISE IPL MV2190 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5190 MV2078 Photometry Cont. MV1005 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5355 MV2310 ISE I/F MV1019 1.1 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU3589 MV1030 LAN Master MV1019 3.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5185 MV2079 Refrigerator Cont. MV2070 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5366 MV2330 Probe transfer Cont. MV2329 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5186 MV2080 Mixing Cont. MV1014 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5200 MV2118 Probe transfer Cont. MV2329 1.1 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5187 MV2081 Rack transfer Cont. MV2177 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5189 MV2083 Auto re-run Cont. MV2073 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5188 MV2082 Dispenser Cont. MV2077 1.0 ← ← ← ←
EC-No

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
1-6
Chapter 1 Configuration of AU400 program 0600 0500 0400 0300

n Construction of the program


Construction of the Program
Issue date
Order No. Drawing No. Function, PRG-Type PCB
MU8110 MV2314 OAI - - 3.2 -
for M514 EC-No 514-0108 -
MU8111 MV2315 ODH - - - -
for M514 EC-No -
MU8112 MV2316 Gen. Region 2.2 3.1 - -
for M514 Australia EC-No 514-0090 514-0101 -
MU8295 MV3305 OAI - - - 5.0
for M516 EC-No - - - -
MU8296 MV3306 ODH - - - 5.0
for M516 EC-No - - - -
MU8297 MV3307 Gen. Region - - - 5.0
for M516 Australia EC-No - - - -
MU5354 MV2181 ANL IPL MV2074 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5360 MV2191 ISE IPL MV2190 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5190 MV2078 Photometry Cont. MV1005 1.0 ← ← 1.1
EC-No 514-0144
MU5355 MV2310 ISE I/F MV1019 1.1 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU3589 MV1030 LAN Master MV1019 3.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5185 MV2079 Refrigerator Cont. MV2070 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5366 MV2330 Probe transfer Cont. MV2329 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5186 MV2080 Mixing Cont. MV1014 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5200 MV2118 Probe transfer Cont. MV2329 1.1 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5187 MV2081 Rack transfer Cont. MV2177 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5189 MV2083 Auto re-run Cont. MV2073 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No
MU5188 MV2082 Dispenser Cont. MV2077 1.0 ← ← ←
EC-No

ES01_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-1
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

n Operation explanation
It’s described the menu operation inquired many times in the operation menu.
The contents is added on demand.

n Contents of explanation
Menu Contents Page
Sample worksheet management Inquiry flow of test requisition 3-2 to 3-19
Inquiry list for each analysis type
& sample type & analysis mode

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-2
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

n Inquiry flow
1. Inquiry Flow
(1) Normal sample

• Judgment method by sample type (by mixture type)


Depending on the rack type and the rack No. from ANL, the following processing is performed and
identification is made.
The sample type is discriminated by rack type, the magnitude relation with the rack No. set by parameter
individually for each sample type is checked, and the sample type (serum/urine/other) is discriminated.
The sample type judgment with STAT is decided by the STAT position set by parameter.
• Sample No. calculation method
1) In case of sequential analysis mode
When the sample type has been discriminated by the above processing, a number incremented by one with
each inquiry from the start number set for each sample type is assigned.
2) In case of rack analysis mode
Together with discrimination of the sample type by the above processing, the following processing is
performed according to the rack No. and the cup position, and calculation is made.
Calculation method
(nnnnnnn - NNNNNNN) × 10 + cup position No.
NNNNNNN is set by parameter as the dividing rack No. for each sample type.
3) In case of bar code analysis mode
The sample information is retrieved from the S. ID read by the above processing for each sample type, and
the sample No. assigned to the retrieved sample is allotted.
If the respective sample information is not obtained, the number and item selection information shall be
assigned by automatic generation or analysis shall not be performed (NOP).
Automatic generation processing sequentially assigns a number by incrementing the start S No. set
by parameter, and the item information in regard to the panel No. assigned for each sample type set
by parameter is assigned.
In case of real-time on-line, the registered sample No. incremented by one shall be allotted.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-3
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

(2) Reanalysis sample

• Judgment method by sample type (by mixture type)


The following processing is executed according to the rack No. from ANL, and identification is performed.
The sample type is discriminated by the rack No., the magnitude relation with the rack No. set by parameter
individually for each sample type is checked, and the sample type (general, emergency), (serum/urine/other)
is discriminated. The sample type judgment at STAT is decided according to the STAT position set by
parameter.
• Sample No. calculation method
1) In case of sequential analysis mode
The sample type is discriminated according to the above processing, and a number incremented for each
inquiry from the start S No. set for each sample type is assigned.
2) In case of bar code analysis mode
The sample information is retrieved from the S. ID read by the above processing for each sample type, and
the sample No. assigned to the retrieved sample is allotted.
If the respective sample information is not obtained, analysis shall not be performed (NOP).
3) In case of real-time on-line
The registered sample No. incremented by one shall be allotted.
• Inquiry for automatic reanalysis
There are two inquiries, and the first one is for checking for reanalysis for the samples on the rack.
The other inquiry is done to obtain the sample reanalysis item information.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-4
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

(3) Reagent blank, calibration, QC sample (rack, manual STAT)

• Sample type (mixture type) judgment method


Rack reagent blank
• The sample type is judged from the cup position.
• Cup position 1: Serum
5: Other
10: Urine
Rack calibration, rack accuracy management
• Rack No. analysis - The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, compared with
the parameter, and decided.
• Bar code analysis - The kind No. is calculated from the read bar code and the parameter, and it is
decided.
STAT reagent blank
• The sample type is judged from the item selection information (multiple judgment also is possible).
STAT calibration, STAT accuracy management
• The kind No. is calculated from the STAT table layout (parameter) and STAT calibration, QC
parameter, and the sample type is judged.
• Sample No. calculation method
The internally held start S No. is used as a temporary number, and it is incremented for each sample type when
a reagent use quantity inquiry message comes.
Finally, a sample No. is assigned for the data given as output.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-5
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

• Contents of the item selection information


The item selection information corresponding to the cup No. of the inquiry is created from the items set in the
item selection menu for rack or STAT respectively and the analysis procedure.
• Inquiry timing
This is performed according to the position of each sample type.
Inquiries in cup units are made for each sample.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-6
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

n Inquiry list
The item inquiries for each analysis and sample type will be explained.
Confirm the analysis type, the sample type, and the analysis mode to which reference is to be made from the
following table, find the corresponding number (C-1-1, I-1-1, etc.), and confirm the detailed contents via the
corresponding text.
Analysis type Sample type Analysis mode
Sequential Rack No. Bar code
Normal analysis General sample C-1-1 (p.3-7) C-1-2 (p.3-9) C-2-1 (p.3-13)
Emergency sample C-1-1 (p.3-7) C-1-2 (p.3-9) C-2-1 (p.3-13)
STAT sample C-1-3 (p.3-11) C-1-3 (p.3-11) C-2-3 (p.3-15)
Standard reanalysis General sample i-1-1 (p.3-17) i-1-1 (p.3-17) i-2-1(p.3-20)
Emergency sample i-1-1 (p.3-17) i-1-1 (p.3-17) i-2-1(p.3-20)
STAT sample i-1-2 (p.3-19) i-1-2 (p.3-19) i-2-2 (p.3-21)
Reanalysis with STAT table use i-1-2 (p.3-19) i-1-2 (p.3-19) i-2-2 (p.3-21)
Automatic reanalysis General sample J-1-1 (p.3-22) J-1-1 (p.3-22) J-2-1 (p.3-23)
Emergency sample J-1-1 (p.3-22) J-1-1 (p.3-22) J-2-1 (p.3-23)
STAT sample − − −
Reanalysis with STAT table use − − −
RACK Reagent blank K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-1-1 (p.3-24)
Calibration K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-2-1 (p.3-25)
Accuracy management sample K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-1-1 (p.3-24) K-2-1 (p.3-25)
STAT manual Reagent blank L-1-1 L-1-1 L-1-1
Calibration L-1-1 L-1-1 L-2-1
Accuracy management sample L-1-1 L-1-1 L-2-1
STAT automatic Reagent blank − − −
Calibration − − −
Accuracy management sample − − −

• The mixture type (serum, urine, other) is discriminated by comparing the rack No. information set by the
system conditions with the rack No. sent at the time of an inquiry from ANL.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-7
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

C-1-1 Normal Analysis, sequential analysis


(general/emergency samples)
1. S. No. allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The mixture type is judged from the rack No., the start S No. set by DPR for each sample type is taken as
the initial value, and sequentially incremented numbers are allotted.
• S. ID is processed as incidental information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
2. S. No. processing when there is no cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• General samples: Independent of the presence or absence of a cup, count-up is performed by DPR for an
inquiry from ANL, and a “No cup” response is made.
• Emergency samples: Count-up is performed only when there is a cup at the time of an inquiry from ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1 Already received processing 1
Cup present Allotted S. No. received, Analyzed, In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
For received and analyzed samples, the item selection information is created, and response is made with “cup
present”.
Internal flag selection is possible for the following processing.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a response is made.
3-1-2 Already received processing 2
Cup present Allotted S. No. received, Not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
For received and not analyzed samples, the item selection information is created, and response is made with
“cup present”.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
For each sample type, internal flag selection is possible for the following processing.
1) An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list,
and a response is made.
2) No inquiry is made to the host in the same way as inspection reception (batch input).
3-2 Already received processing 3
No cup, allotted S. No. received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
An alarm is caused.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
No inquiry is made to the host.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-8
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

4-1 Not received sample processing 1-1


Cup present, allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a
response is made.
4-2 Not received sample processing 1-2
No cup, allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
S. No. allotted, no cup, NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
S. No. allotted, no cup, NOP response
5. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-9
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

C-1-2 Normal Analysis, Rack No. Analysis


(general, emergency samples)
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The mixture type is judged from the rack No., and the S. No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup
position.
• The S. ID is processed as incidental information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
General samples, emergency samples: Independent of the presence or absence of a cup, the S. No. is calculated
from the rack No. and the cup position when there is an inquiry from ANL, it is allotted, and response is made
with NOP and no sample information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Cup present, allotted S. No. received, Analyzed, In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created for the received and analyzed samples, and a “cup present” response
is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) No inquiry is made to the host in the same way as inspection reception (batch input).
3-1-2
Cup present, allotted S. No. received, Not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
For received and not analyzed samples, the item selection information is created, and response is made with
“cup present”.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list,
and a response is made.
3-2
No cup, the allotted S. No. has been received.
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
An alarm is caused.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
An alarm is caused.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-10
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

4-1 Not received sample processing 1-1


Cup present, allotted S. No. not received.
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a
response is made.
4-2 Not received sample processing 1-2
No cup, allotted S. No. not received.
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response when there is no cup while an S. No. has been allotted.
5. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-11
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

C-1-3 Normal Analysis, STAT Samples


1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Allotment by DPR in regard to samples at the position with cup by sequentially incrementing the start S No. as
the initial value.
• The mixture type is made to correspond according to the STAT table layout.
• The S. ID is processed as incidental information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• When there is no cup, there is no inquiry from ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Cup present and allotted S. No. received, Analyzed, In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is processed from the received and analyzed samples, and a “cup present”
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) No inquiry is made to the host in the same way as inspection reception (batch input).
3-1-2
Cup present and allotted S. No. received, Not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is processed from the received and not analyzed samples, and a "cup present"
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) No inquiry is made to the host in the same way as inspection reception (batch input).
3-2
No cup and the allotted S. No. has been received.
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• When there is no cup, there is no inquiry from ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• When there is no cup, there is no inquiry from ANL.
4-1 Processing of not received samples 1-1
Cup present and allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a
response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-12
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

4-2 Processing of not received samples 1-2


No cup and allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• When there is no cup, there is no inquiry from ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• When there is no cup, there is no inquiry from ANL.
5. Real-time, on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
Automatic generation is made with the allotted S. No. and a “cup present” response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-13
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

C-2-1 Bar Code Inquiry (general, emergency samples)


1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
In regard to a sample at the position with cup, the DPR
• retrieves the sample information from the bar code and the mixture type and responds with the retrieved S.
No. and the created item information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.

2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup


l Inspection reception (batch input)
• No count-up
NOP response processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
• There is no inquiry to the host.

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
A sample of the mixture type and the S. ID has been received, Not analyzed (all items)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and a response is made with
the retrieved S. No. and the created item information.
An alarm is issued.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and when a corresponding
sample is present, the retrieved S. No. and the item selection information are given as response.
Alarm is issued.
When there is no corresponding sample, an inquiry is made to the host with the larger one of start S No.
and max. received S No., the item selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is
made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-14
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

3-1-2
A sample of the mixture type and the S. ID has been received, Analyzed (there are not analyzed items), In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
1) When received and not analyzed samples with the same ID are retrieved, the item selection information is
created and a response is made.
If none are found, automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No.
+ 1.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) When received and not analyzed samples with the same ID are retrieved, the item selection information is
created and a response is made.
When none are found, an inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S
No., the item selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
4-1 Processing of not received samples
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• S. No. allotment is made sequentially from a number set by internal parameter, automatic generation is
made from the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
5. Bar Code Read Error Processing
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.
(The error No. is inserted for the S. ID.)
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.
6. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-15
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

C-2-3 Bar Code Inquiry (STAT samples)


1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
In regard to a sample at the position with cup, the DPR
• retrieves the sample information from the bar code and the mixture type, creates the item information, and
makes a response.
(The mixture type is decided from the layout in the STAT table set in advance.)
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1 for each mixture type
decided from the STAT table layout.
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• No count-up
NOP response processing, no inquiry from ANL
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
A sample of the mixture type and the S. ID has been received., Not analyzed (all items)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and a response is made with
the created item information.
(The mixture type is decided from the STAT table layout set in advance.)
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1 for each mixture type
decided from the STAT table layout.
3-1-2
A sample of the mixture type and the S. ID has been received., Analyzed (there are not analyzed items)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
1) When received and not analyzed samples with the same ID are retrieved, the item selection information is
created and a response is made. When none are found, automatic generation is made with the larger one of
start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
The following processing can be selected by internal flag.
1) An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made. Alarm is issued.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-16
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

4. Processing of not received samples


l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item selection
information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
5. Bar Code Read Error Processing
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.
(The error No. is inserted for the S. ID.)
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.
6. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
Automatic generation is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No. + 1, and a “cup
present” response is made.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-17
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

i-1-1 Reanalysis Analysis, Sequential Analysis


(general, emergency samples)
1. S. No. allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The mixture type is judged from the rack No., the start S No. of the corresponding reanalysis S. No. is taken
as the initial value, and this is incremented sequentially.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• No count-up
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Cup present, allotted reanalysis No. received, Analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a “cup present”
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list,
and a response is made.
3-1-2
Cup present, allotted S. No. received, Not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and not analyzed samples, and a “cup present”
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list,
and a response is made.
3-2 Processing 2 for the same S. No.
No cup, the allotted reanalysis No. has been received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
An alarm is caused.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
No inquiry to the host
An alarm is caused.

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-18
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

4-1 Processing 1-1 for not received samples


Cup present, allotted reanalysis No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Mode shift processing (M1 → M2)
Cup present, NOP response
Alarm is issued.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a
response is made.
4-2 Processing 1-2 for not received samples
No cup, allotted reanalysis S.No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
5. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response to ANL

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-19
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

i-1-2 Reanalysis Analysis, Sequential Analysis (STAT samples)


1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The mixture type is judged from the STAT table position, the start S No. of the respective reanalysis S. No.
is taken as the initial value, and the number is incremented sequentially.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No inquiry
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Cup present, allotted reanalysis No. received, Analyzed, In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a “cup present”
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• In the same way as inspection reception (batch input), no inquiry is made to the host.
3-1-2
Cup present, allotted S. No. received, Not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and not analyzed samples, and a “cup present”
response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• In the same way as inspection reception (batch input), no inquiry is made to the host.
3-2
No cup, allotted reanalysis No. received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No inquiry
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
4-1 Processing 1-1 for not received samples
Cup present, allotted reanalysis No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Cup present, NOP response Alarm is issued. No. count up
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry is made to the host, the item selection information from the host is recorded in the work list, and a
response is made.
4-2 Processing 1-2 for not received samples
No cup, allotted reanalysis S.No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No inquiry
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
5. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response to ANL

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-20
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

i-2-1 Bar Code Inquiry (general, emergency samples),


Standard Reanalysis
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
In regard to the sample of the “cup present” position, DPR
• retrieves the sample information from the bar code and the mixture type and makes a response with the
retrieved S. No. and the item information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) an inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
2. S. No. processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• No count-up, NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
• No inquiry to the host

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Sample of mixture type and S. ID received, Not analyzed (all items)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
• The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and a response is made with
the retrieved S. No. and the created item information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and when there is a corresponding
sample, a response is made with the retrieved S. No. and the item selection information.
(No inquiry is made to the host.)
3-1-2
(Same S. ID processing)
Sample of mixture type and S. ID received, Analyzed (there are not analyzed items), In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a response is made.
4-1 Processing of not received samples
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Cup present, NOP response Alarm is issued.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item selection
information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
5. Bar Code Read Error Processing
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response Alarm is issued
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response
6. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-21
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

i-2-2Bar Code Inquiry (STAT samples), Standard Reanalysis


1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
In regard to the sample of the “cup present” position, DPR
• retrieves the sample information from the bar code and the mixture type and makes a response with the
retrieved S. No. and the item information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
1) An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item
selection information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
2. S. No. processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No inquiry
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
• No inquiry to the host

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Sample of mixture type and S. ID received, Not analyzed (all items)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
In regard to the sample of the “cup present” position, DPR
• retrieves the sample information from the bar code and the mixture type and makes a response with the
retrieved S. No. and the item information.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
The sample information is retrieved from the bar code and the mixture type, and when there is a corresponding
sample, a response is made with the retrieved S. No. and the item selection information.
(No inquiry is made to the host.)
3-1-2
(Same S. ID processing)
Sample of mixture type and S. ID received, Analyzed (there are not analyzed items), In analysis
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
The item selection information is created from the received and analyzed samples, and a response is made.
4-1 Processing of not received samples
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Cup present, NOP response Alarm is issued.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
An inquiry to the host is made with the larger one of start S No. and max. received S No., the item selection
information from the host is memorized, and a response is made.
5. Bar Code Read Error Processing
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response Alarm is issued.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response
6. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-22
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

J-1-1 Automatic Reanalysis, Sequential Analysis


(general/emergency samples)
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The sample is retrieved by the DPR identification key, and the retrieved sample No. is allotted as the sample
No.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
None
Investigation
The sample No. is incremented sequentially from the start S No., the original sample No. is retrieved from the
DPR identification key, and an inquiry is made to the host.
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Reanalysis work list registration, during reanalysis analysis, Reanalysis completed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The reanalysis S. No. is used as the retrieved No., and NOP response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
3-1-2
Reanalysis work list registered, reanalysis not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item information is created from the registered and not analyzed samples, and a response is made to ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
3-2
No reanalysis work list registration
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
Investigation
The sample No. is taken as the registered No. + 1, the original sample No. is retrieved from the DPR
identification key, and an inquiry is made to the host.
3-3
Reanalysis work list registration, during reanalysis analysis, Reanalysis completed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item information is created from the registered and not analyzed samples, and a response is made to ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
4. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response to ANL

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-23
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

J-2-1 Automatic Reanalysis, Bar Code Analysis


(general/emergency samples)
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The sample is retrieved from the DPR identification key, and the retrieved sample No. is allotted as the sample
No.
An alarm is put out when the retrieved S. ID differs from the S. ID of the inquiry.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
None
Investigation
The sample No. is incremented sequentially from the start S No., the original sample No. and the S. ID are
retrieved from the DPR identification key, and an inquiry is made to the host.
2. S. No. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1-1
Reanalysis work list registration, during reanalysis analysis, Reanalysis completed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The reanalysis S. No. is used as the retrieved No., and NOP response is made.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
3-1-2
Reanalysis work list registration, reanalysis not analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item information is created from the registered and not analyzed samples, and a response is made to ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
3-2
No reanalysis work list registration, no reanalysis analysis data
l Inspection reception (batch input)
NOP response
l Real-time on-line inquiry
• Same as inspection reception (batch input).
Investigation
The sample No. is taken as the registered No. +1, the original sample No. is retrieved from the DPR
identification key, and an inquiry is made to the host.
3-3
Reanalysis work list registration, during reanalysis analysis, Reanalysis analyzed
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item information is created from the registered and not analyzed samples, and a response is made to ANL.
l Real-time on-line inquiry
No inquiry is made to the host, and the same processing as inspection reception (batch input) is performed.
4. Real-time on-line error processing
l Real-time on-line inquiry
NOP response to ANL

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-24
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

K-1-1 Reagent Blank, Calibration, Accuracy Management


Samples
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Basically, numbers are allotted with sequential incrementing at the time of data output.
Temporarily, allotment is made with incrementing each time an inquiry message in regard to the reagent
consumption quantity comes.
2. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
An NOP response is made.

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1
When a cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent of
whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received samples, and a “cup present” response is made.
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
3-2
When no cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent
of whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
An alarm is caused.
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-1 Processing 1-1 for not received samples
Cup present, and the sample corresponding to the cup position has not been received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
One of the following responses with the allotted S. No.
Selection is performed by internal flag.
Cup present, NOP response
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-2 Processing 1-2 for not received samples
No cup, allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-25
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

K-2-1 Calibration, Accuracy Management Samples (bar code


analysis)
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Basically, numbers are allotted with sequential incrementing at the time of data output.
Temporarily, allotment is made with incrementing each time an inquiry message in regard to the reagent
consumption quantity comes.
2. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
An NOP response is made.

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1
When a cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent of
whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received samples, and a “cup present” response is made.
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
3-2
When no cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent
of whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
An alarm is caused.
(is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-1 Processing 1-1 for not received samples
Cup present, and the sample corresponding to the cup position has not been received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
One of the following responses with the allotted S. No.
Selection is performed by internal flag.
Cup present, NOP response
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-2 Processing 1-2 for not received samples
No cup, allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
5. Bar code read error
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
3-26
Chapter 3 Sample Work Sheet Management

L-1-1 Calibration, Accuracy Management Samples (bar code


analysis)
1. S. No. Allotment
l Inspection reception (batch input)
Basically, numbers are allotted with sequential incrementing at the time of data output.
Temporarily, allotment is made with incrementing each time an inquiry message in regard to the reagent
consumption quantity comes.
2. Processing when there is no Cup
l Inspection reception (batch input)
An NOP response is made.

Inquiry/Response Processing
3-1
When a cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent of
whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
The item selection information is created from the received samples, and a “cup present” response is made.
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
3-2
When no cup is present and the sample corresponding to the allotted cup position has been received (independent
of whether analysis has been performed or not)
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
An alarm is caused.
(is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-1 Processing 1-1 for not received samples
Cup present, and the sample corresponding to the cup position has not been received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
One of the following responses with the allotted S. No.
Selection is performed by internal flag.
Cup present, NOP response
(The kind No. is calculated from the rack No. and the cup position, and the item information is determined.)
4-2 Processing 1-2 for not received samples
No cup, allotted S. No. not received
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response
5. Bar code read error
l Inspection reception (batch input)
No cup with the allotted S. No., NOP response

ES03_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
4-1
Chapter 4 Special operation

n Operation for Service Engineers

• Password
The setting below is reserved by the system.

Login name User Remarks


MAINTENANCE For manufacturer Input using capital
protection latters

Password User Remarks


SBM For manufacturer Input using capital
protection latters

ES04_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Mode outline
5-1

n Mode outline
• Types
Below are the main analyzer modes.
Modes General Contents
POWER OFF If no electricity is supplied to the CPU Power Supply for ANL. (Software control is not
possible.)
POWER ON IPL, etc., are under control. (No mode will be displayed.)
INITIALIZE Ready to run.
STOP No action is taken.
MEASURE Running.
END End (or preparing to end).

• Initialization processing
Initialization will be performed as follows.
1. Initialization of internal peripheral, relocation, and register.
2. Initialization of internal peripheral selective register.
3. Initialization of timer and clock selective register.
4. Initialization of timer / counter and unit.
5. Initialization of interrupt control and unit.
6. Initialization of DPR communication.
7. Initialization of universal IO.
8. Others (necessary software initialization)
• Setting (0)... ‘check = YES’ in the ISE Overflow Sensor Check Counter
(ISE Overflow Sensor Check Counter will countdown if other setting than ‘check = YES’).

• Inside condition
The STOP & MEASURE mode can be divided into the following modes.
1) STOP

Modes 1st Condition 2nd Condition 3rd Condition


Mechanical Condition Temperature Condition Analysis Condition for
Rack and STAT
STANDBY The mechanical alignment The temperature is stable. Rack and STAT do not
and the situation are under have sample information
control and ready to run. that is not run.

PAUSE (If initialization has Rack and STAT have


finished normally and only sample information that is
Measure or Manual not run.
finished normally.
WARM-UP The temperature is not Doesn’t matter.
stable.
STOP Conditions other than Doesn’t matter.
above (Action failed,
aborted, or performed any
action except DIAG.)

ES05_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Mode outline
5-2

2) MEASURE

¬ Operation limitation condition


Available triggers
Name START STAT FEEDER STP PAUSE STOP Manual operation
MEASURE 1 O O O O
MEASURE 2 O O O O
MEASURE 3 O O O

- Shift attention condition


Name Description
Uncertain Sample continuous transfer from rack and STAT.(Triggered to one of next 4
conditions)
TO STAND BY Action ends normally in every rack or batch of STAT by FEEDER STOP instructions
and rack nothing and sample nothing. (Restart is possible.)
TO PAUSE Disconnects R1 dispense and ends by issuing an alarm and PAUSE instruction. (Restart
is possible.)
TO STOP Disconnects R1 dispense and ends by issuing an alarm. (Restart is possible.)
Immediate STOP Disconnects the action and ends by issuing an alarm.
(The STOP condition is shifted to during the basic cycle.)

® Action condition
Name Description
During sample The rack or STAT sample is transferred.(The condition is managed individually.)
transfer
During reagent The reagent (R1, R2) is dispensing. (The condition is managed individually.)
dispense
During reaction Sample and reagent dispensing has ended and available cuvette data being sent.
photometry
During wash Available cuvette data sent and washing used cuvette.
During STOP All processing ends and stops.

ES05_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Mode outline
5-3

n Outline of ISE mode


1) Type
Presence of ISE Connection condition Action Contents
condition
Nothing The ISE condition indication isn’t performed.
Exist No connections (STOP) Communication error/ Operation is
impossible
Connections exist READY Operation is possible
BUSY During Operation
STOP It is stopped forcibly. Operation is not
possible because of error.

2) Mode shift

Cross-hatching denotes control key on ANL side.

*1 During STOP initialization is performed by 1) shifting the mode to STANDBY (ANL) or 2) pressing
the ISE READY key.
If initialization ends normally, the mode shifts to READY.
Initialization with no connections executes control line initialization and mechanism line initialization of
ISE.
Initialization if a connection exists executes mechanism line initialization.

*2 The mode shifts to STOP if 1) the mode shifts to STOP (ANL), or if 2) the ISE STOP key is pressed, or
if 3) the action ends abnormally (including communication error).
*3 The instruction (including MEASURE, W1, manual operations for ISE) resulted in the BUSY mode
being shifted to.
*4 If the action ends normally (including MEASURE, W1) the mode READY is shifted to.

ES05_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Mode outline
5-4

n Outline of operation mode


AU400 modes are listed below. The current mode is displayed in the upper left field of the
screen at all times.
Mode Contents
INITIAL After turning on the system, DPR will perform IPL (Initial Program Loading). After IPL ends,
the mode will shift to INITIAL regardless of the ANL status.
Then DPR will wait for a mode change request from ANL while ANL performs an initial
mechanical reset. If ANL completes the reset normally, ANL will send the mode change request
to the DPR, then the mode will shift to WARM-UP. If the reset ended abnormally, the mode will
shift to STOP.
WARM-UP Although the lamp and photometry analog line are still unstable, normal operation is available
in this mode.
In the WARM-UP mode, all modes can be accessed except MEASURE and DIAG.
DPR will shift the mode to STANDBY if the lamp and photometry analog line are stable, or if
STANDBY has been forced by the operator.
(Check that the reaction pot temperature becomes stable within 20 minutes. If the temperature is
not regenerated, alarm No. 3218 is issued.)
(If the instrument is started for the first time, wait 90 minutes.)
If the previous mode was WARM-UP, the mode will shift back to the WARM-UP mode it
analyzer operation is normal.
Accordingly, when shifting to a different mode during WARM-UP, even if the lamp and
photometry analog line become stable at that point, the mode will shift to STAND-BY after
shifting back to WARM-UP.
STANDBY If the lamp and photometry analog line is stable, any operation can be accessed from the
STANDBY mode.
MEASURE Analysis is performed in this mode. The MEASURE mode is only available from the STANDBY
mode. A request to shift to the STOP mode from the DPR can be accepted during measurement.
Major shifts can be both set using the menu and by pressing the STAT switch. After normal
completion, STANDBY mode is shifted to and when an analysis continuation impossible error
occurs, the STOP mode is shifted to.
The MEASURE mode has sub-modes (shown below) that can be accessed during measurement.
MEASURE-1: If performing measurement during rack supply. FEEDER STOP, STAT,
PAUSE, and STOP requests can be made in this mode.
MEASURE-2: If performing measurement not during rack supply. M1 START, STAT,
PAUSE, and STOP requests can be made in this mode.
MEASURE-3: If aspirating R1 of the last sample has been completed during MEASURE-2.
Although M1 START, STAT, and STOP requests can be made in this mode,
PAUSE is not available.
MEASURE- If washing cuvettes after measurement and during MEASURE-3, only a
END: STOP request will be accepted. or if washing cuvettes after the AUTO-
REPEAT run.
The mode will shift to MEASURE-END, if no rack is detected during rack
feed out movement, which is performed simultaneously with rack stocking
movement. The last rack inquiry is for a rack to be repeated.
MEASURE X If the mode is shifting from MEASURE to STOP.
to STOP This also occurs if running samples, for which R2 mixing has finished, with
suspending dispenses for R1, sample and R2, if non-fatal mechanical errors
were generated.
If running samples, R1 mix has finished, unmatched Test Requisition
Information (TRI) between DPR and ANL has occurred, or due to any
software error.
MEASURE to If the mode is shifted to PAUSE due to a PAUSE request or a RACK FULL
PAUSE: alarm.

ES05_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Mode outline
5-5

Continued ...

Mode Contents
PAUSE Suspending analysis due to a PAUSE request or generation of RACK FULL. ( Although analysis
is being performed, rack feeding is suspended.)
Analysis can be restarted after resolving the cause.
STOP Stopping analysis forcibly due to RACK JAM, CUVETTE WHEEL ERROR (still can be
rotated), CUVETTE ROTATION IMPOSSIBLE, or WATER SUPPLY (or EVACUATION)
ERROR errors.
W1 Performing W1 operation (washing all cuvettes and bleeding air bubbles of sample and reagent
probes) by pressing W1 key.
W2 Performing W2 operation (washing all cuvettes and probes with detergent) by pressing W2 key.
PHOTOCAL Performing PHOTOCAL operation (measuring cuvette blank) by pressing PHOTOCAL key.
MAINTENANCE Maintenance operation mode for customer and for instrument check by the service engineer. The
following menus are available in this mode.
Maintenance Shift to the maintenance mode from the WARM UP, STANDBY, or STOP
mode.
There are two types: one is for data processing and the another is for analysis.
Manufacturer The maintenance mode can be shifted to while in the STOP mode.
Maintenance There are five types: Program Version, Analyzer Diagnostics, ISE
Diagnostics, Alarm Log, and File.
END End process of the system.

ES05_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Mode Shift Drawing
6-1

n Mode shift flow


3. Mode shift flow

* The above describes the shifts that take place due to user operation (SW, Key, and Menu operation).
Other shifts depend on the specifications of each condition.

ES06_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Mode Shift Drawing
6-2

n Mode Shift Drawing


(1) During WARM UP

*1 The mode will not shift to the STOP mode during MAINTE. The mode will shift to STOP
after completing MAINTE.
If the mode shifts to MAINTE while in the STOP mode, the mode will shift to STOP after completing
MAINTE.

ES06_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Mode Shift Drawing
6-3

(2) During STANDBY

*1 The mode will not shift to the STOP mode during MAINTE. The mode will shift to STOP after
completing MAINTE. If the mode shifts to MAINTE while in the STOP mode, the mode will shift
to STOP after completing MAINTE.

ES06_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Mode Shift Drawing
6-4

(3) During MEASURE (except for AUTO REPEAT run of normal/emergency samples)

Note 1) No mode shifting will take place even if ISE errors are generated during analysis.
Note 2) The mode will shift to STOP if mechanical errors are detected when performing a
reagent check while in the PAUSE mode.
Note 3) The mode will shift to STOP if mechanical errors in the S-Probe are detected when
performing ISE manual operation while in the PAUSE mode.

ES06_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Mode Shift Drawing
6-5

(4) During MEASURE (AUTO REPEAT run of normal/emergency samples)

Note 1) No mode shifting will take place even if ISE errors are generated during analysis.
Note 2) The mode will shift to STOP if mechanical errors are detected when performing
reagent check while in the PAUSE mode.
Note 3) The mode will shift to STOP if mechanical errors in the S-Probe are detected when
performing ISE manual operation while in the PAUSE mode.

ES06_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-1

n Triggers to Shift Modes


Current Mode Next Mode Triggers
INITIAL WARM UP Mechanical reset has been completed normally
STOP Errors have been detected during the mechanical reset
WARM UP STANDBY Lamp stable or Forced STANDBY by menu request.
W1 W1 command by MEASURE status screen
W2 W2 command by MEASURE status screen
MAINTE Maintenance menu selection using menu bar
STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key)
END System terminating (menu request)
STANDBY STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key)
END System termination (menu request )
W1 W1 command by MEASURE status screen
W2 W2 command by MEASURE status screen
PHOTOCAL PHOTOCAL command menu request
MEASURE1 MEASURE START command or by pressing STAT switch
MAINTE Maintenance menu selection using menu bar
MEASURE: MEASURE2 Rack is empty or inquiry ending after FEEDER STOP
MEASURE1 MEASURE TO RACK JAM or CUVETTE ROTATION error (can still be rotated)
STOP
MEASURE TO PAUSE request or CA/CB rack operation ending after RACK FULL
PAUSE
STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key), CUVETTE ROTATION
IMPOSSIBLE error, WATER SUPPLY / DISCHARGE error.
MEASURE Analysis end (in case of AUTO REPEAT RUN)
END
MEASURE: STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key), CUVETTE ROTATION
MEASURE2 IMPOSSIBLE Error, or WATER SUPPLY / DISCHARGE error, or Lamp off
error
MEASURE TO RACK JAM or CUVETTE ROTATION error (can still be rotated)
STOP
MEASURE TO PAUSE request or CA/CB rack action ending after RACK FULL
PAUSE
MEASURE1 MEASURE START command or STAT SW pressed
MEASURE3 Terminating R1 aspirating of last sample
MEASURE: STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key) or CUVETTE ROTATION
MEASURE3 error, WATER SUPPLY/ DISCHARGE error, or Lamp off error
MEASURE TO CA/CB rack action ending after RACK FULL
PAUSE
MEASURE TO RACK JAM or CUVETTE ROTATION error (can still be rotated)
STOP
MEASURE1 MEASURE START command, STAT SW pressed
MEASURE Analysis end (in case of photometry)
END
MEASURE: STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key), CUVETTE ROTATION
MEASURE END or WATER SUPPLY/ DISCHARGE error
MEASURE TO RACK JAM or CUVETTE ROTATION error
STOP

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-2

Continued,

Current Mode Next Mode Triggers


MEASURE: STANDBY End of washing after analysis
MEASURE END
MEASURE: STOP End of analysis
MEASURE to
STOP
MEASURE: PAUSE End of analysis
MEASURE to
PAUSE
PAUSE MEASURE1 Release of PAUSE mode (MEASURE START key).
The previous mode must be MEASURE1.
MEASURE2 Release of PAUSE mode (MEASURE START key).
The previous mode must be MEASURE2.
MEASURE3 Release of PAUSE mode (MEASURE START key).
The previous mode must be MEASURE3.
MEASURE Release of PAUSE mode (MEASURE START key).
END
STOP END System termination command
WARM UP Mechanical reset ended normally as per STANDBY request (STOP/STDBY
key)
STOP Mechanical reset ended abnormally as per STANDBY request
(STOP/STDBY key)
MAINTE MAINTENANCE menu selection using menu bar

ANL DIAG ANL DIAG command using MAINTE or manufacturer’s maintenance menu
ISE DIAG ISE DIAG command using MAINTE or manufacturer’s maintenance menu
STANDBY System termination command
W1 STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key) or abnormal ending
WARM UP W1 ended normally from WARM UP mode
STANDBY W1 ended normally from STANDBY mode
W2 STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key) or abnormal ending
WARM UP W2 ended normally from WARM UP mode
STANDBY W2 ended normally from STANDBY mode
PHOTOCAL STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key) or abnormal ending
WARM UP Photometry ended
STANDBY Photometry ended
MAINTE STOP STOP request (STOP/STDBY key) or errors during MAINTE
WARM UP MAINTE display ended
STANDBY MAINTE display ended

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-3

n Mode shift triggers (Mode to be shifted to)

Shift trigger Mode Available


indication control
Sub-mode (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
IPL end (DPR) Initialization O
STOP requisition Initialization
to Stop
Condition notice (STOP, WARM UP O O O O O O O
WARM UP)
STOP requisition WARM UP to
STOP
Forced STANDBY WARM UP to
requisition STANDBY
Condition notice (STOP, STANDBY O O O O O O O O O O
STANDBY)
STOP requisition STANDBY to
STOP
START requisition STANDBY to O
MEASURE 1
Condition notice STOP O O O O
(STOP)
STANDBY requisition STOP to
STANDBY
Condition notice (end) END
W1 start XXXX W1 xx min O
W2 start XXXX W2 xx min O O
PHOTOCAL start XXXX PHOTOCA O O
L xx min
Operation notice (W1, XXXX
W2, PHOTOCAL end)
Maintenance & DIAG XXXX Maintenanc
start e
Maintenance & DIAG XXXX
end
Reagent check & STAT XXXX
check start
Reagent check & STAT XXXX
check end
ISE manual start XXXX
ISE manual end XXXX

(1) START (2) FEEDER STOP (3)PAUSE (4) END (5) STOP/ STANDBY (6) FORCED STANDBY (7) W1
(8) W2 (9) PHOTOCAL (10) REAGENT CHECK, STAT CHECK (11) ISE MANUAL (12) DIAG
(13)MAINTENANCE (14) STAT

“XXXX” indicates that the current mode should be maintained.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-4

n Mode shift triggers (continued)


Shift factor Mode indication Available control
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
Condition notice MEASURE 1 O O O
(MEASURE 0, doesn’t
matter)
Condition notice MEASURE 1 O O O O
(MEASURE 1, doesn’t
matter)
STOP requisition MEASURE 1 to STOP
PAUSE requisition MEASURE 1 to O O
PAUSE
FEEDER STOP MEASURE 1 O O
requisition to MEASURE 2
STAT requisition MEASURE 1 O
Condition notice MEASURE 1 to STOP O
(MEASURE 1 to STOP)
Immediate STOP
Condition notice MEASURE 1 to O O O
(MEASURE 1 to STB) MEASURE 2
Condition notice MEASURE 1 to O O
(MEASURE 1 to PAUSE) PAUSE
Condition notice MEASURE 2 to O O O O
(MEASURE 2 to STB) MEASURE 3
Condition notice MEASURE 2 to O O O
(MEASURE 2 to PAUSE) PAUSE
Condition notice MEASURE 2 to STOP O
(MEASURE 2 to STOP)
Immediate STOP
START (STAT) MEASURE 2 O
requisition to MEASURE 1
Condition notice
(MEASURE 2 uncertain)
PAUSE requisition MEASURE 2 to O O O
PAUSE
STOP requisition MEASURE 2 to STOP
Condition notice MEASURE 3 to O O O
(MEASURE 3 to STB) STAND-BY
Condition notice MEASURE 3 to O O O
(MEASURE 3 to PAUSE) PAUSE
Condition notice MEASURE 3 to STOP O
(MEASURE 3 to STOP)
Immediate STOP
Condition notice XXXX
(MEASURE 4, doesn’t XXXX
matter)
START (STAT) requisition MEASURE 3 to O
Condition notice MEASURE 1
(MEASURE 3 undecided)
STOP requisition MEASURE 3 to STOP
Condition notice (STOP. Immediate STOP O O O O O
PAUSE)
START (STAT) PAUSE O
requisition to MEASURE 1
STOP requisition PAUSE to STOP

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-5

n Initial
1. Shifting condition
1) Shifts to the first mode after the power is turned on.
2) Shifts by the STANDBY command from the stop mode.

2. Initialization process
1) If the ISE mode is READY, set it to BUSY.
2) Initialize the control line.
‹ Initialize the photometry slave.
› Initialize the LAN master.
fi Initialize ISE/ Barcode communication.
fl If ISE designation has been made, the power has been turned on, and the ISE mode is not connected,
initialize the ISE.
If initalization results in an error, leave in not connect state and execute following process.
Initialize R. and ID barcode reader.
– Initialize the mechanical control system.
3) If shifting occurs after the power has been turned on, check for power failure.
4) Initialize all mechanisms.
5) Execute the neccessary procedure to transfer racks from the inside to the outside.
6) Check vacuum pressure.

3. Normal process
1) If there is no detergent solution, and if no “no DI water" or "no detergent" message has been issued, make
the solution.
If an error results, do not execute the process described under 2).
2) If a STOP command from DPR, process 5 issues a command to shop the operation. Stop other processes at
the appropriate step of each process.
*Only execute the processess decribed above.

4. Completion condition
Shift to the STOP mode after nornal/ abnormal completion of the inital process, or by issuing a STOP
command from DPR.

5. Completion process
If ISE initalization has been normally completed, set the ISE mode to READY for connection.

6. Detailed information about the process


1) Power failure check
Cause an error when the power failure sensor is on.
When creating an error, set the completion condition to be normal.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-6

n Stop mode
1. Shifting condition
1) Completion of the initial mode.
2) Completion of the MEASURE mode.

2. Initial process
1) Drain waste liquid from the vacuum tank. (Do not wait until completion.)
2) Determine the internal condition by referring to the shifting condition.
3) Set the magnetization to off at the STAT of rotation.

3. Normal process
1) Environmental change processing
Item Processing
Temparature steady Shift the mode to STAND-BY, if the internal mode is WARM UP.
(Requires 37°C for 20 minutes.) ( If started from E.STOP, 90 minutes are
required.)
No detergent solution Make the detergent solution if not notified to be "no DI water" or "no
detergent".
Reagent compartment Set the magnetization of the reagent conpertment lid to off.
lid open
STAT switch pushed Notify DPR, if the internal mode is STANDBY or PAUSE.
STAT ROT SW Make the STAT rotate if the internal mode is WARM UP, STANDBY or
(DIAG SW) pushed PAUSE.
If the DIAG process is designated with a trigger, execute the selected process.

2) Processing for the commands from DPR


Item Processing
Mode command Forcibly set the temperature condition to stable.
(Forced STANDBY)
Mode command If the execution operation can be stopped, stop the operation.
(STOP) After completing the operation, set the internal mode to STOP.
Mode command With the execution operation, wait until it has been completed, then shift to
(START) another mode.
(STANDBY) If it is draining waste water from the vacuum tank, stop it, then shift.
(END)
Action command If it is not executing a similar type operation, execute the assigned operation.
(manual) If it is draining waste from the vacuum tank, stop it, then shift to another mode.
Action command If the ISE mode is READY, set it to BUSY, then execute the instructed
(ISE manual) operation.
DPR mode command If the ISE mode is STOP, execute initialization.
(ISE ready)
DPR command If the ISE mode is BUSY, stop it.
(ISE STOP) After stopping, set the ISE mode to STOP.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-7

3) Processing against internal change


Item Processing
ISE operation If completed normally, set the ISE mode to READY.
completion If completed abnormally, set the ISE mode to STOP.
If abnormal communication occurs, disconnect it.
Depending on the type of occurred abnormality, set the internal mode to STOP.
Manual operation If completed normally, do not change the internal mode.
completion Only after completing the DIAG operation, set the internal mode to STOP.
If completed abnormally, set the internal mode to STOP, according to the
contents of the abnormality.
Drain the waste water from the vacuum tank.
DPR information Save the information received (such as analysis conditions).
receiving
Changing internal mode Notify the DPR of the internal mode.
Changing ISE mode Notify the DPR of the ISE status.
ISE washing interval If the ISE mode is READY, change it to BUSY, then execute the wash
operation.

4) Prohibited permitted conditions


Item WARM-UP STANDBY STOP PAUSE
Detergent solution production Ο Ο Ο Ο: available
SET LED Ο *1 Ο *1 Ο: ON
END LED Ο *2 Ο: ON

*1: If performing STAT manually, turn LED off, then at completion turn the LED on.
*2: Maintain the status when performing analysis.

4. Completion condition
• With the STANDBY instruction from DPR, shift to the initial mode.

• With the START instruction from DPR, shift to the MEASURE mode.

• With the System End instruction from DPR, shift the mode to END.

5. Completion process
1) Stop the vacuum tank waste pump operation.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-8

n MEASURE mode
1. Shifting condition
1) Shifted by the condition commands (START) from the STOP condition.

2. Initialization process
1) Start check
(1)Check the water supply line.
If original detergent A or detergent B is inadequate, an error is issued.
If DI water, detergent water A, or detergent water B is inadequate, an error is issued.
(2)Check the waste water line.
If the vacuum tank is full, an error is issued.
If an option exists when the concentrated waste becomes full, an error is issued.
If an option exists when the non-concentrated waste becomes full, an error is issued.
2) Initialize the Barcode reader, STAT, and ID.
3) Initialize the photometric constant.
4) Execute the 0% Photometry operation.
5) Execute Start Initialization.
6) Confirm the samples for analysis.
(1) If it concerns a Rack start command, execute rack confirmation operation.
If there is no rack, an error is issued.
(2) If it concerns a STAT start command, perform STAT cup confirmation.
If no cup, an error is issued.
7) The procedure for setting a negative pressure is performed.
8) Turn the bellows of the pump on.
DI water (P1)
Degasser (P3)
Detergent solution A (P4)
Detergent solution B (P5)

(*DPR notified of condition.)


If the ISE mode is READY, set it to BUSY.

9) Execute checking process before starting analysis.


(1) Sample level detection sensor
(2) Reagent level detection sensor
(3) W1 liquid amount
(4) If the ISE mode is not STOP, perform the following.
If the overflow sensor check counter is set to check:
Start check 2.
Set the interval value of the system condition on the ISE overflow sensor check counter.
For other cases, Start check 1.
10) Execute wash before analysis.
(Issue the Rack/ STAT start command for the analysis operation.)
11) Execute the photometry check.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-9

3. Normal process

1) Environmental change processing


Item Process
No detergent solution Make the detergent solution, if "no DI water" or "no detergent" is not
designated.
STAT switch If it is not possible to set the STAT status, shift the mode to enable this setting.
Instruct the analysis operation to shift the mode to make a setting.
If STAT status can be set, notify DPR of the STAT requirement.
DIAG switch If it is possible to set the STAT status, rotate the STAT.
SET LED If it is possible to set the STAT status, the LED will turn on.
While shifting to a mode from which it is possible to set the STAT status, the
LED will flash.
If it is impossible to set the STAT status, the LED will turn off.
END LED After completing the dispensing of the STAT samples, the LED will turn on.

2) DPR command processing


Item Process
Status command If the status after shifting is not immediate STOP, inform the analysis routine.
(STOP) If ISE is operating, issue a STOP command, then wait for completion.
Status command If the status after shifting includes rack designation and is TO STANDBY or
(START) TO PAUSE:
• Execute the rack confirmation operation.

• If it is during washing after analysis, stop it, then perform washing before

analysis.
• If the above operations are completed normally, instruct the analysis

operation to start the rack.


If the former status includes STAT designation and is not defined or is TO
STANDBY or TO PAUSE:
• Disable setting of the STAT status.

• Execute the STAT cup confirmation operation.

• If it is during washing after analysis, stop it, then perform washing before

analysis.
• If the above operations are completed normally, instruct the analysis

operation to start STAT.

Status command If the status after shifting is not defined, command the analysis operation to
(FEEDER STOP) stop the rack supply.
Status command If it is during R1 reagent dispensing and the status after shifting is not defined
(PAUSE) or is TO STANDBY, instruct the analysis operation to stop reagent
dispensing.
Status command If ISE is performing measurement, wait until it has been completed.
(ISE STOP) After measurement has been completed, shift the ISE mode to STOP, don’t
perform further measurement.

3) Internal change processing


Item Process
DPR information Store the analysis parameters.
reception If the analysis parameters have been completed and started, instruct the
analysis routine to start reagent dispensing.
Completion of manual If it is has been completed abnormally, issue an alarm.
operation According to the error trigger, instruct the analysis routine TO STANDBY,
TO PAUSE, or TO STOP.
Change of internal status Inform DPR of the internal status.
If the analysis operation has been completed, execute wash after analysis.
ISE mode change Inform DPR of the ISE status.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Mode shift triggers
7-10

4. Completion condition
1) Shift to the STOP status initialization it abnormally completed during initialization processing.
• The internal mode of the STOP status is defined by the STOP status specification.

(If there are no mechanical abnormalities, it returns to the former internal status before shifting.)
2) It shifts to the STOP status by DPR instruction (STOP) or if the analysis operation is completed
abnormally.
3) It shifts to the STOP status after all analysis operations have been completed (after analysis wash).

5. Completion process
1) The procedure for negative pressure cancellation is performed.
2) The pump turned on in the initialization process is turned off.

n End mode
1. Shifting condition
1) Shifts from the STOP status by status instruction (END).

2. Initialization operation
1) If automatic power on is not set, execute the following operations.
‹ Fill in the POWER-OFF information in the address assigned.
• Detection of EM. STOP
• Normal conpletion of cuvettes (= empty)
› Interruption not permitted
fi Turn the mode of POWER OFF of ANL control PCB into ON.
fl Wait untill the mode of POWER ON of ANL control PCB turns OFF.
Turn the ANL POWER OFF mode control PCB off.
– Set it as permanent loop.

2) If automatic power on is set, execute following operations.


‹ When turning the power on, execute the following operations.
• Set the auxillaly LED output to ON.
• Wait 250 msec.
• Set the auxillaly LED output to OFF.
• Wait 750 msec.
› Turn the re-loading flag on.
fi Turn the ANL POWER ON mode control PCB on.

3. Completion process
Shift to the turned off status by executing a hardware reset.

ES07_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
8-1
Chapter 8 File configuration

n Program file information


Documents being prepared by Product & Development Dept.

ES08_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-1

OPERATION DPR section ANL section

• Open DI water valve POWER


OFF
• Implement Maintenance Items
(required Items when Power off )
• Self Initializing (with Auto Start)

• Turn the power switch ON POWER


(automatically turned on with Auto Start) ON
• ROM/ RAM check • ROM/ RAM check IPL
• Communication channel • Communication channel
OPEN process OPEN process
DSR ON DTR ON
DTR ON DSR ON
communication check
communication check
• Load/ Check
Program loading
program
• Program write in
complete
• System confirmation Loader
loading requirement (conf. result)

• ANL/ Other not operated


Program loading according to
program conf. result
• Program write in
initial parameter • Parameter write in
complete

• Communication channel • Communication channel


CLOSE process CLOSE process
DTR ON DTR ON
DSR ON DSR ON
• communication speed change • communication speed change

• Communication channel • Communication channel INITIAL


OPEN process OPEN process
DTR ON DTR ON
DSR ON DSR ON
system condition
*Set the initial mode to INITIAL
(Operating position set by STANDBY
key)
status instruction (STANDBY)
• Initialize the control system
wait for temperature stabilization
(Y/N designation)
• Parameter input (if required) • Menu operation • Initialize the mechanical system
analysis item related
system related • Wash op. 1
others (Y/N, detergent pos. designation)
• Store the parameter in • Pre-analysis wash op.
memory (Y/N designation)
( alarm request) if required

• (Stop instruction STOP key ) (status instruction (STOP) )


• Shift to STOP
in case of stop or incorrect

• Mode indication status notice (WARM-UP)


• (Forced STANDBY menu STOP
stop instruction STOP key )
(status instruction (STANDBY/STOP) )
• Mode indication status notice (STANDBY/STOP)

• Implement Maintenance Items


(required items if power on )

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-2

OPERATION DPR section ANL section

• Preparation for analysis (such as reagent)


manual operation instruction STOP
Wash 1, Wash 2, photocal calibration operation instruction
Reagent check • Key pre-reading prohibition • (Switch input)
ISE calibration, selectivity check such as sample rotation, etc.
Cleaning, ISE prime • designated operation
( result data)
( alarm request) if required
operating notice
• Test requisition
Calibration QC Ordinary sample
(Item, Kind) (Item) (Item, sample information)

(on-line )
• Memorize information requisition
• Sample preparation
Tube, rack
Start requisition • Memorize information requisition
Index, round, start no. • Switch input (STAT start)
• Analysis start notice STAT request
START key • Start analysis
analysis parameter (1,6)
(if completed abnormally) status indication(START)
analysis parameter (others)
• Start check
• Starting initialization
(completed abnormally)
alarm request
• Mode indication status notice (STOP/STANDBY)
analysis parameter (end)
• Disregard analysis parameter
START key
(If completed normally) • Start analysis
analysis parameter(1,6)
status indication(START)
(STAT, rack order) • Start check
analysis parameter (others) • Start initialization (or STAT check during
(completed normally) STAT)

• Mode indication status notice


• Start wash ANALY
(S, R, M y/n, detergent position) -SYS
• Sample transport
• (S.ID, rack ID read)
analysis parameter (end)
• Check analysis parameter
ACAL/QC inquiry
( host inquiry) Sample inquiry
( Item selection ) (Rack ID, position, S.ID, rack kind)
ACAL/QC information
sample information
(S.No, S.ID, DPR, ID, item selection, • Item order (contamination.,
Kind, others) item , kind)
others: sample kind, dilution distinction item: ordinary,blank,pre-dilution,ISE
• R dispense (position, volume, pre-
dilution, dummy, contamination-wash)
analysis information (reagent
• Reagent remainder count consumption, etc.) detergent- kind
• S dispense(tube kind,volume,dilution
• Mix pre-dilution, kind)
• Reaction
• Photometry (wavelength)
analysis data (fast, ISE)
• Analysis data calculation analysis data
set calibration line • Cuvette wash
QC calculation
status
• Real-time output temperature (cuvette, refrigerator)
• Analysis data confirmation analysis data in tank remaining volume

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-3

OPERATION DPR section ANL section

• Interruption of analysis
PAUSE key

status instruction (PAUSE) or by alarm such as TO PAUSE


• Stop R dispensing (by item) ANALY
status notice (TO PAUSE) -SIS
FEEDER STOP key
status instruction (FEEDER or by no rack, shift below by no
• Stop rack supply instruction
status notice (TO STANDBY)
• Sample addition (normal, emergency)
Requisition input
set samples
• Stop analysis (by item)
• Reagent addition status notice (PAUSE)
reagent check instruction
operation instruction
• execute designated operation
result data
operation notice
• Restart analysis
START key • Start analysis
parameter (1, 6)
status instruction
• Start check
parameter (others)
• Start initializing
• Mode indication status notice
• Sample transportation
• (S.ID, rack ID read error)
parameter (completion)
the following are the
same as “Ordinary analysis”
• Stop S dispense/ R dispense/ wash
• Mode indication status notice

• QC chart confirmation • After all analyses


• QC menu
status notice
• After analysis wash (S, R, M-y/n,
• Mode indication wash water discharge-y/n)

status notice (STANDBY)


• Repeat run
(manual) • Repeat item selection STOP
Requisition input, Sample set • Switch input (ATART)
(ordinary, emergency) START key STAT requirement
• Start analysis
parameter (1, 6)
status instruction
parameter (others)
• Start check
• Start initialization

• Mode indication status notice


• Start wash
• Sample transportation ANALY
• (S.ID, rack I.D. read) -SIS
parameter(others)
the following are the
same as “Ordinary analysis”

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-4

OPERATION DPR section ANL section

(automatic operation)
• Analysis data calculation analysis data
repeat run judgment ANALY
repeat run inquiry -SIS
on time after data output (10 samples)
repeat run information • Rack retrieve, rack collection
sample inquiry (rack I.D., position,
S.ID , rerun identification)

sample condition
when rerun stopped, the mode does not
change
• Auto QC, auto ACAL
manual instruction (forced) analysis condition if forced, it is started as an
(only during start) status instruction (START) ordinary start, and
the starting cause must be notified
• Check the starting cause
(during sampling only) • Analysis operation
(squeeze into samples)
same as ordinary analysis
• Data edition, correction
menu operation memorize data edited
• Error occurrence as (TO STOP)
• Mode indication status notice (TO STOP)
• Stop after analysis of the current
processing cuvettes
• Stop analysis
STOP key (STOP key is effective in the all mode)
mode instruction or if error occurrence required STOP
• Stop within 1 cycle

• Mode indication status notice (STOP)


• Data output
report output instruction • Print output STOP
• On-line output
• FD output
• Instrument check/ maintenance
operation requirement • Menu operation
Operation instruction • (Key input)
• Designated operation
( operation information) ( information)
( operated notice)
• Error occurrence
• Alarm operation alarm request
message, alarm sound
• Alarm reset
alarm clear • Erase message, alarm sound
• Alarm dealing
HELP request
HELP information
• Instrument restarting
STOP key
(STANDBY) status instruction
• Return to the initial position

• End process STOP


end operation
• End menu
status instruction (END)

• Mode indication status notice


• Ending operation
• Next start time assignment (Y/N)
• Turn external power OFF (timer start)

• Close DI water valve

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-5

OPERATION DPR section ANL section

POWER
OFF

• Start system maintenance


POWER
• ROM/ RAM check IPL ON
• Communication channel • Communication channel
OPEN process OPEN process
DTR ON DTR ON
DSR ON DSR ON
communication check
communication check
• ISE load, program loading
program
• Write in the program
end
• Confirm the system loader
loading request
• ISE/ others program loading
program
• Write in the program
initial parameters • Write in the parameters
end
IPL status

• Communication channel • Communication channel


CLOSE process CLOSE process
DTR OFF DTR OFF
DSR OFF DSR OFF

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-6

n LED control
If there is a communication error, the following indication is made (Controls the 8-bit LED as fllows).
llllllll

PHASE (advance status indication)

ERROR CODE
• ERROR CODE (first 4-bit)
l l l O : received not STX, if waiting for STX NOTE: O : ON/ lit
l l O l : SIO error, if receiving information l : OFF/ not lit
l l O O : SIO error, if sending information
l O l l : received character, if sending timing
l O l O : BCC error
l O O l : CODE error
l O O O : LEN (Text length ) error
O l l l : ENQ acknowledgment is not ACK
O l l l : acknowledgment is not ACK

• IPL status (PHASE indication) (last 4-bit)


( ERROR ) ( PHASE )
MSB LSB
¬ If ANL I/O initialization completed. llll lllO
- If notified that IPL preparation ready. llll llOl
® If communication check character receiving started. llll llOO
¯ If communication check character sending started. llll lOll
° If program receiving started. llll lOlO

• If forwarding program to ANL when the power is turned on (PHASE indication) (last 4-bit)
( ERROR ) ( PHASE )
MSB LSB
¬ If checking if loading exists. llll lOOl
- If starting sum check. llll lOOO
® If starting to send loading request. llll Olll
¯ If starting to receive ANL program. llll OllO
° If making notification of loading complete. llll OlOl

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-7

n Abstract of initialization
• Initialization type
There are three types of initialization.

1. Macro action
These are grouped in each function.
2. Control line
Initialization of the function for control of each device (control driver, etc.).
3. Mechanism line control
Initialization of the function for the mechanism for each device (action driver, etc.).

n1 Macro action
If an error occurs, the next action isn't executed.
Before the action, magnetization ON is output to all mechanisms operating.
(Ex.: If the reagent line is reset, reset the exitation for the fridge after reagent probe rotation and up/down results are
on.)

1) Initialization of all mechanisms


1. Sample line, reagent line, mix line, and wash line are initialized simultaneously.
ISE is initialized too if ISE present is set and the ISE mode is connected.
2. Cuvette rotation motor (M18) and rack line are initialized simultaneously.

2) Rack line initialization


1. ID mirror motor (M3), claw feed motor 1[ID] (M4), and claw feed motor 2[S5] (M5) are initialized simultaneously.
2. Rack vertical feed motor (M1), and re-run vertical feed motor (M6) are initialized simultaneously.
3. Rack push out motor (M8) is initialized.

3) Sample line initialization


1. If the upper point sensor of the sample probe is off, the S probe up/ down motor (M11) is initialized.
2. Sample probe rotation motor (M10) is initialized.
3. Sample probe up/ down motor (M11), S probe dispense motor (M12), and STAT rotation motor (M9) is initialized.

4) Reagent line initialization


1. If the upper point sensor of the reagent probe is off, initialize the R up/ down motor (M15).
2. R probe rotation motor (M14) is initialized.
3. R up/ down motor (M15), R dispense motor (M17), and Fridge rotation motor (M16) is initialized simultaneously.

5) Mix line initialization


1. Mix up/down motor (M20) is initialized.
2. Mix rotation motor (M19) is initialized.
If in the initial position, initialization is not performed.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-8

6) Photometry line initialization


1. S probe rotation motor (M10), R probe rotation motor (M14), Mix up/ down motor (M20), and Wash up/down motor
(M22) are initialized simultaneously.
2. Cuvette rotation motor (M18) is initialized.

7) Initialization for S probe transfer


1. If the upper point sensor of the S probe is off, the S probe up/down motor (M11) is initialized.
2. S probe rotation motor (M10) is initialized.
3. S probe up/down motor (M11) is initialized.

8) Initialization for R probe transfer


1. If the upper point sensor of the R probe is off, the R probe up/down motor (M15) is initialized.
2. R probe rotation motor (M14) is initialized.
3. R probe up/down motor (M15) is initialized.

9) Initialization of all mechanisms (no action at initialization position)


Basically, it seems that no action takes place. The motor in the initialization position doesn’t actually work.

* The initialization position is the position managed by the driver and not the position detected by the sensor.

n2 For control line

• Initializaton of system control I/O


1) System control register
2) Refresh control unit
3) Wait control unit
4) Extension function for address space
5) Built-in peripheral relocation register
6) Built-in peripheral selection register
7) Standby control register
8) Timer clock selection register

• Timer/counter unit
1) Counter 0
2) Counter 1
3) Counter 2

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-9

• DPR communication
1) Setting the clock (DPR communication baud rate setting / send and receive clock 9600 x 64)
2) Serial communication IC initialization
OUTPUT (DPR communication command) = 4Fh
• Baud rate 64 times clock
• Character length 8 bit
• STOP 1 bit
• Parity None

• General purpose I/O


1) For LED / SW (Initialization for general purpose I/O)
2) For tank sensor / others (Initialization for general purpose I/O)

• Photometry control
1) Photometry sub - CPU unit initialization
2) Arcnet initialization

• LAN master
1. Control instruction " Reset " is output.
2. Waiting for "READY" for 1st station status.
If it doesn't become "READY" in 2 seconds, an error is displayed.
If the status is "disconnection,” “Send error,” “Receive error," and "board error” , an error is displayed.
3. If the status of the second station is "READY," the instruction for address table conversion is output.
If it is not "READY," an error is displayed.
If the status is "ERROR," an error is displayed.
* The setting for the second station for the physical address and logical address is the same.
4. Flag set instruction is output to each second station.
The condition is the same as ??.

• Initialization for ISE/ barcode communication


1. Check if the initial status check of ISE/ barcode communication ended normally (00h).
If it does not end normally, an error is displayed.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-10

• Barcode reader
1) Sample/ Rack ID
A command for tentative change of setting is sent.

During sample ID
Par0 84h SecurityLevel(NO)SecurityZone(6)
Par1 ??h CodeTYPE select code set in sample ID
bit1 Code39 *All bits on for multi.
bit2 ITF(INT2of5)
bit3 code128(ISBT128)
bit4 Codabar/Monac(NW-7)
bit6 DTF(STD2of5)
Par2 80h Triggermode (Host), Condence Code 39 (Disable)
Par3 08h Code ID (Symbol ID), NR (Disable), Code 128 Function (Disable)
Scan Direction (Disable)
Par4 00h UPC/EAN AUTO-D (Disable), 5Digit (Disable), 2Digit (Disable)
ITF MOD10 (Disable), DTF MOD10 (Disable)
Par5 21h Decode Attempt Time (time out when reading) (1.0sec)
Inter Decode Time (1.0sec)
Par6 06h Power Mode (Continuous), Baud Rate (4800), Parity (Non)
Beeper(Disable)
Par7 00h ITF Length 1 (0)
Par8 00h ITF Length 2 (0)
Par9 00h DTF Length 1 (0)
Par10 00h DTF Length 2 (0)
Par11 80h Preamble (Not send)
Par12 0Dh Postamble-1 (CR)
Par13 0Ah Postamble-2 (LF)

b) On rack ID
(message contents)
Par1 ??h CodeTYPE select code set in rack ID
Par5 22h DecodeAttemptTime (time out when reading) (1.5sec)
InterDecodeTime(1.0sec)

2) STAT ID
A command for tentative change of setting is sent.

(message)
Same as " Sample ID. "

3) R. ID
A command for tentative change of setting is sent.

(message)
Par1 ??h Code TYPE Only the code set in R.ID is set.
Except for “Part 1” it is the same as sample ID.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-11

n ISE
• If unit configuration information is " ISE exist " and the power of the ISE is on, the following items are
executed.

1. The communication (between ANL and ISE) start command is output.


2. Waits until the power on message is received.
If the message isn't received within 2 seconds, an error is displayed.
If an error exists, it is displayed.
3. Communication check message is sent.
4. Waits until the response message for communication check has been received.
If the message isn't received within 2 seconds, an error is displayed.
If the check character isn't correct, an error is displayed.
5. Analysis condition message is sent.
6. Waits for "READY" for ISE condition (I/O port).
If it doesn't become "READY" within 20 seconds, an error is displayed.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-12

n3 Mechanism line control

• The pulse rate of the motor is set for each OPMC.


1) Rack vertical feed motor (M1) 9) STAT rotation motor (M9)
2) Belt feed motor (M2) 10) S probe rotation motor (M10)
3) ID mirror motor (M3) 11) S probe up/ down motor (M11)
4) Claw feed motor 1[ID] (M4) 12) S probe dispense motor (M12)
5) Claw feed motor 2 [S] (M5) 13) R probe rotation motor (M14)
6) Re-run rack vertical feed motor (M6) 14) R up/ down motor (M15)
7) Re run belt feed motor (M7) 15) Fridge rotation motor (M16)
8) Rack push out motor (M8) 16) R dispense motor (M17)
17) Cuvette rotation motor (M18)
• The parameters below are set, and the command for the rotation parameter is output.

Wavelength selection All λ0


Motor magnetization OFF
• If the action does not end within 1 second, an error results.

18) Mix rotation motor (M19)


19) Mix up/down motor (M20)
20) Mixing motor (M21)
21) Wash up/down motor (M22)
22) Original detergent A supply pump (P12)
23) Original detergent B supply pump (P13)

• Initialization of the photometry constant


1. Circuit constant refresh command is output.
If the action does not end within 2 second, an error is displayed.
If there is an offset error or gain error after the action ends, an error is displayed.

• Initialization of each motor


1) Perform a check using the procedure below before executing the action.
1. Check that the automatic motor is not OPMC abnormal.
2. Check that the automatic motor is set to BUSY OFF.
3. Check that the motor is set to BUSY OFF.
If multiple motors are used in the same mechanism, check all the motors (sample probe, etc.).
4. Check the sensor of the automatic motor.
If the arm is up/down, firstly check the rotation position.
If the arm is rotated, first check the up/down position.
5. Check the sensor to see if it interfered with the other motor.
Caution ! ) This statement describes the assignment of a OPMC abnormality check but the check has to be
executed.
2) Perform a check using the order below before executing the action.
1. Moved sensor position is checked.
2. Check the motor condition that OPMC abnormal is nothing.
3. Check it the motor that is set to BUSY OFF.

Caution
1) After moving to the origin, and if the depth input action is executed continuously, the sensor position isn’t
checked in the after-action check.
2) This statement describes the assignment of a OPMC abnormality check but the check has to be executed.
If the same motor operates continuously, a minimum of 200 ms is allowed for step out prevention.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-13

1. Rack vertical feed motor supply (M1)


1) If the rack receive pitch sensor (S2) is off.
•If the re-run rack arrival sensor (S28) and the re-run rack pass sensor(S27) are off, the rack is done to

receive and enter one pitch * pulse.


•If the re-run rack arrival sensor (S28) is on or the re-run rack pass sensor(S27) is on, it an error results

and no action takes place.


•If BUSY isn't canceled for the motor within one second, an error results.

2) If the rack detection sensor (S7) is off, the rack is supplied one pitch * pulse.
•If the rack detection sensor (S7) is on, it an error results and no action takes place.

•If BUSY isn't canceled for the motor within one second, an error results.

3) The rack is supplied depth direction * pulses.


•If the rack feed pitch sensor (S1) turns off within 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn't canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2. ID mirror motor (M3)


1) If the ID mirror origin sensor (S9) is on, the reagent probe is moved * pulses until away from the S probe
position sensor.
•If the ID mirror origin seensor (S9) stays on after 2 seconds, an error results.

•If BUSY isn't canceled for the motor within 2 seconds, an error results.

2) Reset avoiding is done * pulses for the reset S position.


•If BUSY for the motor turns off after 4 seconds (timeout time).

•If the ID mirror origin sensor (S9) stays off after an action has ended, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 2 seconds, an error results.

3. Claw feed motor 1 [ID] (M4)


1) If the claw feed origin sensor 1 (S11) is on, stepping executes * pulses until away from the origin sensor (S11).
•If the claw feed origin sensor (S11) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) Reset stand executes * pulses until at the origin.


•If the claw feed origin sensor (S11) remains off after 2 seconds, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 2 seconds, an error results.

4. Claw feed motor 2 [S] (M5)


1) If the claw feed origin sensor 1 (S11) is on, stepping executes * pulses until away from the origin sensor (S14).
•If the claw feed origin sensor 1 (S11) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) Reset stand executes the pulses until at the origin.


•If the claw feed origin sensor 1 (S11) remains off after 2 seconds, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 2 seconds, an error results.

5. Re-run rack vertical feed motor (M6)


1) If the repeat run rack feed pitch sensor (S19) is off, the rack arrival sensor (S17) is off, and repeat run rack
detection sensor (S20) is off, returning is performed with the pulses for 1 pitch * pulses.[T12]
•If the rack arrival sensor (S17) is on or if the repeat run rack detection sensor (S20) is on, an error results

and no action takes place.


•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 2 seconds, an error results.

2) If the repeat run rack detection sensor (S20) is off, the retrieve action is performed for the pulses for 1 pitch *
pulses.
•If the repeat run rack detection sensor (S20) is on, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 1 second, an error results.

3) A little storage action is done the pulses for depth input * pulses.
•If the repeat run rack receive pitch sensor (S18) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-14

6. Rack push out motor (M8)


1) If the stand by position sensor (S24) is on, and the storage rack presence sensor (S21) is off and the re-run rack
pass sensor (S27) is off, push storage action is performed for the pulses for remove the stand by point sensor.
•If the storage rack presence sensor (S21) is on or if the re-run rack pass sensor (S27) is on, an error

results.
•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 3 seconds, an error results.

2) Waits 200 ms.


3) Reset stand by action is executed the pulses till going to the reset stand by position.
•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 3 seconds, an error results.

4) Waits 200 ms.


5) Stand by action is executed the pulses for depth input X pulses.
•If the stand by position sensor (S24) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

6) Re-run belt feed motor (M7) is returned within 3 seconds.


7) If the re-run rack pass sensor (S27) is off, and the storage rack presence sensor (S21) and rack full sensor (S26)
is off, the rack push out motor (M8) is pushed out.
•If the supply pass sensor is on, if the storage pass sensor is on, or if the storage full sensor is on, an error

results.
•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 3 seconds, an error results.

•If the push out position sensor (S25) remains off after 2 seconds, an error results.

7. STAT rotation (M9)


1) Magnetization turns on.
2) If the origin sensor (S29) is on, right movement at constant speed is performed by the pulses until away from
the origin.
If the sample probe is in the STAT position and the upper point sensor is off, an error results and no action
takes place.
If the sample probe is in the STAT position and the up/down motor is BUSY, an error results and no action
takes place.
•If the origin sensor (S29) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

•If the stop position sensor (S30) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

3) Left movement to reset the pulses is performed until at the reset origin.
If the sample probe is in the STAT position and the upper point sensor is off, an error results and no action
takes place.
If the sample probe is in the STAT position and the up/down motor is BUSY an error results and no action
takes place.
•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 8 seconds, an error results.

4) Waits 200 ms.


5) Left movement at constant speed is performed for the pulses for depth input.
•If the origin sensor (S29) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

•If the specified point sensor (S30) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-15

8. S probe rotation motor (M10)


1) If the rack position sensor (S33) is on, the motor goes left X pulses at constant speed to get out of the rack
position.
If the upper point sensor (S36) is off, an error results and no action takes place.
•If the rack position sensor (S33) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) Reset action rightward is executed for X pulses at reset rack position.


If the ISE cover open sensor (S89) or STAT cover open sensor (S32) is open, an error results and no action takes
place.
If the upper point sensor (S36) is off, an error results and no action takes place.
•The motor changes from BUSY to OFF in approximately 4 seconds (timeout).
•If the rack position sensor (S33) does not turn on after an action, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after an action, an error results.

•If the Cuvette position sensor (S34) remains on after an action, an error results.

•If the position check sensor (S35) remains on after an action, an error results.

3) Waits 200 ms.


4) The motor is moved left to the wash position.
•If the upper point sensor (S36) is off, an error results and no action takes place.

•If the position check sensor (S35) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

9. S probe up/down motor (M11)


1) If the upper point sensor (S36) is on, when S probe rotation motor (M10) is in the wash position, the motor is
moved down at a constant speed for X pulses to remove itself from the upper point.
•If the rotation motor isn’t in the wash position, an error results and no action takes place.

•If the upper point sensor (S36) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after 500 ms, an error results.

•If the crash detection sensor remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

2) The S probe up/down motor (M11) is moved upward to reset for X pulses at reset upper point.
•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after 3 seconds, an error results.

3) Waits 200 ms.


4) The motor is moved upward at a constant speed for X pulses for depth.
•If the upper point sensor (S38) is off, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after 500 ms, an error results.

10. S probe dispense motor (M12)


1) If the upper point sensor (S38) is on, the probe aspirates at low speed for X pulses to remove itself from the
upper point.
•If the upper point sensor (S38) doesn’t turn off after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after 500 ms, an error results.

2) The dispenser discharge for X pulses at low speed at reset upper point.
•BUSY turns off for 5 seconds (timeout time).

•If the upper point sensor (S38) does not turn on at the end of an action, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled after an action ends, an error results.

•If the lower point sensor (S39) remains on after an action ends, an error results.

3) Wait for 200 ms


4) The dispenser aspirates at low speed for X pulses at the reset position.
•When the upper point sensor (S38) is OFF, it becomes error.

•When the motor BUSY isn’t canceled after 500 ms, it becomes error.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-16

11. R probe rotation motor (M14)


1) If cuvette position sensor (S43) is on, do cuvette position dodge, for pulses, left motion with constant speed.
If the upper point sensor(S46) off, treat this as an error, and do not let it move.
• If the cuvette position sensor (S43) remain on after 500 ms, set the error.

• If BUSY is not canceled for the motor within 500 ms, set the error.

2) If the cover open sensor (S51) is shut, perform reset right motion at the reset cuvette position for * pulses.
If the cover open sensor (S51) is open, treat this as an error, and do not let it move.
If the upper point sensor (S46) is off, treat this as an error, and do not let it move.
• Wait 4 seconds for the Busy motor timeout.

• After completing the motion, and cuvette position sensor (S43) do not become on, set the error.

• If BUSY is not canceled for the motor, set the error.

• After completing the motion, and when the position check sensor (S44) is on, set the error.

• After completing the motion and when the reagent position sensor (S45) is on, set the error.

3) Waits 200 ms
4) Perform a left movement for the washing position.
If the upper point sensor (S46) is off, treat this as an error, and do not let it move.
• After 500 ms, when the position check sensor (S44) has been set to off, set the error.

• After 500 ms, and if BUSY for the motor has not been canceled, set the error.

12. R up/down motor


1) If the upper point sensor (S46) is on and R probe rotation motor (M14) is the wash position, do upper position
dodge, for pulses, with constant speed downwards.
If R rotation is not at the wash position, treat this as an error, and do not let it move.
• After 500 ms and if the upper point sensor (S46) is on, set the error.

• After 500 ms and if BUSY is not canceled for the motor, set the error.

• After 500 ms and if crash detection is on, set the error.

2) To reset the upper position, for pulses, move up.


If the R rotation is not at the wash position, do not let it move.
• Wait for BUSY to turn off in 3 seconds.

• After completing the motion, and if the upper point sensor (S46) does not turn on, set the error.

• After completing the motion, and when BUSY is not canceled for the motor, set the error.

3) Waits 200 ms.


4) Inner placing, for pulses, raising at constant speed.
• After 500 ms, and if the upper point sensor (S46) is off, set the error.

• After 500 ms, and if BUSY is not canceled for the motor, set the error.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-17

13. Fridge rotation motor (M16)


1) Magnetization is turned on.
2) If the origin sensor (S48) is on, and if the upper point sensor (S46) of the R probe rotation motor (M14) is on, or
if the sensor isn’t in the reagent position sensor, the motor is moved rightward at a constant speed for X pulses to
remove itself from the origin.
If the R rotation motor is in the reagent position sensor (S45) and the upper point sensor (S46) is off, an error
results and no action takes place.
If R rotation motor is in the reagent position sensor (S45) and the up/down motor is BUSY, an error results and
no action takes place.
• If the origin sensor (S48) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

• If the outer specifiied point sensor (S49) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If the inside specified point sensor (S50) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

3) Waits 800 ms.


4) The motor is moved leftward to reset for X pulses at reset origin.
If the R probe rotation motor is at the reagent position sensor (S45) and the upper point sensor (S46) is off, an
error results and no action takes place.
If the R probe rotation motor is t the reagent position sensor (S45) and the up/ down motor is BUSY, an error
results.
•If the motor BUSY is canceled within 20 seconds, an error results.

5) Waits 1000 ms
6) The motor is moved leftward at a constant speed for X pulses to enter the depth.
•If the origin sensor (S48) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

•If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

•If the outer specified point sensor (S49) remains of after 500 ms, it is set to off.

•If the inside specified point sensor (S50) remains off after 500 ms, it is set to off.

14. R dispense motor (M17)


1) If the upper point sensor (S53) is on, the dispenser aspirates at low speed for X pulses to remove itself from the
upper point.
•If the upper point sensor (S53) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) The probe dispense at low speed for X pulses at the upper reset position
•BUSY for the motor turns off for 5 seconds (timeout).

•If the upper point sensor (S53) is not on after 500 an action, error results.

•If BUSY for the moter is not canceled, error results.

•If the lower point sensor (S54) is on after 500 an action, error results.

3) Wait for 200 ms.


4) The probe aspirate at low speed for X pulses at the reset position.
•If the upper point sensor (S53) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY for the motor is not canceled within 500 ms, an error results.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-18

15. Cuvette rotation motor (M18)


Check the following before the action is performed;
The upper point sensor (S36) of the S probe up/down motor (M11) is ON and the up/down motor is BUSY OFF.
The upper point sensor (S46) of the R up/down motor (M15) is ON and the up/down motor is BUSY OFF.
The upper point sensor (S60) of the mix up/down motor (M20) is ON and the up/down motor is BUSY OFF.
If the upper point sensor (S61) of the wash up/down motor (M22) is on and the up/down motor is BUSY OFF,
perform the following;
1) If the origin sensor (S56) is on
1. Rotates 5 cuvettes rightward (with acceleration/deceleration).
If the motor movement has nit been completed within 2 seconds, an error results.
If the stop position sensor remains on after 2 seconds, an error results.
2. Wait for 500 ms.
2) Check before movement is performed again. Execute reset and wait for the motor to switch from BUSY to OFF.
If the motor movement is not completed, an error results.
If BUSY for the motor is not canceled, an error results.
If the origin sensor is off, an error results.
If the stop position sensor is off, an error results.
If information about the origin sensor is different, an error results.
If information about the stop point sensor is different, an error results.
16. M rotation motor (M19)
1) If the origin sensor (S58) is on, the mix rod is moved leftward at a constant speed for X pulses to remove itself
from the origin
If the origin sensor (S58) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.
If BUSY is not canceled for the motor after 500 ms, an error results.
2) To reset the upper position, for pulses, move up
•If the origin sensor (S48) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

17. M up/down motor (M20)


1) If the upper point sensor (S60) is on, the mix rod is lowered at constant speed for X pulses to move it wait from
the upper point sensor.
• If the upper point sensor (S60) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) The mix rod is moved upward to reset for X pulses at reset upper point.
• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 13 seconds, an error results.

3) Waits 200 ms.


4) The mix rod is moved upward at a constant speed for X pulses at entering depth.
• If the upper point sensor (S60) remains off after 500 ms, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-19

18. Wash up/down motor (M22)


1) If the upper point sensor (S61) is on, the wash nozzle is lowered at a constant speed for X pulses to move it away
from the upper point sensor.
• If the upper point sensor (S61) remains on after 500 ms, an error results.
• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor within 500 ms, an error results.

2) The wash nozzle is moved upward to reset for X pulses at upper reset point.
• The motor 3 seconds to switch from BUSY to OFF (timeout time).
• If the upper point sensor (S61) is off after the action has finished, an error results.

• If BUSY isn’t canceled for the motor after action has finished, an error results.
3) The wash nozzle is moved upward at a constant speed for X pulses for entering depth.
• If the upper point sensor (S61) remains of after 500 ms, an error results.
• If BUSY isn’t canceled within 500 ms, an error results.

19. ISE
1) If an ISE connection exists, the mechanism reset command is issued.
• If mechanism reset isn’t completed within 25 seconds, an error results.
• If the status is abnormal after the action has ended, an error results.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-20

n Initialization action
• ISE individual ON process
This mode is used if the connection to the ANL has been disconnected. Periodically wash and watch for execution of ANL
power. If the ISE is connected to the ANL temporarily, connection processing is performed. The processing flow is shown
below.

• Explanation of initialization flow


[0] Initialization
Initialization for hardware is performed (setting the STACK, defining the interruption, etc.).

[1] P-ON mechanism reset


If the mode becomes ISE individual ON mode, mechanism reset is performed. This mechanism reset action is the same as
mechanism reset using DIAG (reset 1).
But whether an error occurs in resetting or not, the next step is shifted to.
[2] Watch for ANL connection
Connection condition of ANL is watched periodically. When the ISE is temporarily connected to the ANL, connection
processing is performed.
[3] Periodical wash
Outer timer #1 interruption is used to periodically wash every S4 minutes. It counts at every interruption, and after S4
minutes periodical wash starts. (Default value of S4 is 30 minutes.)
If a mechanism error (including overflow) occurs during an action, other actions is stopped immediately.
If the overflow sensor turns on before an action starts, periodical wash isn’t performed. The periodical wash counter is
cleared.
If ANL is connected, periodical wash isn’t executed.
If the mode shifts from READY to ISE individual, the periodical wash counter is cleared.
ISE periodical wash has the same mechanical action as FLUSH_3, but A/D conversion isn’t executed.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-21

[4] Connection processing


If the ANL is connected, the following process is performed. The process is started even during periodical wash or
resetting. If the ANL is disconnected while waiting for a message, the process is stopped and shifted to the individual
mode. Other messages are read and discarded.

1) The periodical wash counter is stopped.


2) If the power on message is edited and received ENQ, the message is transmitted.
3) The communication check message is received and a communication check response message is transmitted.
4) If a program information message is received, the mode is shifted to the program download mode.
5) The analysis condition message is received. After the main message has been received, the process below is
performed.

* A/D transformer calibration is performed.


Output the CAL signal and CONV signal within 10 us. Don't interrupt during this interval.
* Execute the calculation below and store it.
< Coefficient for contamination correction >
A=1-beta/100
B=beta/100
C=1-beta/50

beta: Coefficient for contamination correction


f: Mid-STD liquid correction factor
Cm: Mid-STD concentration
Cm': Mid-STD real concentration
(Cm'=f x Cm : Urine/ Serum Na/K/Cl each)
6) Watch for ANL power in the above process, and if the power turns off, the power on processing will end
abnormally. If there is an abnormal end, the count for the periodical wash is started.
7) After receiving the analysis condition message, the power on processing ends normally.

Refer to the power on communication diagram on the next page.

[6] End of ISE individual on mode

After connection processing ends normally, the mode is shifted to the READY mode.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-22

n Power on sequence

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-23

n Power off sequence


• A. com error

(Caution !)
On the ISE, mechanical actions are performed until they are finished even if the connection (between the ISE and ANL) is
disconnected in mid-process.
If during this time the ANL receives a ISE instruction from the DPR, and ISE communication restarts, an error occurs
when executing reset operations while mechanical operations are executing, the connection can’t be established. In order to
prevent this, if the ISE is (temporarily) disconnected from the ANL, the connection processing isn't performed (until all
actions have ended and the condition is READY) even if it is a tentative connection.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-24

• B. ISE POWER OFF

(Caution !)
If the ANL is aware of the ISE communication error without being aware of the ISE POWER signal, the problem below
occurs. Therefore it's control of the ISE mode is necessary while watching for ISE power signal and communication errors.

If ISE power is switched off immediately after ISE transmits the message to the ANL, the communication task of the ISE
may operate before ENQ retry time-out of the ANL. If the task is performed, the ISE waits for the communication check
message because the ISE wants to perform a series of POWER ON sequences, but the ANL determines that ISE
communication continues normally.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 9 Initialize
9-25

n READY mode processing

• Mode when the ANL is on and communication is possible.


Each action is driven by a command from theANL.

[1] Initial process


The following process is executed as an initial process.
ISE READY signal is to be READY. If the current mode has moved from the individual on mode and the action is in P-ON
mechanism reset or in periodical wash (when processing for power on has been concluded during operations), the signal is
set to READY after the action has been completed.
[2] Receiving a message
Each mechanism is driven by the received command. ISE READY is set to NOT READY by the receiving command. Go
back to "READY" to go back "READY" after response.
Command types are as follows.

1. Action instruction
Each type of prime action
Calibration
Each type of cleaning
Each type of washing action Shifted to each action process
Reset
Sample aspiration
Sample mix rotation
Stop Nothing is done (response only).

2. Analysis condition message


The information is stored. Each calculation (same as power on processing) is performed.
3. The sample information message is shifted to analysis action.
4. Communication check message
A response is made to the communication check response message.
5. Program information message and program message
Nothing is done.

[3] Simultaneous signals


Nothing is done.
[4] End process
If shifted to each action process or shifted to the ISE individual on mode due to ANL disconnection, the ISE READY signal
is set to NOT READY.

ES09_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-1
Abstract

n Explanation of actions
• Action type
• Manual actions are instructions given at any time by the user. Diagnostic and maintenance actions are excluded.
The types of manual actions are given below.

1) DPR menu actions


Reagent check, STAT check, W1, W2, Photocal, etc.

2) Actions selected from DPR menu and started by ANL switch.


ISE manual actions.

3) Actions started by ANL switch


STAT rotation.

• Abstract of each action


1) Reagent check
The amount of reagent stored in the fridge unit and the ID is automatically checked.
This is required if the reagent is replaced or added.

2) STAT check
ID for RB, control (QC), and calibrator (ACAL) set on the STAT table are automatically checked. This is required
if the user sets auto/forced ACAL or QC.

3) W1 (Washing action 1) (about 9 min.)


The contents of all cuvettes are removed and a normal wash is performed.
(The wash for the sample/ reagent probe and the prime of the ISE are performed simultaneously.)
This is required if the user wants to perform the wash again, which is required if liquid remains in the cuvette.

4) W2 (Washing action 2) (about 25 min.)


The contents of all cuvettes are removed and the specified wash is performed.
(Simultaneously the wash for the sample/reagent probe, mix rod and the ISE are performed using a detergent.)
This wash must be performed once a week to remove dirt.

5) Photocal (about 20 min.)


Measurement and check is performed for all cuvettes.
This is required to wash or replace the cuvette and if the photometry is defective.

6) ISE manual action


The wash and maintenance procedure for the ISE (including the electrode) is performed.
This is required for ISE maintenance.

7) STAT rotation
The STAT table is rotated to the specified angle. This is required in cup setting.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-2

n Reagent check
1. Type
Reagent check action include the following types.

1) Reset
2) Remainder check
3) R. ID check
4) Remainder + R. ID check

2. Reset
1) Reagent line initialization is performed.
2) The check action for the reagent surface is performed.

3. Others
1) If the exitation of the reagent fridge is off or the position of the fridge is unstable, initialization of fridge
rotation is performed.

2) The position designation (in the action instruction) determines the action.

1. If the remainder check is performed


Stop position: Designation position
Action contents: Remainder check only

2. If R. ID check is performed
Stop position: The stop position of R. ID
Action contents: R. ID check is performed.

(The stop position of R. ID) = Designation position or + 17 (Offset of R. ID position)


Stop position exceeds 76 (Possible reagent numbers to set), (Stop position of R. ID) = Designation
position or + (Offset of R. ID position) - (Possible reagent numbers to set)
at < Designation position = 1- (Possible reagent numbers to set) >

3. If (Remainder + R. ID) check is performed


Stop position: Designation position or stop position for R. ID
Action contents: Position is defined as being at the combination of the remainder check and R. ID check.

The stop position of R. ID is the same as that of 2. above.

3) The stop position required in item 2), the action (according to the stop position number) is done in turn from
the position whose number is smaller than the current stop position number of fridge.
1. Remainder check
2. R. ID check
3. Remainder + R. ID check

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-3

4) The data obtained from completed data is processed as follows.

1. Remainder
If the action is normal, the remainder is determined by (remainder step number up/down action + descent
step numbers after liquid level detection).
If the action is abnormal and the bottle is absent, "0" is displayed.

2. R. ID
If the action is normal, read data is checked for reagent ID. If it is okay, read data is specified as R. ID.
If the action is abnormal and if a read error and check error have also occurred, this is specified as "????"
(18 characters).
If the bottle is absent, "0" is displayed.

5) Obtained data is transmitted to DPI.

1. Remainder check
Obtain the remainder at the stop position.

2. R. ID check
R. ID of designation position for obtained stop position is transmitted.

3. Remainder + R. ID check
Data is accumulated from procedures 1) and 2).
The position data (where data is prepared) is transmitted.

6) Items 3 to 5 are repeated and correspond to the designated stop position.

7) The number of the stop position is greater than <(Possible reagent numbers to set) + 1> and measurement of
the remainder at the pre-dilution position is performed.
Data processing is in accordance with 4 and 5.

n Explanations of actions
Refer to the time chart on the next page.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-4

< Explanations of actions > 6) R liquid level detection is made ineffective.


7) R up/down motor (M15) is raised 5 mm.
DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) is turned on. 8) R up/down motor (M15) ascends to the upper point at the reagent position.
9) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned on.
If the conditions in 1 and 2 are satisfied, the fridge rotation motor (M6) is 10) Degassed water supply pump (P11) is turned on.
moved left/right to the designated stop position. 11) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned off.
12) If the upper point sensor (S46) is on, the R rotation motor is moved to the
1) Upper point sensor (S46) of R up/ down motor (M15) is turned on. right from the reagent position (inside/ outside) to wash position.
2) Inside fixed point sensor (S50) is turned on if M6 is in the even position, If the upper point sensor (S46) is turned off, an error results.
and the outside fixed point sensor (S49) is on if M6 is in the odd position. 13) If the position sensor (S44) is turned on, the R up/down motor (M15) is
If the upper point sensor is off, an error results. lowered to the wash position.
If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is off, an error results. If the position check sensor (S44) is turned off, an error results.
If the BUSY signal does not turn off within 2.5 seconds, an error 14) SR outer wash valve (V10) is turned on.
results. 15) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned on.
If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is off, corresponding to 16) R up/down motor (M15) is raised 2 mm.
the stop position after action has end, an error results. 17) R up/down motor (M15) is raised to the wash position.
3) If the position check sensor (S44) is off or the lid open sensor (S51) is on, an 18) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned off.
error results. 19) Degassed supply pump (P11) and SR outer wash valve (V10) is turned off.
4) R liquid level detection is made effective. 20) DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) are turned off.
5) If the reagent position sensor (S45) is on and the upper point sensor (S46) is
also on, the R up/ down motor (M15) descends at the reagent position.
* Remainder is read.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-5

< Explanations of actions > 9) Degassed supply pump (P11) is turned off.
10) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned off.
1) DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) are turned on. 11) If the upper point sensor (S46) is turned on, the R
2) If the position check sensor (S44) is turned on, R rotation rotation motor (M14) is moved left from the pre-dilution
motor (M14) is moved to the right from the wash position to position to the wash position.
pre-dilution position. If the upper position is turned off, an error results.
If the reagent check sensor (S44) is turned off, an 12) If the position check sensor (S44) is turned on, the R
error results. up/down motor (M15) is lowered to the wash position.
3) R liq level detection is made effective. If the position check sensor is turned off, an error
4) If the position check sensor (S44) is turned on and the results.
upper point sensor (S46) is on, R up/down motor (M15) is 13) SR outer wash valve (V10) is turned on.
lowered to the pre-dilution position. 14) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned on.
5) R liquid level detection is made ineffective. 15) R up/down motor (M15) is raised 2 mm.
6) R up/down motor (M15) is raised 5 mm. 16) R up/down motor (M15) is raised to the wash position.
7) R up/down motor (M15) is raised to the upper position at 17) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned off.
the pre-dilution position. 18) Degassed supply pump (P11) and SR outer wash valve
8) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned on. (V10) are turned off.
19) DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) are turned off.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-6

< Explanations of actions > If the upper point sensor is turned off, an error
results.
1. If conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied, the fridge rotation If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is turned
motor (M6) is moved left/right to the designated stop off, an error results.
position. If the BUSY signal is not turned off within 2.5
seconds, an error results.
1) Upper point sensor (S46) of R up/down motor (M15) is If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is turned
turned on. off, corresponded to the stop position after the action is end,
2) Inside fixed point sensor (S50) is turned on if M6 is in an error results.
the even position, and the outside fixed point sensor (S49) is 2. If the bottle presence sensor (S52) is turned on, R. ID is
turned on if M6 is in the odd position. issued.
If the bottle presence sensor (S52) is turned off, the
action is ended.
3) Fridge rotation motor (M16) is moved left at low speed.
4) Fridge rotation motor (M16) is moved left to a fixed
point.
(If it ends normally, the position information is updated.)

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action Reagent check
10-7

< Explanations of actions >


DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) is turned on. 6) R liquid level detection is made invalid.
7) R up/down motor (M15) is raised 5 mm.
If the conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied, the fridge rotation motor (M6) is moved 8) R up/down motor (M15) is raised to the upper point at the reagent position.
left/right to the designated stop position. 9) If the bottle presence sensor (S52) is turned on, R. ID is issued.
10) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned on.
1) Upper point sensor (S46) of R up/ down motor (M15) is turned on. 11) Degassed water supply pump (P11) is turned on.
2) Inside fixed point sensor (S50) is turned on if M6 is in the even position, 12) Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned off.
and outside if the fixed point sensor (S49) is turned on if M6 is in the odd 13) If the upper point sensor (S46) is turned on, the R rotation motor is moved
position. rightwards from the reagent position (inside/ outside) to the wash position.
If the upper point sensor is off, an error results. If the upper point sensor (S46) is turned off, an error results.
If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is turned off, an error 14) Fridge rotation motor (M16) is moved left at low speed.
results. 15) If the position sensor (S44) is turned on, the R ud motor (M15) is lowered
If the BUSY signal is not turned off within 2.5 seconds, an error to the wash position.
results. If the position check sensor (S44) is turned on, an error results.
If the inside or outside fixed point sensor is turned off, 16) Inner wash back valve (V9) and SR outer wash valve (V10) are turned on.
corresponding to the stop position after the action has ended, an error results. 17) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned on.
3) If the position check sensor (S44) is on and the lid open sensor (S51) is off, 18) Fridge rotation motor (M16) is moved left to the fixed point.
the R rotation motor (M14) is moved to the left from the wash position to the (If it ends normally, the position Information is updated.)
reagent position (inside/outside). 19) R ud motor (M15) is raised 2 mm.
*If the position check sensor (S44) is OFF, an error results. 20) R ud motor (M15) is raised to the wash position.
*If the lid open sensor (S51) is ON, an error results. 21) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned off.
4) R liquid level detection is made effective. 22) Degassed supply pump (P11) and SR outer wash valve (V10) are turned
5) If the reagent position sensor (S45) is turned on and the upper point sensor off.
(S46) is on, the R up/ down motor (M15) is lowered to the reagent position. 23) DI water pump (P1) and degasser (P3) are turned off.
* The remainder is read.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-8
STAT check

n STAT check
•1 STAT check action

1. If the exitation of the STAT rotation motor (M9) is off and the position of motor is unstable, initialize the STAT
rotation table.
If an error has occurred, an alarm is output and the actions below is not performed.

2. Initialization of the barcode reader at the STAT ID position is performed using the S. ID conditions.

3. The information for the stop position and the action contents are generated from the designated position.
Stop position: Stop position of STAT. ID + Stop position for cup detection
Stop position of STAT. ID : Designated position - 4 (STAT.ID position offset)
Stop position for cup detection : Designated position - 5 (Cup detection position offset)
However if the stop position exceeds 22 (possible number to set), the position is determined by (stop
position number + possible number to set).
Contents of action : Combination of cup detection and STAT.ID check

The stop position is calculated from the STAT number of the access position of the sample probe.

4. At the stop position required in item 3, a STAT check is performed in turn from the position whose number is
larger than current stat stop position.

5. The data obtained from the action is processed according to the procedure below.
Cup presence : Whether the cup exists or nothing is in the designated position is determined by the
sensor.
STAT.ID : If the action is normal, and if a read data check performed by the sample ID is okay,
read data is determined as STAT. ID.
If an abnormal action, read error, or check error has occurred, it becomes ??? (22characters).

6. The data of the position (that is prepared cup presence data and STAT. ID data both) is output. If there is no
cup, "0" is displayed for STAT. ID

7. Items from 4 to 6 are repeated, corresponding to the designated stop position.

• 2 STAT rotation action


1. The exitation of STAT rotation motor (M9) is off, the exitation is turned on.

2. If the upper point sensor (S36) of the S probe up/down is on, the STAT rotation motor (M9) is rotated leftward.
If the BUSY signal isn't turned off within 2 seconds, an error results.

3. The exitation of the STAT rotation motor (M9) is turned off.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-9
STAT check

< Explanations of actions > If a cup at designated position exists or if a setting is


undetermined, a STAT. ID is issued.
If the fixed point sensor (S30) is turned on, the stat rotation If it has been determined that no cup is present, the below
motor (M6) is rotated leftward to the designated stop action is stopped and shifted to next stop position.
position.
If the current position and next stop position are the same, STAT rotation motor (M9) is moved leftward at low speed.
no action occurs.
If the fixed point sensor is turned off, an error results. STAT rotation motor (M19) is moved leftward to a fixed
If the "BUSY" signal doesn't turn off within a few seconds, point.
an error results. (If it ends normally, the position information is updated.)
If the fixed point sensor is turned off after the action has If the fixed point is turned off after the action has ended, an
ended, an error results. error results.

Cup presence information is set by the cup presence sensor


(S31).

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-10
W1 action

n W1 action
1. Action for start check
This process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and an action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In each item action stop is possible by outer instruction.

1) Water supply line is checked.


If original detergent A or original detergent B is insufficient, an error results.
If DI water, detergent water A, or detergent water B is insufficient, an error results.

2) Waste water line is checked.


If the vacuum tank is full, an error results.
If an option exists and if the concentrated waste water is full, an error results.
If an option exists and if the non-concentrated waste water is full, an error results.

3) Initialization is performed. (The unit in the initial position doesn't work.)

4) Action for the negative pressure setting.

5) Next pump is turned on.


DI water (P1), Degasser (P3), Detergent water A (P4), Detergent water B(P5)

6) If the ISE mode is "READY", it is set to "BUSY".

2. Action for preparation


The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In one pitch actions action stop is possible by outer instruction.

1) The action for cuvette preparation is performed in 4.5 second-cycles while moving the cuvette rotation motor
(M18) rightward by one pitch.

3. Action for wash


The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop is occurred, jump to step 4.
Action stop is possible by outer instruction at determined position in each action.

<Cuvette>
In one pitch action the action stop is possible by outer instruction.
1) The cuvette wash action is performed in a 4.5 second-cycle while moving the cuvette rotation motor (M18) one
pitch rightward.
In the beginning, the contents of all cuvettes, except the cuvette in position is 80 has not been determined.

<S probe, R probe, Mix rod>


In each unit action the stop action is possible by outer instructions.
1) Washing the sample probe (liquid level check is nothing) with degassed water is performed 3 times.
2) Washing the reagent probe with degassed water is performed 8 times.
3) The mix rod action at water is full for is performed.

<ISE>
If there is a stop instruction, the ISE is stopped.
1) All prime of ISE is performed.

4. End action
1) Next pump is turned off.
DI water pump (P1), Degasser pump (P3), Detergent water pump (P4), Detergent water pump (P5)
2) Negative pressure cancel action is performed.
3) If the ISE mode is "BUSY", "READY" is set.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-11
W2 action

n W2 action
1. Action for start check

The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In each item action stop is possible by outer instruction.

1) Water supply line is checked.


If original detergent A or original detergent B is insufficient, an error results.
If DI water, detergent water A, or detergent water B is insufficient, an error results.

2) Waste water line is checked.


If the vacuum tank is full, an error results.
If the option exists and if the Non-concentrated waste water is full, an error results.
If the option exists and if the concentrated waste water is full, an error results.

3) Initialization is performed.

4) Action for the negative pressure setting.

5) Following pumps are turned on.


DI water (P1), Degasser (P3), Detergent water A (P4), Detergent water B(P5)

6) If the ISE mode is "READY", it is set "BUSY".

7) Sample liquid level sensor check action is performed.


8) Reagent level sensor check action is performed.
9) The sample W2 liquid check action is performed.
10) The reagent W2 liquid check action is performed.
11) The cleaning liquid check action is performed.

* Operations 7) to 11) are performed simultaneously.


(If an error has occurred in the action, except in steps 7 to 11, the action is stopped at the end of unit action
(item)).

2. Action for preparation (Action is performed with steps 7 to 11 being performed


simultaneously.)

The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In one pitch actions the action stop is possible by outer instruction.
The following action is performed simultaneously.
(If an error has occurred in the action, except in steps 7 to 11, the action is stopped at the end of unit action
(item)).

<Cuvette>
1. Cuvette preparation action is performed in 4.5 second-cycles while moving the cuvette rotation motor (M18)
one pitch rightward.
2. The cuvette rotation motor (M18) is rotated and moves 1 pitch to the right in 4.5 second-cycles while washing
the cuvette until the head cuvette (in the 84th position after the preparation action) is in next position (in the 79th
position) to dry.

<Mix rod>
1. Action for preparation of mix rod is performed.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-12
W2 action

n W2 action
3. Action for wash
The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
Action stop is possible by outer instruction at determined position in each action.

1) The actions below are performed simultaneously.

<Wash R probe, cuvette, mix rod>


Cuvette rotation motor is rotated with analysis action simultaneously.
(Cuvette wash action is performed from the head cuvette to the end cuvette.)
1) If the cuvette for R1 dispense timing is in the range from the head to end, the wash water dispense (W1)
for reagent probe is performed. (Liquid quantity 300ul)
2) If the cuvette for R2 dispense timing is in the range from the head to end, the wash water dispense (W2)
for reagent probe is performed. (Liquid quantity 300ul)
3) If the cuvette for mix timing is in the range from the head to end, the detergent wash of mix rod is
performed.
<S probe, Wash for ISE>
1. Detergent water wash (W2) of the sample probe is performed 20 times.
2. If selected, cleaning of ISE is performed.
2) Cuvette wash action is performed.
3) End action of mix rod is performed.

4. End action
1) Following pumps are turned off.
DI water pump (P1), Degasser pump (P3), Detergent water pump (P4), Detergent water pump (P5)
2) Negative pressure cancel action is performed.
3) If the ISE mode is "BUSY", "READY" is set.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-13
PHOTOCAL

n Action for PHOTOCAL


1. Action for start check
The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In each item action stop is possible by outer instruction.

1) Water supply line is checked.


If original detergent A or original detergent B is insufficient, an error results.
If DI water, detergent water A, or detergent water B is insufficient, an error results.
2) Waste water line is checked.
If the vacuum tank is full, an error results.
If an option exists and if the Non-concentrated waste water is full, an error results.
If an option exists and if the concentrated waste water is full, an error results.
3) Photometry constant is initialized.
4) Photometry action at 0% is performed. (0% data is transmitted.)
5) Initialization is performed.
6) Action for negative pressure setting.
7) Following pumps are turned on.
DI water (P1), Degasser (P3), Detergent water A (P4), Detergent water B(P5)

2. Action for preparation


The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
In one pitch actions the action stop is possible by outer instruction.

1) The action for cuvette preparation is performed in 4.5 second-cycles while moving the cuvette rotation motor
(M18) rightward by one pitch.
2) Photometry check action is performed.
3) The cuvette rotation motor (M18) is rotated and moves 1pitch to the right in 4.5 second-cycles while washing
the cuvette until the head cuvette (in the 84th position after the preparation action) is in the R1 dispense position
(in the 51st position).

3. Action for photocal


The process is performed as follows. If an abnormal end and action stop has occurred, jump to step 4.
Action stop is possible by outer instruction at determined position in each action.

1. The following action is performed in 6.8 second-cycles while moving the cuvette rotation motor (M18)
rightward by one pitch. (with Photocal measurement)
1) Degassed water dispensation is performed for all cuvettes (88 pcs.) from the head cuvette.
2) Wash action (detergent A, detergent B, water) for the cuvettes is performed in the action for cuvette
rotation motor (M18).
3) The photocal photometry command is output until all the data has been collected (20 times) after the
degassed water dispense action has ended.
4) After item 3 has ended, data processing for the photometry command is performed.
2. The cuvette wash action is performed in 4.5 second-cycles while moving the cuvette rotation motor (M18)
rightward by one pitch.

4. End action
Following pumps are turned off.
DI water pump (P1), Degasser pump (P3), Detergent water pump (P4), Detergent water pump (P5)
Negative pressure cancel action is performed.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-14
ISE action

n ISE action
1. Type
The manual action of the ISE has 2 starting methods.
1) Individual action : It is selected and started from the DPR menu.
2) Prime action : It is selected from the DPR menu and started with the switch on the ANL side.
The action is described below.

2. Individual action
If an abnormal end or action stop has occurred, the procedure is stopped at the end of each unit action.
1) Calibration
The time-out for each action is set, and the end information or time-out results in an error.(Action has
ended.)
There are three types of calibration.
Serum only : 1,7,8,9,10,11,12 are executed.
Urine only: 1,2,3,4,5,6,12 are executed.

1. <FLUSH_1 + stability check> is performed.


If it eds abnormally, an error results and the next procedure is not performed.
2. <Urine HIGH STD PRE check> is performed.
The sample is performed in the U-H position on the STAT side (liquid 25 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (See section 2.4.5.)
If it ends abnormally, move to step 5.
3. <Urine LOW STD PRE check> is performed.
The sample is dispensed in the U-L position on the STAT side (liquid 25 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1 ul)
(See section 2.4.5.)
If it ends abnormally, move to step 5.
4. If item 2 and 3 end normally, move to step 6.
5. <Urine CAL> is performed.
??? signal for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is outputted.
The sample is dispensed in the U-L position on the STAT side and outputted to the ??? signal (4 times).
Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.

6. Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.


7. <Serum HIGH STD PRE check> is performed.
The sample is dispensed in the S-H position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (See section 2.4.5.)
If the reasult ends abnormally, move to step 10.

8. <Serum LOW STD PRE check> is performed.


The sample is dispensed in the S-L position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (See section 2.4.5.)
If the reasult ends abnormally, move to step 10.

9. If items 7 and 8 end normally, move to step 11.


10. <Serum CAL> is performed.
??? signal for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is outputted.
The sample is dispensed in the S-L position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (It is performed 4 times.)
The sample is dispensed in the S-H position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (It is performed 4 times.)
Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.

11. Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.


12. Measurement data is outputted.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Explanation for action
10-15
ISE action

n ISE action
2) Selectivity check
The time-out of each action is set and the end information or time-out results in an error.

1. Washing 1 before analysis (FLUSH_1) is performed.


2. Periodical wash (FLUSH_4) is performed.
3. Selectivity check (Na) is performed 4 times.
The sample is dispensed in the Na-SEL position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air
1 ul). (See section 2.4.5.)
4. Selectivity check (K) is performed 4 times.
The sample is dispensed in the K-SEL position on the STAT side (liquid 20 ul, dilulent liquid 10 ul, air 1
ul). (See section 2.4.5.)
5. Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.

3) Cleaning
The cleaning of ISE washing is performed.

4) Reset
The mechanism line initialization action of ISE is performed.

3. Prime action
The selected action is performed by pressing DIAG SW until the action end instruction is performed.
Each action is stopped when abnormal end or action stop instruction is received.
The timeout is set in each action. It is ended by completion information or time out time.

1) Electrode replacement
First time of action selection is executed No.1 and from 2nd time, executed No.2.
1. PRIME_3 (waste the water via flow cell) is executed.
2. PRIME_1 (MID/REF prime) is executed.

2) General prime
ISE wash of all prime is performed.

3) Buffer prime
1. PRIME_4 (waste the water via bypass) is executed.
2. PRIME_6 (buffer liquid individual prime) is executed 9 times.

4) Mid STD prime


1. PRIME_4 (waste the water via bypass) is executed.
2. PRIME_5 (MID/ REF liquid individual prime) is executed 8 times.
3. PRIME_1 (MID/REF prime) is executed.

5) Waste water (Bypass)


1. PRIME_4 (waste the water via bypass) is executed.

6) P tube replacing
1. PRIME_4 (waste the tube via bypass) is executed.
2. PRIME_7 (MID liquid individual prime) is executed 2 times.
3. PRIME_1 (MID/ REF prime) is executed 2 times.

ES10_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-1

1. Basis of analysis data calculation


1) Data type transmitted from ANL
(1) Photometry data
OD * (binary data of 10000)
(2) ISE data
PACK BCD binary point is fixed by each item
2) Data type handled by data processing
Single precision REAL type data.
If there is a problem, the data is handled as double precision REAL type data.
3) Basis of data operation
(1) Range check
Range check is performed against printed or displayed data
CRT displayed data
Print out data
On-line output data
Output data to floppy disk
(2) Displayed and output is output after rounding off
Dynamic range check
Panic range check
Normal value range check
QC range check, QC stack processing, QC multi rule check
(3) Cross-items calculation and cross-items check is performed using operated items data and print out data.
(4) Others
Internal operation is performed with REAL type data except in special cases.
4) Multiplex data processing (Averaged processing)
(1) Abstract
With one analysis item, the same analysis is performed to determine the representation value of output data.
(2) Object sample type
Reagent blank, Calibration sample
(3) Processing contents, condition
The value is calculated using data analyzed multiple times for assigned according to items cuvette numbers and
items.
Cuvette Qty. Processing contents
1 Available data becomes representation value.
2 The average value for two pieces of available data becomes the representation value.
If there is only one piece of data, there is no representation value.
3 With 3 values, the average value of two pieces of data with the smaller difference becomes
the representation value.
If two pieces of data are available, it is in accordance with the cuvette number 2.
4 With 4 values the average value of two data except max and min becomes the representation
value.
If three pieces of data are available, it is in accordance with the cuvette number 3.
If two pieces of data are available, it is in accordance with the cuvette number 2.
If only one piece of data at most is available, there is no value.
Note ) Available data isn’t attached with an abnormal mark, and data exists.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-2

2. Processing flow
Processing outline
Photometry data processing

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-3

ISE data processing

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-4

(1) Processing flow

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-5

3. Processing for calculating the value for reaction OD


1) RATE processing
(1) Processing flow

Processing flow for “+ ” slope

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-6

Processing flow for “ - ” slope

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-7

*1 Reverse reaction check


Check is performed on the available photometry point as follows. For abnormal data, “ V ” is attached.

Slope Judgment formula


+ (Pn - Pn+1) / 2 > d
- (Pn+1 - Pn ) / 2 > d
“ n ” and “ n+1 ” is the available photometry point.

( When n = 10 )
Slope Judgment formula
+ (P10 - P11) / 3 > d
- (P11 - P10) / 3 > d
“ d ” is the capable reverse OD value from the 9 second-unit.
“ d ” is included in the maker fixed parameter as an inside value.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-8

*2 Lineality check
Available points are divided in the front half and rear half and ∆E is calculated (for each).
If the following judgment formula isn’t satisfied, the error mark “ * ”is appended as linearity check error.

Judgment formula
∆E1- ∆E2
∆E1 + ∆E2 x 100 < linearity limitation
2 (Set by parameter menu)
or
∆E1 - ∆E2 < C
C: Set by parameter menu

*3. Calculation for reaction OD value using method of smallest squares


The OD value is calculated using the following formula and using the available photometry point. ((∆Ex
(which is calculated when the linearity check has been performed.) is the same.))
Σ ODI x ti - ( Σ ti x Σ ODI ) / n
Σ ( tI x ti ) - ( Σ ti x Σ ti) / n
The calculated value is the reaction OD value for 9 seconds. The value for one minute is calculated in multiples of
60/9.

Relationship between available photometry point and ti


Photomet ti ODI Photometr ti ODI
ry point y point
P1 0 OD1 P15 29 OD15
P2 2 OD2 P16 31 OD16
P3 4 OD3 P17 33 OD17
P4 6 OD4 P18 35 OD18
P5 8 OD5 P19 37 OD19
P6 10 OD6 P20 39 OD20
P7 12 OD7 P21 41 OD21
P8 14 OD8 P22 43 OD22
P9 16 OD9 P23 45 OD23
P10 18 OD10 P24 47 OD24
P11 21 OD11 P25 49 OD25
P12 23 OD12 P26 51 OD26
P13 25 OD13 P27 53 OD27
P14 27 OD14

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-9

*4 Search of calculation range of the value of reaction OD


• If the reaction slope is "-"
First point If the point counts up from the point set by the parameter menu, the first point below MAX OD that doesn’t have
a "@" mark (in the column of the OD value in each wavelength) is set as the photometry point.
* "@" indicates the value of OD is over 2.5.
Last point If the point counts down from the point set by the parameter menu, the photometry point before the 1st Min OD
is set as the photometry point.
• If the reaction slope is "+"
First point If the point counts up from the point set by the parameter menu, the first point after Min OD is set as the
photometry point.
Last point If the point counts down from the point set by the parameter menu, the first point below MAX OD and that
doesn’t have a "@" mark (in the column of the OD value in each wavelength) is set as photometry point.
* "@" indicates the value of OD is over 2.5.

<Search of calculation range of the value of reaction OD>


• If the reaction slope is "-"
First point If the point counts up from the point set by the parameter menu, the point that does not have a "@" mark (in the
column of the OD value in each wavelength) is set as the photometry point.
* "@" indicates the value of OD is over 2.5.
Last point If the point counts down from the point set by the parameter menu, and is set as the photometry point.
• If the reaction slope is "-"
First point The point set by the parameter menu is set as the first photometry point.
Last point If the point counts down from the point set by the parameter menu, the point that doesn’t have a "@" mark (in the
column of the OD value in each wavelength) is set as the photometry point.

*5 Calculation for delta ∆E of D and B marks


(1) First point to first point +1
Reaction slope Reaction OD value Value for one minute
+ ∆E = OD (First point +1) - OD (First point) * 60 / 18
- ∆E = OD (First point) - OD (First point+1) * 60 / 18
If the first point is “ 11 ”, the value for one minutes is “ x 60/27 ”
(2) Last point - 1 to last point
Reaction slope Reaction OD value Value for one minute
- ∆E = OD (Last point -1) - OD (Last point) * 60 / 18
If the first point is “ 11 ”, the value for one minute is “ x 60/27 ”
*6 Calculation for max. ∆E
If the first point is over P11, the max. value of ∆E is used by the data to calculate the following formula for P11 to the last
point.
Reaction slope Reaction OD value Value for one minute
+ ∆E = OD (point +1) - OD (point) * 60 / 18
- ∆E = OD (point) - OD (point+1) * 60 / 18
11 ≤ point, point + 1 ≤ Last point
If the first point is under P10, the max. value of ∆E is used for the data to calculate the following formula for P1 to the last
point. (If the point is equal to 10, the value for one minute is “ x 60/27 ”.)
Reaction slope Reaction OD value Value for one minute
+ ∆E = OD (point +1) - OD (point) * 60 / 18
- ∆E = OD (point) - OD (point+1) * 60 / 18
1 ≤ point, point + 1 ≤ Last point

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-10

(2) Basic operation formula for RATE reaction OD value

4) Processing of sample blank


Abstract
The value of reaction OD is calculated as a sample blank item by analyzing the emit item and the blank item
individually in the same sample and then performing subtraction in the level of the value for reaction OD.

Basic operation formula


(Value of reaction OD for sample blank) = (Value of reaction OD for emit item) - (Value of reaction OD for blank
item)
The value of the reaction OD for the sample blank becomes the data of the emit item.

Others
Process the value of the reaction OD as follows.
< 1. If either the value of the reaction OD for the emit item or the blank item cannot be calculated. >
The value of the reaction OD as the sample blank item is handled as if there is no data, and the abnormal value
mark is attached as OR type for the emit item and blank item.
< 2. If either the value of the reaction OD for the emit item or blank item can't be analyzed by reagent error or
sample error. >
The value of the reaction OD for the sample blank is calculated for a data item that exists as a sample blank
item, and the abnormal value mark is the same as the above.
< 3. If either the value of the reaction OD for the emit item or blank item has an abnormal value mark. >
The abnormal value mark is attached to the value of the reaction OD for the sample blank.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-11

4. Processing the data check


1. Processing the OD level check
1) Check for OD2. 5000 over
(1) Check timing
Immediately after the WB correction.
After the two wavelength corrections.
(2) Check contents
In each photometry point, the following item is checked and the error mark is attached.
Check if the value of the water blank base (photocal data base) for the measured wavelength (max. 2
wavelength) that exceeds 2.5 is checked.
Check if the value of the OD for photometry point exceeds 2.5 after reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength
correction.
(3) Data mark
If the value of the reaction OD is calculated using photometry the point exceeds OD 2.5, the data mark "@" is
attached.
2) Check the value of reagent OD
(1) Check timing
If the reagent blank is measured after 2 wavelength corrections.
Except if the reagent blank is measured, after 2 wavelength corrections.
(2) Check contents
The value of OD after 2 wavelength corrections for the smaller photometry point of the first point set in the
analysis parameter (if the reagent blank is measured).
The value of OD after 2 wavelength corrections for the bigger photometry point of the last point set in the
analysis parameter (if the reagent blank is measured).
The limitation range for the value of the reagent blank OD set in the analysis parameter about the above value
of OD.
Except if the reagent blank is measured.
The limitation range for the value of the reagent blank OD set in the analysis parameter about the value of
measured OD after 2 wavelength correction at photometry point P0.
(3) Data mark
Check of first point is under --- [u] over ---[y]
Check of last point is under --- [U] over ---[Y]
3) Check for MAX/ MIN OD
(1) Check timing
If the value of reaction the OD for the rate item or fixed item is calculated.
(2) Check contents
If the check for the value of the reaction OD is designated, the check is performed.
(See the calculation process for the value of the reaction OD.)
(3) Data mark
Over Max. OD [D]
Over Min. OD [B]
4) Check available point
(1) Check timing
If the value of the reaction OD for the rate item is calculated.
(2) Check contents
Checked if the available photometry point of the reaction OD calculation is 3 points or more.
(3) Data mark
The available photometry point is 3 points or less.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-12

5) Check for linearity


(1) Check timing
If the value of the reaction OD for the rate assay is calculated.
(2) Check contents
The linearity of the reaction curve during calculation for the value of the reaction OD.
(See the processing of the value of reaction OD.)
(3) Data mark
Linearity error [*]
6) Check for opposite reaction
(1) Check timing
If the value of the reaction OD for rate assay is calculated.
(2) Check contents
The counter reaction of the reaction curve during calculation for the value of the reaction OD.
(See the processing of the value of reaction OD.)
(3) Data mark
Counter reaction error . [*]
7) Check for data
(1) Check timing
If the value of the reaction OD is calculated.
(2) Check contents
Rate, end, and fixed items if the check designation exists in the time of calculation for the value of reaction
OD.
Check is performed if the reaction slope is set "+".
(a) DATA CHECK 1
After setting the three photometry points to check starting by parameter and three coefficients for judgment,
it is judged using the formula below.
K < (OPx-OPy) / (OPz-OPy) <= L
If the above formula isn't satisfied, a data mark is attached.
OPx:Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPy:Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPz:Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
Px < Py < Pz
K: Coefficient for judgment
L: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 <= K < L < 2.0000 )
If (Value of reaction OD) < M , the check isn't performed.
M: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 < M < 2.5000 )

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-13

(b) DATA CHECK 2


judged using the formula below.
The photometry point set by parameter becomes.
Pn, Pn+m, Pn+3m, Pn+4m
A=(OPn+m - OPn)/(OPn+2m - OPn)
B=(OPn+2m - OPn+m)/(OPn+3m - OPn+m)
C=(OPn+3m - OPn+2m)/(OPn+4m - OPn+2m)
(MAX(A,B,C)-MIN(A,B,C))/AVE(A,B,C) <= K
If the above formula isn't satisfied, the data mark is attached.

OPn: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.


(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+2m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+3m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+4m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
MAX: Maximum value in the bracket.
MIN: Minimum value in the bracket.
AVE: Average value in the bracket .
K: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 < K ) Setting value using parameter.
If (Value of reaction OD) < M , the check isn't performed.
M: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 < M < 2.5000 ) Setting value using parameter.
(c) DATA CHECK 3
After setting one of the photometry points to start checking using a parameter and two coefficient for the interval and
judgment, it is judged using the formula below.
A=(OPn+m - OPn)
B=(OPn+2m - OPn+m)
C=(OPn+3m - OPn+2m)
D=(OPn+4m - OPn+3m)
(MAX(A,B,C)-MIN(A,B,C))/AVE(A,B,C) <= K
If the above formula isn't satisfied, the data mark is attached.

OPn: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.


(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+2m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+3m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
OPn+4m: Value of measured OD at designated photometry point.
(After reagent blank correction and 2 wavelength corrections.)
MAX: Maximum value in the bracket.
MIN: Minimum value in the bracket.
AVE: Average value in the bracket.
K: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 < K ) Setting value by parameter.
If (Value of reaction OD) < M , the check isn't performed.
M: Coefficient for judgment ( 0 < M < 2.5000 ) Setting value using parameter.
(3) Data mark
If the above formula for judgment isn't satisfied. [Z]
If the value of OD for each check point is abnormal. [&]

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-14

2. Processing of the check for concentration level


1) Dynamic range check
(1) Check timing
Immediately after the calculation of concentration.
(2) Check contents
The check is performed in the dynamic range set in the condition of each item analysis, and the mark is
attached if it is out of range.
(3) Data mark
If it exceeds the upper limit. [G]
If it is below the lower limit. [F]
2) Panic range check
(1) Check timing
At the end of calculation for final concentration.
(2) Check contents
The check is performed in the panic value range set in the condition of each item analysis, and the mark is
attached if it is out of range.
(3) Data mark
If it is out of range (except lower limit to upper limit). [P]
At this time, the alarm can be issued.
3) Range check for the normal value/ POS/ NEG check
(1) Check timing
At the end of calculation for final concentration after checking of panic value.
(2) Check contents
a. The check is performed in the normal value range set for the condition of each item analysis, and the mark
is attached if it is out of range.
b. If the level check is designated, the check is performed in the level of the range set in the condition of each
item analysis.
(3) Data mark
If not in the level check.
If it exceeds the upper limit. [H]
If it is below the lower limit. [L]
If the level check is designated.
If it exceeds the upper limit. [P]
If it is below the lower limit.[N]
4) Check for re-run level
(1) Check timing
If the final concentration value has been calculated and after the check of normal value range.
(2) Check contents
Repeat run level set by repeat run analysis condition
(3) Data mark
If it exceeds upper limit value. [ J ]
If it is under the lower limit value. [K]

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-15

5) Cross-check items
(1) Check timing
The operated items designated in the check condition between items are all entered after final concentration
calculation, or after the calculation of one piece of sample data has been performed.
(2) Check contents
The check is performed for the setting range, operation formula, and item combination set by the check
condition between items for concentration value.
If the operation results are outside the setting range, it’s attached the mark on all operated items.
(3) Data mark
If the range is outside the lower limit to upper limit range. [T]
6) Calculated Test
(1) Check timing
After performing the necessary tests are output in CONC, or after calculating the results of one sample.
(2) Check contents
Checking will be performed against the CONC value along with the conditions that are designated by
CALCULATED TEST CONDITION, such as Test Matching, Formula and Allowed Range, then if the results
are out of the designation, appropriate marks will be attached to the results.
The same process will be performed as the Normal Range and POS/NEG.
(3) Marks
If ‘Level Check = NO’
Exceeds the Upper Limit: [H]
Below the Lower Limit: [L]
If ‘Level Check = YES’
Exceeds the Upper Limit: [P]
Below the Lower Limit: [N]
7) QC Check
< Single Check (per One Test) >
Tests to be checked
On the QC condition, per one test, six types of Control Limits can be set in maximum. Each Control Limit
Value will be used for checking results that are designated as SINGLE in the parameter. There are two types of
Control Limit Values which can be designated by the QC condition.
a) Pre-set Mode
b) Accumulated Value
c) OFF mode (Checking will not be done.)
(1) Check timing
On the QC samples, after checking the Correlation Correction, checking will be performed for one test per
type.
(2) Check contents
Checking will be performed based on the Control Limit Value Range designated by the QC condition, then if
the result is out of range, a mark will be attached to the result.
(3) Flags
Out of Control Limit Range: [1]

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-16

< Multi-Rule Check >


Tests to be checked.
On the QC condition, per one test, on the one that is set as ‘MULTI’ of one set (two types) of six types in
maximum, which are checked by the QC logic as shown in the next.
(1) Check timing
If any of the results of a group for QC sample are output.
(2) Check contents
Along with the QC Check logic, if the result is out of range, a mark will be attached to the result.
(3) Marks
Out of Control Limit Ranges: [1] - [7]

Explanation of QC logic
QC ABNORMAL
Indicates that the result was out of the control limit.
NO QC ABNORMAL
Indicates that the result was within the control limit.
12s
Indicates that the QC results exceeded the control limit of ‘MEAN ± 2SD’.
13s
Indicates that the QC results exceeded the control limit of ‘MEAN ± 3SD’.
22s
Indicates that two consecutive QC results exceeded the control limit of ‘MEAN ± 2SD’ in the same
direction.
R4s
Either of two QC results, are consecutive in H/L, exceeded ‘MEAN + 2SD’, and the other one exceeded
‘MEAN -2SD’, or exceeded the range of ‘4SD’.
41s
Checking if the four consecutive results exceeded the control limit of ‘MEAN + 1SD’, or ‘MEAN -1SD’.
10x
Seven to ten consecutive QC results exceeded the ‘+’ side of ‘-’ side of control limit.
Others
For the mark, ‘X’, when QC analysis (with a twin of H/L) was performed, if one was marked (including QC
marks) and another one was not marked, ‘X’ will be marked for the QC results of one to remove the QC
result from QC control.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-17

5. Processing of data correction


1) OD level correction
(1) Water Blank correction
a) Contents of processing
The following process is performed for each piece of photometry data (OD value) of a cuvette which is
sent from ANL.
b) Processing formula
The following calculation is performed for the data of each measuring point of 2 waves.
FPi = Pi - F
Fpi = pi - f (i = 0 to 27)

FPi: WB corrected data (main-wave length).


Fpi: WB corrected data (sub-wave length).
Pi : OD value of each measuring point sent from ANL (main-wave length).
pi : OD value of each measuring point sent from ANL (sub-wave length).
F : WB of the cuvette used for the photometry sent from ANL (main-wave length).
f : WB of the cuvette used for the photometry sent from ANL (sub-wave length).

NOTE: With the one wave method, the above process is performed only for one wave length.

(2) Reagent Blank correction


a) Contents of processing
RB table data of the corresponding item is subtracted from the WB corrected data for each wave length.
ISE, LIH items are excepted from this process.
NOTE: There is a case to pass this correction, which depends on parameters.
b) Processing formula
FPRi = FPi - Ri
FPri = Fpi - ri (i = 0 to 27)

FPRi: RB corrected data of main-wave length.


FPri : RB corrected data of sub-wave length.
FPi : WB corrected data of main-wave length.
Fpi : WB corrected data of sub-wave length.
Ri : RB table data of the corresponding item of main-wave length.
ri : RB table data of the corresponding item of sub-wave length.

NOTE: With the one wave method, the above process is performed only for one wave length.

(3) 2 wavelength corrections


a) Contents of processing
For RB corrected data, subtract the sub-wave length data from the main-wave length data.
b) Processing formula
FPWi = FPRi - FPri (i = 0 to 27)

FPWi: Wavelength data corrected twice.


FPRi: RB corrected data of main-wave length.
FPri : RB corrected data of sub-wave length.

NOTE: With the one wave method, FPWi = FPRi.

(4) Liquid amount correction


a) Contents of processing
Correct OD change caused by variation of R-volume and S-volume.
b) Processing formula
Refer to the "OD value processing."

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-18

1) Concentration level correction


(1) Processing flow
Patient Sample Repeat run sample QC sample
Serum/ Urin/ Other Normal/ Diluted (Serum/ Urin/ Other)
Diluted urine/ Diluted concentrated urine

Dynamic range check

Data correction
(Advance dilution correction, Pre-dilution correction, dispensation
correction)

Correlation correction

Panic value cheek QC check

Normal range check, or, POS/ NEG decision

Repeat range check

(2) Contents of the correction


Data correction
Object of the correction:
Samples measured in the different S or R volume of the calibration sample, except reagent blank
samples and calibration samples, are corrected using the following formulas.

Basic formula-1 C = {( Sd + V1 + V2 ) / Sd1 } / {( S + v1 + v2 ) / S1 } * Cd


C: corrected concentration
Sd: sample volume of diluted/ concentrated/ diluted urine sample (including
diluent)
Sd1: sample volume of diluted/ concentrated/ diluted urine sample (not including
diluent)
V1: R1 reagent volume of diluted/ concentrated/ diluted urine sample (including
diluent)
V2: R2 reagent volume of diluted/ concentrated/ diluted urine sample (including
diluent)
Cd: concentration before correction
S: sample volume in normal analysis (including diluent)
S1: sample volume in normal analysis (not including diluent)
v1: R1 reagent volume in normal analysis (including diluent)
v2: R2 reagent volume in normal analysis (including diluent)
Basic formula-2 C = K * Cd
C: corrected concentration
K: advanced dilution multiple / pre-dilution multiple
Cd: concentration before correction
In case of repeat-run of the pre-dilution method and the pre-dilution multiple is
different from the normal-run, the following formula is implemented.
C = Kd / K * Cd
C: corrected concentration
K: pre-dilution multiple of normal-run
Cd: concentration before correction

Correlation correction
correction formula C = A * Cd + B
C: corrected concentration
A: correlation correction coefficient "A"
B: correlation correction coefficient "B"
Cd: concentration before correction

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-19

6. Processing for concentration conversion


1) Objective samples of the concentration conversion
(1) Basically all samples (ISE items, LIH), except RB blank samples and calibration samples, are converted
to the concentration.
2) Concentration conversion terms
(1) Inner flag of OD/ CONC conversion designation is set at the CONC.
(2) If calibration failed and designated to use the last calibration in the calibration parameters,
the calibration curve must exist.
(3) If calibration failed and designated to output the OD value in the calibration parameters,
the last calibration curve must be successful.
(4) Reaction OD is existing.
(5) Depending on the selection of inner flag, the lot number used for RB measure and calibration must be the
same.
(6) Depending on the selection of inner flag, RB measure must be successful.
(7) Calibration stability must be in the limit.
(8) Both onboard stability of the reagent must be in the limit.
3) Processing for concentration conversion
(1) OD value analyzed and calculated is converted to the concentration by the function of calibration
curve of the item.
Concentration = f ( reaction OD value )
f: functions of calibration curves of the items are: Linear, Polygonal line, Quadratic curve, Tertiary curve,
Reversed tertiary function, EIA type (1 to 4),
Spline function
(2) Special processing at each calibration curve
(a) Linear, Polygonal
Reaction OD that exceeded each STD's OD used for calculating the calibration curve is converted to
the concentration by the extended calibration line.
(b) Quadratic and Tertiary formula, and Tertiary in verse function, Spline function
Reaction OD that exceeded each STD's OD used for calculating the calibration curve is not converted
to the concentration and the output becomes the OD value with "!" mark.
(c) EIA type
Reaction OD that exceeded each STD's OD used for calculating the calibration curve, is not converted
to the concentration and the output becomes the OD value with "!" mark.
In case it is not possible to calculate the concentration by the reaction OD value, and the output
becomes the OD value with a "!" mark.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-20

7. Processing of LIH data


1) Data of LIH object

Px indicated the measured OD value of the photometry wavelength x


2) Object sample and items
(1) Sample type
Only normal serum samples.
(2) Item type
Items designated for LIH analysis are not subjected to sample pre-dilution and must also satisfy the
smallest response liquid amount when dispensing R1 reagent.
3) Data operation
(1) Operation object
Contents of step 1) above
(2) Operation contents

Judgment flow
Refer to the next page
5) Level judgment and type for indication and print

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-21

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-22

Output data

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-23

8. ISE data processing


Summary:
ISE sample data is forwarded to ANL as an ISE data message. This is not at the same timing to the ITEMs measured in
the ANL.
Unlike other items, ISE data is forwarded as concentration value data.
As ISE data, there are Sample data, ISE calibration data and ISE selectivity data.

1. SAMPLE data processing


1). Normal, Re-run, Emergency, Stat and QC sample
(1) AX + B (manual facter correction)
A and B, assigned in the Caliblation Parameter menu, is used for the correction.
C = C1 * A + B
C: corrected concentration
C1: concentration data forwarded from ANL
(2) Offset/ Factor correction (ACAL correction)
This is operated only for the ISE item designated the ACAL.
NOTE: ACAL/ MCAL can be designated to each item and to sample kinds.
Correction using standard sample:
Offset correction Factor correction
Cx = C + (S - S1 ) Cx = S / S1*C
Cx: corrected concentration by the standard sample
C: concentration before correction
S: indicated concentration of the standard sample
S1: measured concentration of the standard sample
(2) Correlation correction
Refer to the data correction.
(3) Data check
The following checks are performed, and the data mark is attached.
CHECK item Content Method Flag
Range over A/D range over on Internal A !
Standard or Mixture
Short mixture A #
Mechanical error Mechanical error in ISE A ?
A/D error A/D error in ISE
ANL mechanical error Analysis is not completed due to a A ?
ANL mechanical error
Normal value range Except QC sample B HL
Cross-item check Except QC sample B T
Panic value Except QC sample B p
Dynamic range over B GF
QC range over Only for QC sample B
Method A: check error flag in the data message.
Method B: check concentration by value set as the parameter.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-24

2. ACAL data processing (by the Standard Sample)


As same to the calibration of not ISE items, 4 data are being forwarded from ANL and following process are performed
by their representative value.
For information about how to calculate the representative value, refer to “Basic Operation.”
1) Offset correction
Offset = indicated value of standard sample - measured representative value
2) Factor correction
Factor = indicated value of standard sample / measured representative value
Value of standard sample is designated in calibration parameter.
Selection of offset correction/ factor correction is set in system maintenance.
Offset correction is set as a default.

3. ISE calibration data processing


ISE calibration is performed and the data is forwarded from ANL, if DPR is in the following mode and requiring ISE
caliblation.
Mode: WARMUP. STANDBY, PAUSE and ISEDIAG
1) Cease calibration data processing, if the message “ISE operation completed ” is received.
If ISE calibration data is being received, disregarded it.
2) The calibration result file is updated by the latest piece of data, if message “ISE operation completed ” is received.
Calibration result is indicated in ISE Status menu of System Satatus.
There are 3 kinds of calibrations of which execution is designated in the ISE calibration measure demand. They
are only Serum, only Urine and both Serum + Urine.

4. ISE selectivity check data processing


ISE selectivity check is performed and data is forwarded from ANL if DPR is in the following mode and an ISE
selectivity check is required.
Mode: WARMUP, STANDBY and PAUSE
1) Cease selectivity check data processing if message “ISE operation completed ” is received.
If ISE selectivity check data is being received, it is ignored.
2) If completed normally, the selectivity data is calculated using the following process.
The NA selectivity data is set using the mean value of the NA concentration data of the 3rd and 4th turn.
The K selectivity data is set using the mean value of the K concentration data of 7th and 8th turn.
• Do not check the error status.
• Do not make any corrections.
• The selectivity result file is updated by the latest piece of data.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-25

n Special process for patient sample (except rerun sample)


1) Sample number asignment
Sample number is assigned when registering the sample.
Although there are exceptional cases in which the sample number is assigned at the time of inquiriy by
the ANL, all Sample numbers are assigned and administrated by DPR.
2) Restricted analysis items by Sample kind
(1) Urine
Since LIH analysis cannot be performed, item selection and data processing are not performed.
(2) Other
Since LIH and ISE analysis cannot be performed, item selection and data processing are not performed.
3) Repeat run item extraction process
Item extraction for repeat run is performed using 2 parameters.
(1) Error flag extraction
Repeat run item is determined by the data mark attached to the analysis data.
There are 3 types of repeat run, normal/ diluted/ concentrate, which are assigned by setting of each data
mark using the AND/ OR function.
Refer: Menu, Parameter/ Repeat Run Common Condition
Priority of the 3 kinds are Normal > Diluted > Concentrated.
With ISE, only normal is applied for repeat run, even if it is extracted as diluted or concentrated.
LIH item is not used for repeat run item decision.
(2) Group extraction
The item, which is assigned a relationship with the item extracted above in process(1), is also extracted
for repeat run. If the group extracted item is also extracted using the process, the repet run type has
higher priority.
(3) Repeat run item registration
You can assign repeat run item selection from the menu: Item selection/ Repeat Run Item Selection.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-26

9. Reagent blank data processing


1) Process flow

WB correction
by cuvette data of RB sample

Process to calculate the value used


for determining the representative value

Process to determine the representative value

Process for RB table holding

RB table holding process

2) Contents of the process


(1) Process to calculate the value used to determine the representative value
If all the data (1st to 4th) designated by specific test parameters are taken, the following process is
performed for the measuring point data assigned by the specific test parameters.
RDI = FPWL - FPWF ( I = 1 to 4 in Max.)
RDI : Figure for determining representative value.
FPWL: OD value corrected by WB at the larger LAST measuring point designated by
the parameter.
FPWL: OD value corrected by WB at the smaller FIRST measure point designated by the
parameter.
(2) Process to calculate the representative value
Representative value is determined with the Multiple Process Method by RDI from (1) above.
(3) Process for RB table holding
Select the cuvette which comes under the 2 representative values determined by (2) above. Then calculate the
mean values for each measuring point.
(4) RB table holding process
Hold the data figured out using (3) above for all measuring points in the RB table of the item.
(5) History management process
Store I memory the latest 60 RB tables. The graph can be displayed to indicate the trend.
History changing timing :
Store in memory the RB table if executing process (4) above. If the number of tables is greater than 60,
the oldest one is erased.
(6) Data files related

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-27

10. Processing of calibration sample

1. Processing flow

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-28

2. Calibration curve type

3. Processing for generation of calibration curve


The coefficient of the calibration curve is calculated using the combination of the reaction OD value in each
standard and the display value and set in the analysis parameter.

(1) Calibration curve type and numbers for standard

Straight line and broken line


AB AA 2AB 3AB 4AB 5AB 6AB 7AB
Standard Qty. 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7

Others

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-29

1. Processing for calibration curve generation

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-30

(5) Quadratic formula, tertiary formula, tertiary inverse function


• If the value of concentration “ 0 ” is not in the standard.

The calibration curve is generated using the smallest squares method and using each standard and
measured OD value, OD value = 0, and Concentration value = 0.
• If the value of concentration “ 0 ” exists in the standard.

The calibration curve is generated using the smallest squares method and using each standard and
measured OD value.

(6) EMIT TYPE 1 to 4


Refer to separate page.

(7) Spline
If the concentration value "0" is not in the standard :
The calibration curve is generated using the smallest squares method and using each standard and the value of
the measured OD, OD value = 0, and concentration value = 0.
If the concentration value "0" is in the standard :
The calibration curve is generated using the smallest squares method and each standard and the measured OD
value.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-31

2. Processing of one point correction


(1) Processing contents
On 2AB to 7AB, one of many standards is analyzed, and the reaction OD value of other standard is corrected by
the ratio for the reaction OD value of standard and the previous measured standard. Then the calibration curve is
generated again.

If the concentration “ 0 ” as a standard exists, and the data can be corrected using two points (concentration “ 0 ”
and other point ).

Ex.1 If concentrations “ 0 ” are not in the standard.


If one point correction is executed by the CONC.
standard, the following calculation is performed.

1. Each photometry point is corrected.


OD n’ = OD n x (OD2 / OD2 ’ )

2. Calibration curve is calculated again.

Ex.2 If concentrations “ 0 ” exist in the standard.


If two point correction is executed using CONC1
(concentration 0) and the other point (CONC3),
the following calculation is performed.

1. Reaction OD value of CONC.1 and CONC.3


( OD 1 ’ & OD3 ’ ) is used.

2. Each point is corrected.


OD n’ = α (OD n - ODI) + β
α = ( OD3 ’ - OD1 ’ ) / ( OD3 - OD1 )
β = OD1 ’

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-32

11. QC sample special processing

1) Sample number assignment


In test requisition, the sample number isn't assigned. The numbers are assigned when analysis data is sent from
ANL.

2) QC sample special processing


With LIH, check between items and operation between items. QC data process isn't performed.

3) Other processing
• Processing if the index is changed
If the index is changed and if the QC sample data exists in the start condition menu and it's also for the calculation
for the value of daily statistics, the middle value of statistics calculation in each sample type, item and level.

•The calculation process of the accumulative value


The accumulative value of the limitation value for QC is calculated from past QC sample data.
The accumulation object is in the QC sample data analyzed in a new index before the index is replaced. (The
middle value of daily statistics and daily statistics value are not calculated.)

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-33

12. Processing for re-run sample

1) Assignment of sample number


• Standard re-run
• Automatic re-run

2) Processing for special data

•Item for ISE


Re-run type is "normal only" analysis.
Dilution and condensation is performed for normal analysis (auto changed to this mode).

• Operation between items


If all operated items are performed in re-run analysis, the data for operation between items is output as re-run
sample data.

• Check between items


If all operated items are performed in re-run analysis, the check between items are performed and an error mark is
attached.

•LIH
Analysis process and output of analysis data isn't performed.

• Processing for rewriting


This can be set "auto" or "manual" in each item for rewriting when a re-run sample is analyzed.
In the menu of rewriting for re-run, the items ca be selected in each sample for rewriting.
If rewriting is performed for the operation between items and the check between items, they are re-calculated the
rewritten data as operated item.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 20 Photometry data processing
20-34

13. Reaction data processing


1. Processing flow

2 Contents of processing

1) Photometry point data (from ANL after WB correction) adds the value of OD and the value of concentration for
the cuvette, and records it on the hard disk. The recording unit is the cuvette. And the data about ISE item and
LIH.

2) Processing for the sample blank item


The following processing is performed for the data designated emit/ blank pair.
(1) The reaction data (OD value at each photometry point) is stored in memory as cuvette data for each emit /
blank.
(2) The reaction OD value is stored in memory for each reaction OD value (emit / blank each), but the
concentration isn’t stored in memory.
3) Contents of memory
A maximum of 10000 data cuvettes of reaction data are stored in memory and deleted from the old data in
turn.
The abnormal value mark is limited can only be attached to an individual cuvette.
The stored contents are in reaction data file format.

ES20_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
22-1
Chapter 22 Abnormal data mark 0300 0200 0100

n Data mark
1. Abstract
1) Abnormal mark (concerning hardware) attached to ANL.
2) Abnormal mark is attached to OD value level
3) Abnormal mark is attached to concentration value level
4) The mark indicated the data condition.

2. Marks ( From Program Version 1.0 to 1.4 )

ES22_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
22-2
Chapter 22 Abnormal data mark 0300

2. Marks ( Since Program Version 2.0 )


Priority Symbol Contents Remarks
1 d Removed from the statistical calculation by QC data editing
2 e The data is edited
3 ( Contamination analysis
4 R Reagent short
5 # Sample short
6 % Sample clogging detection
7 ? Mecha error
8 U Reagent OD range under at last photometry point
9 u Reagent OD range under at first photometry point
10 Y Reagent OD range over at last photometry point
11 y Reagnet OD range over first photometry point
12 @ Photometry OD value exeeds 2.5
13 $ Available photometry point id under 3 points
14 D MAX-OD over
15 B MIN-OD under
16 * Linearity check error
17 & Data check error 1 error
18 Z Data check error 2 error
19 ! Operation is impossible
20 ) Lot No is different / Conversion from OD to CONC is impossible
21 F Dynamic range over
22 G Dynamic range under
23 p Panic value
24 T Check error between items
25 P Level check over
26 N Level check under
27 H Higher than normal value range
28 L Lower than normal value range
29 J Repeat run range over
30 K Repear run range under
31 X QC error for multiple pair data
32 1 Multi QC check error
33 2 Multi QC check error
34 3 Multi QC check error
35 4 Multi QC check error
36 5 Multi QC check error
37 6 Multi QC check error
38 7 Multi QC check error
39 S Repear run data
40 / During MEASURE
41 _
42 r The data is transfered to the host
43 c Data correction is executed by manual

ES22_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
22-3
Chapter 22 Abnormal data mark 0400

2. Marks (Since Program Version 3.0)


Priority Symbol Contents Remarks
1 d Removed from the statistical calculation by QC Attaches only QC data
data editing
2 e The data is edited Attached only patient sample data
3 ( Contamination analysis
4 R Reagent short
5 # Sample short
6 % Sample clogging detection
7 ? Mecha error
8 U Reagent OD range under at last photometry point Checked when reagent blank is analyzed
9 u Reagent OD range under at first photometry point Always checked during analyzed
10 Y Reagent OD range over at last photometry point Checked when reagent blank is analyzed
11 y Reagent OD range over first photometry point Always checked during analyzed
12 @ Photometry OD value exceeds 2.5 Checked only available photometry point
13 $ Available photometry point id under 3 points Checked only RATE & RATE1 items
14 D MAX-OD over Checked only END & END1 items
15 B MIN-OD under Checked only END & END1 items
16 * Linearity check error Checked only RATE & RATE1 items
17 & Data check error 1 error Data check is impossible
18 Z Data check error 2 error Over reaction exist
19 ! Operation is impossible Conversion from OD to CONC, is impossible
20 ) Lot No is different / Conversion from OD
to CONC is impossible
21 a Reagent expired / Onboard stability expired
22 b Calibration expired
23 F Dynamic range over Checked concentration value
24 G Dynamic range under Checked concentration value
25 p Panic value Checked by patient sample data
26 T Check error between items
27 P Level check over
28 N Level check under
29 H Higher than normal value range
30 L Lower than normal value range
31 J Repeat run range over
32 K Repeat run range under
33 X QC error for multiple pair data Checked only QC data
34 1 Multi QC check error
35 2 Multi QC check error
36 3 Multi QC check error
37 4 Multi QC check error
38 5 Multi QC check error
39 6 Multi QC check error
40 7 Multi QC check error
41 S Repeat run data
42 / During MEASURE
43 _r The data is transferred to the host
44 c Data correction is executed by manual Attached only patient sample data

ES22_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-1
Chapter 23 Alarm list

n Outline of alarms
The alarm messages of the AU400 are shown in Chapter 24.
If an alarm is occurs, see “alarm HELP” which explains countermeasures.

Because of a shortage of information, system errors caused by the BIOS built into the OS of the personal
computer, cannot be explained. If a system error isoccurs, consult the OS maker or the manufacturer of
the PC.

The “Reference No.” corresponds to “Alarm Management No.”.


The numbers of undefined alarm messages are described in the alarm list. They are given as “nnnn” in the
explanation.

• How to view an alarm explanation


Alarm messages displayed on the screen are shown in alphabetical order starting on the next page.
The “Reference No.” assigned for each message is the same as “Alarm Management No.”
In the detailed explanation of alarms following the alarm list, all alarms are described in the “Alarm
Management No.” order.
[ EXAMPLE OF REFERENCE ]
If the alarm message of “OPTICAL COM. MASTER INITIAL ERROR” occurs, .....
First refer to the message in the alarm list. Find number 3106.
Then look-up number 3106 in the detailed explanation of alarms.

• Outline of errors
1) Timing : ANL alarms issued every 4.5 seconds for a maximum of 5 points.
2) Output contents :
Error indication
Alarm No. Message Time Cause Action table Action phase

A. Alarm occurrence time : If the mechanism action error occurs, the alarm occurrence time (100 ms count
value) is set.
Caution ) If the time indication is not required, it’s set to “ FFFFH ”.
B. Alarm details : Alarm details (Max. 20 bytes) are set from the beginning, and “ 00H ” is set in the
empty space.
1. Error cause : 1 to 255, or bit information (8 bit)
2. Action table : Mechanism action table number (1 to 65535) in mechanism action
3. Action phase : Mechanism action relative time (1 to 65535) in mechanism action

• Alarm print out


Alarm message only : Alarm log printout in Maintenance menu
Alarm message + Menu selection (run) history at alarm occurrence + Mode shift process :
Alarm log printout in DIAG menu.

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-2
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0600 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

1001 INITIALIZE 24-1


1002 WARMUP 24-1
1003 STANDBY 24-1
1004 MEASURE START 24-1
1005 NO MORE SAMPLE 24-1
1006 R1 DISPENSE FINISHED 24-2
1007 CUVETTE WASH AFTER MEASUREMENT START 24-2
1008 MEASURE END PROCESS 24-2
1009 MEASURE END 24-2
1010 MOVING TO STOP 24-2
1011 MOVING TO PAUSE 24-3
1012 PAUSE 24-3
1013 STOP 24-3
1014 SYSTEM END PROCESS 24-3
1015 W1 START 24-3
1016 W1 END 24-3
1017 W2 START 24-4
1018 W2 END 24-4
1019 PHOTOCAL START 24-4
1020 PHOTOCAL END 24-4
1021 ONE-TOUCH MODE ANALYSIS (aaaa) (Profile No. bb) 24-4
1022 REMOVE RACK FROM RACK FEEDER 24-4
1030 CHANGE INDEX 24-4
1031 ILLEGAL CONSTRUCTION (n) 24-4
1051 POWER ON 24-4
2001 THE SAME SAMPLE ID ALREADY REQUISITIONED (aaaa) 24-5
2002 NOT ALLOWED TO DELETE SAMPLE (aaaaa) 24-5
2003 NOT ALLOWED TO DELETE REPEAT SAMPLE (aaaa) 24-5
2004 ALREADY REQUISITIONED REPEAT SAMPLE (aaaa) 24-5
2005 ALREADY MEASUREMENT STARTED (aaaaa) 24-5
2006 PRINTER NOT AVAILABLE 24-6
2007 Part of data is not output yet 24-6
2008 Ordering 24-6
2085 No RB Data (aaaaa-b) c 24-6-1
2086 No CAL Data (aaaaa-b) c 24-6-1
2091 R1 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM RB (aa-bbbbb) c 24-6-2
2092 R2 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM RB (aa-bbbbb) c 24-7
2093 R1 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM CAL (aa-bbbbb) c 24-7
2094 R2 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM CAL (aa-bbbbb) c 24-7
2095 R1 DIFFERENT LOT NO. (aaaaa) 24-8
2096 R2 DIFFERENT LOT NO. (aaaaa) 24-8
2097 No Cleaner in Reagent Refrigerator aaaaa 24-8-1
2101 REAGENT ID READ ERROR (aa) 24-8-1
2102 REAGENT ID NOT DEFINED (aa) 24-9
2105 ILLEGAL REAGENT POSITION (aa) 24-9
2106 ILLEGAL BOTTLE SIZE (aa) 24-9
2111 NO REPLY FROM ANL (aa,bb) 24-10

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-3
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0500 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

2121 ILLEGAL FLOPPY DISK 24-10


2122 NO DATA IN FLOPPY DISK 24-10
2123 NO AREA IN FLOPPY DISK 24-10
2131 ONLINE ERROR (aa) (bbbbbbbbb-ccccc-dd) 24-11
2132 ONLINE ERROR [aa] [bbbbbbbbb] 24-13
2133 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : NO SAMPLE No.) 24-15
2134 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : NO SAMPLE ID) 24-16
2135 ONLINE ILLEGAL TEXT CODE (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dd) 24-17
2136 ONLINE ILLEGAL TEXT BLOCK No. (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dd->ee) 24-18
2137 ONLINE ILLEGAL SAMPLE No. (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dddddd) 24-19
2138 ONLINE ILLEGAL RACK No. (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : ddddd-ee) 24-20
2139 ONLINE ILLEGAL SAMPLE KIND (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dd) 24-21
2140 ONLINE ILLEGAL GENDER TEXT (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : d) 24-22
2141 ONLINE ILLEGAL AGE/MONTH (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : ddd ee) 24-23
2142 ONLINE ANALYSIS METHOD MISMATCH (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dd <> ee) 24-24
2143 ONLINE SAMPLE No. MISMATCH (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc <> dddddd) 24-26
2144 ONLINE RACK No. MISMATCH (aaaaaa : bbbbb-cc <> ddddd-ee) 24-27
2145 ONLINE MISMATCH (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : ddddddddd <> eeeeeeeee) 24-28
2146 ONLINE TEST ITEM ERROR (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-28-1
2147 ONLINE REPEAT ITEM ERROR (aaaaaa-bbbbb-cc : dddddd) 24-28-2
2148 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (RECEIVE TEXT LENGTH NOT EQUAL) 24-28-3
2151 DTR SET ERROR 24-29
2152 DSR CHECK TIMEOUT 24-29
2201 ANL Communication Overrun First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-30
2202 ANL Communication Parity First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-30
2203 ANL Communication Framing First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-30
2204 ANL Communication other SIO First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-30
2205 ANL Communication ENQ sent First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-31
2206 ANL Communication NAK Receive First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-31
2207 ANL Communication Timeout First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-31
2208 ANL Communication Not Receive STX First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-31
2209 ANL Communication Receive Text length not equal First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-32
2210 ANL Communication Receive Illegal ETX Location First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-32
2211 ANL Communication BCC First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-32
2212 ANL Communication Text Code First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-32
2213 ANL Communication Text Sending Char Receive First Time Error (aa,bb,c) 24-33
2214 ANL Communication Overrun Error (aa,bb,c) 24-33
2215 ANL Communication Parity Error (aa,bb,c) 24-33
2216 ANL Communication Framing Error (aa,bb,c) 24-34
2217 ANL Communication other SIO Error (aa,bb,c) 24-34
2218 ANL Communication ENQ send Error (aa,bb,c) 24-34
2219 ANL Communication NAK Receive (aa,bb,c) 24-35
2220 ANL Communication Timeout Error (aa,bb,c) 24-35
2221 ANL Communication Not Receive STX (aa,bb,c) 24-35
2222 ANL Communication Receive Text length not equal (aa,bb,c) 24-36

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-4
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

2223 ANL Communication Receive Illegal ETX Location (aa,bb,c) 24-36


2224 ANL Communication BCC Error (aa,bb,c) 24-36
2225 ANL Communication Text Code Error (aa,bb,c) 24-37
2226 ANL Communication Text Sending Char Receive Error (aa,bb,c) 24-37
2251 PRINTER NOT SELECTED 24-37
2301 NO FLOPPY DISK 24-38
2302 FLOPPY DISK READ/WRITE ERROR 24-38
3103 POWER FAILURE DETECTED 24-38
3104 PHOTOMETER CPU INITIAL ERROR (aa) 24-39
3105 COM. CONTROL CPU INITIAL ERROR (aa) 24-39
3106 OPTICAL COM. MASTER INITIAL ERROR (aa,bb,cc) 24-40
3107 OPTICAL COM. SLAVE INITIAL ERROR (aa) 24-41
3108 PHOTOMETER CPU -> ANL COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd) 24-41
3109 PHOTOMETER CPU -> ANL TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb,cc,dd) 24-42
3110 ANL -> PHOTOMETER CPU COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd) 24-43
3111 PHOTOMETER CPU ERROR (aa,b) 24-44
3112 OPTICAL COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd) 24-44
3113 OPMC ERROR (aa,bb,cc) 24-46
3114 ANL -> COM. CONTROL CPU I/F ERROR (aa) 24-46
3115 ANL -> BAR CODE READER COM. ERROR (aa,bb) 24-47
3116 ANL <- BAR CODE READER COM. ERROR (aa,bb) 24-48
3118 ANL <- DPR COM. ERROR-1 (aa,bb) 24-49
3119 ANL <- DPR TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa) 24-49
3121 ANL -> DPR COM. ERROR (aa,bb) 24-50
3122 RACK/SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aa) 24-50
3123 STAT SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aa) 24-51
3124 RACK ID READ ERROR (aa,bb) 24-51
3127 REAGENT ID READ ERROR (aa) 24-51
3129 ORIGINAL DETERGENT B EMPTY 24-52
3130 ORIGINAL DETERGENT A EMPTY 24-52
3131 DETERGENT B SHORT 24-52
3132 DETERGENT A SHORT 24-53
3133 DI WATER SHORT 24-53
3134 DI WATER EMPTY 24-53
3135 DETERGENT B OVERFLOW 24-54
3136 DETERGENT A OVERFLOW 24-54
3137 DI WATER OVERFLOW 24-54
3138 REAGENT REF. COVER OPEN 24-54
3140 INCUBATION. BATH/REAGENT REF. TMP. A/D ERROR 24-55
3141 LAMP OFF 24-55
3142 LAMP DARK 24-55
3143 PHOTOMETER DATA ERROR (aa) 24-56
3144 NO VACUUM PRESSURE 24-56
3145 VACUUM TANK FULL 24-56

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-5
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

3146 RACK DETECTED ON FEEDER BELT (aa) 24-57


3147 RACK DETECTED ON RERUN FEEDER BELT (aa) 24-57
3149 RACK RECEIVER FULL 24-57
3150 NO RACK 24-58
3151 NO STAT CUP 24-58
3152 NO SAMPLE PROBE DETERGENT (aa) 24-58
3153 REAGENT PROBE DETERGENT SHORT 24-59
3155 RACK CLASS ERROR 24-59
3157 SAMPLE INFORMATION UNMATCH (aa,bbbb,cc,dd,eeeee) 24-59
3160 ACAL INCOMPLETE 24-60
3161 QC INCOMPLETE 24-60
3162 RB/ACAL SAMPLE PROHIBITED 24-61
3163 AUTOMATIC REPEAT ILLEGAL RACK No. (aa,bbbbbbb) 24-61
3164 AUTOMATIC REPEAT RACK OVER 24-61
3165 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK STEP DISABLED T (aa) 24-62
3166 RACK SUPPLIER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-62
3167 RACK BUFFER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-63
3168 CPU DETECTION POSITION, RACK STEP UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-63
3169 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK STEP UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-64
3171 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK JAM T (aa) 24-64
3172 RACK BUFFER JAM T 24-64
3173 RACK RECEIVER JAM T 24-65
3174 RACK RECEIVER UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-65
3175 STAT TABLE ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-66
3176 SAMPLE PROBE UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-67
3177 SAMPLE PROBE ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-68
3178 SAMPLE DISPENSER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-68
3179 SAMPLE PROBE LEVEL DETECTOR ERROR T (aa) 24-69
3180 SAMPLE PROBE INTERNAL WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc) 24-69
3181 REAGENT PROBE UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-70
3182 REAGENT PROBE ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-71
3183 REAGENT REF. ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-72
3184 REAGENT DISPENSER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-72
3185 REAGENT PROBE LEVEL DETECTOR ERROR T (aa) 24-73
3187 REAGENT PROBE INTERNAL WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc) 24-73
3195 MIX UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-74
3196 MIX ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-74
3197 MIXING ERROR T 24-75
3201 CUVETTE WASH UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-75
3202 CUVETTE WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc) 24-76
3203 CUVETTE WHEEL ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-76
3204 PHOTOMETER ERROR T (aa) 24-77
3206 LBF RACK EXIST $T 24-77
3212 STRONG DRAIN TANK FULL 24-77

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-6
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0600 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

3213 WEAK DRAIN TANK FULL 24-77


3214 R1 REAGENT SHORT (aaaaa,bb) 24-78
3215 R2 REAGENT SHORT (aaaaa,bb) 24-78
3216 R1 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaaaaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd) 24-78
3217 R2 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaaaaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd) 24-79
3218 INCUBATION BATH TEMP. ERROR 24-79
3220 SAMPLE EMPTY LEVEL DETECT (aaaaaa,bb,cc,ddddd-ee) 24-80
3222 AUTOMATIC REPEAT BELT FEEDER JAM 24-80
3232 AUTOMATIC REPEAT RECEIVER JAM 24-81
3237 SAMPLE PROBE STUFF SENSOR ERROR T (aa) 24-81
3238 STUFF SAMPLE DETECT (aaaaa,bb,ccccc-dd) 24-81
3253 DETERGENT A EMPTY 24-82
3254 DETERGENT B EMPTY 24-82
3255 ISE COVER OPEN 24-82
3256 STAT COVER OPEN 24-83
3257 STAT SET OVER TIME 24-83
3258 AUTO REPEAT RUN RACK DISABLED 24-83
3259 MIRROR ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc) 24-84
3260 R2 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaa,bb,cc) 24-84
3261 PRE DILUTION WATER SHORT 24-84
3262 PRE DILUTION WATER EMPTY LEVEL DETECT (aaaaaa,bb,cc) 24-85
3264 REAGENT TRANSPOSITION DISABLED (aa) 24-85
3266 QC SAMPLE PROHIBITED 24-85
3267 MEASURE RESTART DISABLE 24-86
3268 REG. PROBE DETERGENT SHORT T (CLN-a,bb) 24-86
3269 REG. PROBE DETERGENT EMPTY T (CNL-a,bb) 24-86
3275 R1 REAGENT EMPTY T (aaaaa,bb,cc) 24-86-1
3301 NO ISE 24-87
3302 ISE INITIAL ERROR (aa) 24-87
3303 ISE MID STANDARD SHORT 24-87
3304 ISE BUFFER SHORT 24-88
3305 ISE REFERENCE SHORT 24-88
3306 ISE CLEANING SOLUTION SHORT 24-88
3307 ISE STANDARD L SHORT 24-88
3308 ISE STANDARD H SHORT 24-89
3309 ISE SELECTIVITY CHECK (Na) SHORT 24-89
3310 ISE SELECTIVITY CHECK (K) SHORT 24-89
3311 ISE LOW DATA 24-90
3313 ISE SAMPLE No. ILLEGAL PROCEDURE (aaaa) 24-90
3314 ANL <- ISE COM. ERROR (aa,bb) 24-90
3315 ANL <- ISE TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb) 24-91
3316 ANL <- ISE COM. RECEPTION ERROR (aa,bb) 24-91
3351 ISE <- ANL COM. ERROR (aa,bb) 24-92
3352 ISE <- ANL TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb) 24-92
3353 ISE SEQUENCE ERROR T 24-93

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-7
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0600 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

3354 ISE SYNC SIGNAL ERROR T (aa,bb,cc,dd,ee,ff,gg) 24-93


3355 ISE A/D ERROR T (aa) 24-93
3356 ISE TEMP. ERROR (aa) 24-94
3357 ISE BUFFER DISPENSER ERROR T (aa) 24-94
3358 ISE MID STANDARD PUMP ERROR T (aa) 24-95
3359 ISE SAMPLE ASPIRATION PUMP ERROR T (aa) 24-95
3360 ISE SAMPLE MIXER ERROR T (aa) 24-95
3361 ISE D-POT OVERFLOW SENSOR ERROR T (aa) 24-96
3362 ISE -> ANL COM. RECEPTION ERROR (aa,bb) 24-96
4001 NO SAMPLE CUP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-96-1
4002 SAMPLE NOP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-96-2
4003 SAMPLE ID NOT FOUND (aaaaa,bbbbb,cc) 24-97
4004 REPEAT SAMPLE ID NOT FOUND (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-97
4005 REPEAT SAMPLE NOP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-97
4006 ILLEGAL SAMPLE ID (aaaaa-bbbbb) 24-97-1
4008 BROKEN LABEL (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-98
4009 REPEAT BROKEN LABEL (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-98
4010 SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-99
4011 REPEAT SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-99
4012 MEASURE COMPLETED FOR THE READ SAMPLE ID (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-99
4013 CALIBRATION FACTOR RANGE OVER (aaaaa) c 24-100
4014 CALIBRATION FACTOR RANGE UNDER (aaaaa) c 24-100
4015 CALIBRATION OD RANGE OVER (aaaaa) b,c 24-100
4016 CALIBRATION OD RANGE UNDER (aaaaa) b,c 24-101
4017 CALIBRATION ERROR (aaaaa) c 24-101
4018 QC DATA RANGE OVER (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) 24-101-1
4019 QC DATA RANGE UNDER (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) 24-101-1
4020 QC DATA CHECK ERROR (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) 24-102
4021 PANIC VALUE (aaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd) 24-102
4023 PHOTOCAL DATA ERROR 24-103
4024 REAGENT REF. TEMPERATURE LOW 24-103
4025 REAGENT REF. TEMPERATURE HIGH 24-103
4026 INCUBATION BATH TEMPERATURE HIGH 24-103
4027 INCUBATION BATH TEMPERATURE LOW 24-104
4028 STAT SAMPLE MEASURE START CANCELED 24-104
4029 DPR <-> ANL COM. START TIMEOUT 24-104
4030 DPR <-> ANL COM. TIMEOUT (aa) 24-104
4031 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (aaaaa,b,c,d,e) 24-105
4035 NO SAMPLE REQUISITION (aaaaa) 24-105
4036 DATA WRITE DISABLED (aaaaa) 24-105
4040 SAMPLE BLANK CORRECTION WITHOUT COLOR DATA (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc ddddd 24-106
eeeee)
4041 SAMPLE BLANK CORRECTION WITHOUT BLANK DATA (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc ddddd 24-106
eeeee)

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-8
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0600 0500 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

4042 STAT SAMPLE MEASURE START ERROR 24-106


4051 REPEAT SAMPLE NO CUP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) 24-107
4052 ILLEGAL REPEAT SAMPLE ID (aaaaa) 24-107
4053 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SAMPLE (aa) 24-107
4055 Can't calculate Sample No. of this Rack No. (aaaaa-bb) 24-107-1
4057 NO TESTS REQUISITIONED (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) ddddddddd 24-107-1
4101 NO STAT CUP (CALIBRATION NO. aa bb) 24-108
4102 NO STAT CUP (CONTROL NO. aa bb) 24-108
4103 STAT CAL/QC DUPLICATE ID (aaaaa) bb 24-109
4104 STAT CAL/QC ID READ ERROR (aa) 24-109
4105 NO STAT CUP (RB) 24-109
4106 INVALID STAT CUP (CALIBRATION NO. aa) 24-110
4107 INVALID STAT CUP (CONTROL NO. aa) 24-110
4108 INVALID STAT CUP (RB) 24-110
9001 LOGIN [aa] 24-111
9002 LOGOUT [aa] 24-111
9003 TEMPORARY LOGIN [aa] 24-111
9004 MENU [aa] 24-111
9005 MENU [aa] EXIT 24-111
9141 Hard Copy Error 24-111
9143 PRINTER BUSY 24-111
9173 SECONDARY PRINTER BUSY 24-112
9174 PRINTOUT ERROR 24-112
9176 SECONDARY PRINTER PRINTOUT ERROR 24-112
9231 PASSWORD ERROR [aa] 24-113
9232 NEW PASSWORD IS NOT IDENTICAL WITH CONFIRMATION PASSWORD 24-113
9241 PRINTER BUSY 24-113
9291 Database Inf [aa] 24-113
9292 Database Error [aa] 24-113
9401 Access is denied 24-113
9402 This account is currently disabled and cannot be logged on to 24-114
9403 The user’s account has expired 24-114
9404 Some user account restriction has prevented successful authentication 24-114
9405 Attempt to create file that already exists 24-114
9406 The system is currently running with the last-known-good configuration 24-115
9407 The storage control blocks were destroyed 24-115
9408 The specified user name is invalid 24-115
9409 The configuration registry database is damaged 24-115
9410 The configuration registry key is invalid 24-116
9411 The requested resource is in use 24-116
9412 Cannot complete function for some reason 24-116
9413 The directory or file cannot be created 24-116
9414 The configuration registry key cannot be opened 24-117
9415 The configuration registry key cannot be read 24-117
9416 The configuration registry key cannot be written 24-117
9147 An attempt was made to create a stable subkey under a volatile parent key 24-117

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-9
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

9418 Data error 24-118


9419 The database specified dose not exist 24-118
9420 The directory is not empty 24-118
9421 The directory name is invalid 24-118
9422 The disk structure is damaged and nonreadable 24-119
9423 There is not enough space on the disk 24-119
9424 While accessing the hard disk, a disk operation failed 24-119
9425 While accessing the hard disk, a recalibrate operation failed 24-119
9426 A hard disk controller reset was needed, but even that failed 24-120
9427 An extended error has occurred 24-120
9428 The file or directory is damaged and nonreadable 24-120
9429 The system cannot find the file specified 24-120
9430 The file name or extension is too long 24-121
9431 The disk is full 24-121
9432 Reached End Of File 24-121
9433 This operation cannot be completed due to on-disk data structure corruption 24-121
9434 The system cannot find the specified drive 24-122
9435 The flag passed is incorrect 24-122
9436 The flags are invalid 24-122
9437 The user account has time restrictions and cannot be logged onto at now 24-122
9438 The parameter is incorrect 24-123
9439 The specified network password is incorrect 24-123
9440 The format of the specified password is invalid 24-123
9441 The printer command is invalid 24-123
9442 The printer name is invalid 24-124
9443 The user account is restricted and cannot be used to log on 24-124
9444 The attempted logon is invalid 24-124
9445 The global filename characters * or ? are entered incorrectly 24-124
9446 An attempt was made to move the file pointer before the beginning of the file 24-125
9447 System could not allocate required space in a registry log 24-125
9448 The drive is not ready 24-125
9449 The system cannot open the specified device or file 24-125
9450 The I/O operation was aborted due to either thread exit or application request 24-126
9451 The printer is out of paper 24-126
9452 File waiting to be printed was deleted 24-126
9453 The printer queue is full 24-126
9454 The registry is damaged 24-127
9455 The registry initiated an I/O operation that had an unrecoverable failure 24-127
9456 The drive cannot locate a specific area on the disk 24-127
9457 The file pointer cannot be set on the specified device or file 24-127
9458 Insert the disk for drive 1 24-128
9459 The credentials supplied conflict with an existing set of credentials 24-128
9460 The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another 24-128
9461 The system cannot open the file 24-129

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
23-10
Chapter 23 Alarm list 0400

Alarm (In alarm No. order)


Alarm No. CRT indication Page

9462 The disk media is not recognized. It may not be formatted 24-129
9463 The media is write protected 24-129
9471 File genric Error [%s] 24-129
9472 File not found [%s] 24-130
9473 Bad pathname [%s] 24-130
9474 Too many open files [%s] 24-130
9475 File access denied [%s] 24-130
9476 Invalid File handle [%s] 24-131
9477 Can’t remove current directory [%s] 24-131
9478 Full directory [%s] 24-131
9479 Bad seek pointer [%s] 24-131
9480 File Hardware I/O Error [%s] 24-132
9481 File sharing violation [%s] 24-132
9482 File lock violation [%s] 24-132
9483 File disk full [%s] 24-132
9484 File end of file [%s] 24-133

es23_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

1001 INITIALIZE
System Status
(1) The system has started initialization of it's mechanical components. This is an advisory alarm.

1002 WARMUP
System Status
(1) The temperature and optical systems are stabilizing. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The mode automatically changes to WARM-UP.

1003 STANDBY
System Status
(1) The system has switched to the Stand-By mode. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The mode automatically changes to STAND-BY.

1004 MEASURE START


System Status
(1) The system has started analysis. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The mode automatically changes to MEASURE-1.

1005 NO MORE RACK


System Status
(1) The system has fed the last rack from the CA unit to the sample aspiration point. This is an advisory
alarm.
User Action
(1) None, although additional racks may be added and analysis started.
(2) The mode automatically changes to MEASURE-2.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-2
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

1006 R1 DISPENSE FINISHED


System Status
(1) R1 reagents have been dispensed for all of the tests started. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The mode automatically changes to MEASURE-3.

1007 CUVETTE WASH AFTER MEASUREMENT START


System Status
(1) Sample analysis is complete, the system is washing the cuvettes. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The mode automatically changes to MEASURE-4.

1008 MEASURE END PROCESS


System Status
(1) Analysis of samples is complete and cuvette washing has finished. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The system switches from a MEASURE mode to STANDBY.

1009 MEASURE END


System Status
(1) Analysis of samples is complete and cuvette washing has finished. This is an advisory alarm.
User Action
(1) None. The system switches from a MEASURE mode to STANDBY.

1010 MOVING TO STOP


System Status
(1) An event has occurred that has interrupted system operations.
This alarm is usually followed by other alarms describing the event in more detail. This is an advisory
alarm, the system is switching to the STOP mode during analysis.
User Action
(1) Clear this alarm and watch for any subsequent alarms. This usually indicates a hardware failure.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-3
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

1011 MOVING TO PAUSE


System Status
(1) The system is switching to the PAUSE mode during analysis.
An advisory alarm is given.

1012 PAUSE
System Status
(1) The mode changes to PAUSE. An advisory alarm is given.
User Action
(1) Pressing the Start key can continue system operation.

1013 STOP
System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP. An advisory alarm is given.
User Action
(1) This alarm is usually triggered by a mechanical or computer error.
The cause must be determined and corrected before restarting.

1014 SYSTEM END PROCESS


System Status
(1) The mode changes to END. An advisory alarm is given.
Cause
(1) End process has been selected via keyboard input. The analyzer is powering down.

1015 W1 START
System Status
(1) W1 operation starts. An advisory alarm is given.

1016 W1 END
System Status
(1) W1 operation ends. An advisory alarm is given.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-4
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

1017 W2 START
System Status
(1) An advisory alarm is given. W2 operation starts.

1018 W2 END
System Status
(1) W2 operation ends. An advisory alarm is given.

1019 PHOTCAL START


System Status
(1) PHOTO CAL operation starts. An advisory alarm is given.

1020 PHOTCAL END


System Status
(1) PHOTO CAL operation ends. An advisory alarm is given.

1021 ONE-TOUCH MODE ANALYSIS (aaaa) (Profile No. bb)

1022 REMOVE RACK FROM RACK FEEDER

1030 CHANGE INDEX

1031 ILLEGAL CONSTRUCTION (n)

1051 POWER ON

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-5
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2001 THE SAME SAMPLE ID ALREADY REQUISITIONED (aaaa)


System Status
(1) The same sample ID is rejected.
Cause
(1) In Bar code Analysis mode, the sample ID read (aaaa) has already been requisitioned and cannot be
processed.
The sample ID is rejected.

aaaa : Sample ID

2002 NOT ALLOWED TO DELETE SAMPLE (aaaaa)


System Status
(1) Sample is not deleted.
Cause
(1) A sample inquired by the analyzer cannot be deleted.

aaaaa : Sample ID

2003 NOT ALLOWED TO DELETE REPEAT SAMPLE (aaaa)


Cause
(1) A repeat run sample inquired by the analyzer cannot be deleted.

aaaaa : Sample No.

2004 ALREADY REQUISITIONED REPEAT SAMPLE (aaaa)


System Status
(1) The system cannot add the requisitioned repeat run sample.
Cause
(1) If an input sample number is the same as a repeat run sample number that has already been registered in
the repeat run data file, that sample number cannot be added.

aaaaa : Sample No.

2005 ALREADY MEASUREMENT STARTED (aaaaa)


System Status
(1) Unable to requisition calibration or reagent blank.
Cause
(1) The analyzer has already inquired about the requisitioned calibration sample or reagent blank sample.

aaaaa : Sample No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-6
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2006 PRINTER NOT AVAILABLE


System Status
(1) Printer is busy.
Cause
(1) Printer cannot be used for printing a list during measure mode.

2007 Part of data is not output yet


Operation
(1) System is still under a measure mode. Analysis mode is not completed.
User Action
(1) Confirm that the printer is operational.
(2) Access the DPR STATUS screen from the SYSTEM STATUS ICON and press the function key 4 (F4)
for printer control.
Select the analysis data which has not yet been printed.
Cause
(1) This alarm indicates that the data printout is incomplete due to errors during the real-time print.

2008 Ordering
System Status
(1) System does not change modes.
User Action
(1) Restart after analysis has been completed.

2091 R1 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM RB ( aa-bbbbb ) c


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The lot no. of R1 on the reagent tray is different from the lot no. used for Reagent Blank.
User Action
(1) Perform Reagent Blank measure for the new lot of reagent.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aa : Tray Position No.


bbbbb : Test Name
c : Type (None : Serum U : Urine X: Other)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-6-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2085 No RB Data (aaaaa-b) c

System Status

(1). No special processing is performed.

User Action

(1). Analyze the reagent blank of the item. After confirmation of the result, perform the
analysis of the item.

Cause

(1). There is no reagent blank data.

Error detail.
aaaaa : Item name
b : Reagent sequence No.(Displayed in case of the item set to Advanced

Calibration.)
c : Sample type(SPACE:Serum U:Urine X:Others)

2086 No CAL Data (aaaaa-b) c

System Status

(1). No special processing is performed.

User Action

(1). Analyze the calibration of the item. After confirmation of the result, perform the
analysis of the item.

Cause

(1). There is no calibration data.

Error detail.
aaaaa : Item name
b : Reagent sequence No.(Displayed in case of the item set to Advanced
Calibration.)
c : Sample type(SPACE:Serum U:Urine X:Others)

es24-6-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-6-2
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2091 R1 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM RB ( aa-bbbbb ) c


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The lot no. of R1 on the reagent tray is different from the lot no. used for Reagent Blank.
User Action
(1) Perform Reagent Blank measure for the new lot of reagent.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aa : Tray Position No.


bbbbb : Test Name
c : Type (None : Serum U : Urine X: Other)

es24-6-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-7
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2092 R2 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM RB ( aa-bbbbb ) c


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The lot no. of R2 on the reagent tray is different from the lot no. used for Reagent Blank.
User Action
(1) Perform Reagent Blank measure for the new lot of reagent.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aa : Tray Position No.


bbbbb : Test Name
c : Type (None : Serum U : Urine X: Other)

2093 R1 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM CAL ( aa-bbbbb ) c


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The lot no. of R1 on the reagent tray is different from the lot no. used for Calibration.
User Action
(1) Perform Calibration with the new lot of reagent.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aa : Tray Position No.


bbbbb : Test Name
c : Type (None : Serum U : Urine X: Other)

2094 R2 LOT NO. DIFFERENT FROM CAL ( aa-bbbbb ) c


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The lot no. of R2 on the reagent tray is different from the lot no. used for Calibration.
User Action
(1) Perform Calibration with the new lot of reagent.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aa : Tray Position No.


bbbbb : Test Name
c : Type (None : Serum U : Urine X: Other)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-8
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2095 R1 DIFFERENT LOT NO. ( aaaaa )


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) R1 bottles for a Test on the reagent tray have different lot numbers.
User Action
(1) Replace R1 on the reagent tray so that all of R1 bottles for a Test have same Lot No.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aaaaa : Test Name

2096 R2 DIFFERENT LOT NO. ( aaaaa )


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) R2 bottles for a Test on the reagent tray have different lot numbers.
User Action
(1) Replace R2 on the reagent tray so that all of R2 bottles for a Test have same Lot No.
Additional Information
(1) Error detail

aaaaa : Test Name

2101 REAGENT ID READ ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) The error number is 1.
(2) The reagent shot data file is being updated.
The item name is ????.
User Action
(1) Check the bar code on the reagent bottle and then perform volume check.
(2) Verify that the correct reagent has been placed in the position assigned on the reagent tray.
Additional Information
(1) When checking reagent bar code label, an incorrect reagent ID was sent by the ANL to the DPR.

aa : Reagent position : 1 to 76

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-8-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2097 No Cleaner in Reagent Refrigerator aaaaa

System Status

(1). This is an advisory alarm.

User Action

(1). Open the edit menu in Reagent status and set the cleaner.

Cause

(1). Though the cleaner is set in Contamination parameters, it is not set in Reagent status.

(1). Error detail


aaaaa : Cleaner Name

2101 REAGENT ID READ ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) The error number is 1.
(2) The reagent shot data file is being updated.
The item name is ????.
User Action
(1) Check the bar code on the reagent bottle and then perform volume check.
(2) Verify that the correct reagent has been placed in the position assigned on the reagent tray.
Additional Information
(1) When checking reagent bar code label, an incorrect reagent ID was sent by the ANL to the DPR.

aa : Reagent position : 1 to 76

es24-8-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-9
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2102 REAGENT ID NOT DEFINED (aa)


System Status
(1) The error occurs when a reagent volume check is performed.
Cause
(1) When checking reagent bar code label, the item code of the ID read at the ID reading position does not
match the code entered in the parameter menu.
User Action
(1) Verify that the correct bar code ID has been entered in parameters. Wipe off reagent bar code ID label.
Additional Information
(1) When checking reagent bar code label, the item code of the ID read at the ID reading position does not
match the code entered in the parameter menu.

aa : Reagent position : 1 to 76

2105 ILLEGAL REAGENT POSITION (aa)


System Status
(1) This error occurs during the reagent volume check.
Cause
(1) When performing the reagent volume check, the system detected an error at a fixed reagent position.
(2) After reading the reagent bar code label, the system detected an error in one or more of the following
cases. :
- The assay name is different from the preset assay name.
- The assay is not requisitioned.
User Action
(1) Verify that a properly labeled reagent vial is placed in the assigned position.
(2) Make the appropriate corrections and repeat the reagent volume check.
Additional Information

aa : Reagent Position : 1 to 76

2106 ILLEGAL BOTTLE SIZE (aa)


System Status
(1) There is a discrepancy between the reagent bottle specified in parameters and the reagent bottle
detected during the reagent volume check or measure mode.
(2) Bottle size for the assay in question has not been specified.
User Action
(1) Assign the reagent position number and bottle size as follows :
1). To switch to fixed setting, check fixed position.
2). Enter the reagent assay name and appropriate bottle size.
Additional Information
(1) Incorrect bottle size specification.
(2) aa : Reagent position 1-76

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-10
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2111 NO REPLY FROM ANL (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The system moves to the STOP mode.
User Action
(1) Power down the system and re-boot.
Contact Olympus Technical Support if problem continues to occur.
Cause
(1) The analyzer does not send a response within a specific time frame for a request from the DPR.

aa : Message No.
bb : First byte of the message

2121 ILLEGAL FLOPPY DISK


Cause
(1) The floppy disk being used is not the correct type of disk for the task requested.
User Action
(1) Remove the floppy disk and retry using the correct type of disk.

2122 NO DATA IN FLOPPY DISK


Cause
(1) The inserted disk is not a data diskette.
(2) The inserted disk does not contain data.
User Action
(1) Verify that the proper data disk has been inserted into the floppy drive.

2123 NO AREA IN FLOPPY DISK


System Status
(1) Data saving to the floppy disk is aborted.
Cause
(1) The floppy disk does not have enough space to save data.
User Action
(1) Insert another floppy disk with sufficient space and repeat data saving.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-11
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2131 ONLINE ERROR (aa) (bbbbbbbbb - ccccc - dd)


System Status
(1) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive has been designated as
"STOP", then the following will occur :
1) Text following the alarm will not be received.
2) In a case when the test requisition is received real-time, the "STOP" status is ignored at the
start of the next analysis and the test requisition will be received real-time again.
(2) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive has been designated to
"CONTINUE", the test requisition for the next sample will be received real-time.
Cause
(1) Communication error occurs when transmitting the text for test requisition or when receiving the test
requisition format.
(2) The display in the [ ] and its meaning are as follows.

aa : type of the errors


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 : Device name error
02 : Framing error
03 : Over run error
04 : Parity error
05 : Time out error
06 : Receive NAK when transmitting a text
07 : BCC error when receiving a text
08 : Other communication errors
09 : Function error
10 : Unit name error
11 : Parameter error
12 : Request cancel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-12
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

bbbbbbbbb : Text having error


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RB : Start text for receiving the test requisition information
RE : End text for receiving the test requisition information
R_ _ _ nnnn : normal run, normal sample, sample No.
R_ _E nnnn : normal run, emergency sample, sample No.
R_ _P nnnn : normal run, STAT sample, sample No.
R_ U_ nnnn : normal run, urine sample, sample No.
R_ UE nnnn : normal run, urine emergency sample, sample No.
R_ UP nnnn : normal run, urine STAT sample, sample No.
R_ X_ nnnn : normal run, urine sample, sample No.
R_ XUE nnnn : normal run, urine emergency sample, sample No.
R_ XP nnnn : normal run, urine STAT sample, sample No.

RH _ _ nnnn : repeat run, normal sample, sample No.


RH _E nnnn : repeat run, emergency sample, sample No.
RH _P nnnn : repeat run, STAT sample, sample No.
RH U_ nnnn : repeat run, urine sample, sample No.
RH UE nnnn : repeat run, urine emergency sample, sample No.
RH UP nnnn : repeat run, urine STAT sample, sample No.
RH X_ nnnn : repeat run, other sample, sample No.
RH XE nnnn : repeat run, other emergency sample, sample No.
RH XP nnnn : repeat run, other STAT sample, sample No.

R_ _ _ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, normal sample, sample ID


R_ _E xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, emergency sample, sample ID
R_ _P xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, STAT sample, sample ID
R_ U_ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine sample, sample ID
R_ UE xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine emergency sample, sample ID
R_ UP xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine STAT sample, sample ID

R_ X_ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other sample, sample ID


R_ XE xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other emergency sample, sample ID
R_ XP xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other STAT sample, sample ID

RH _ _ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, normal sample, sample ID


RH _E xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, emergency sample, sample ID
RH _P xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, STAT sample, sample ID
RH U_ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine sample, sample ID
RH UE xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine emergency sample, sample ID
RH UP xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine STAT sample, sample ID
RH X_ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other sample, sample ID
RH XE xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other emergency sample, sample ID
RH XP xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other STAT sample, sample ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ccccc : Rack number


dd : Cup position (1 to 10)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-13
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2132 ONLINE ERROR [ aa ] [ bbbbbbbbb ]


System Status
(1) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is designated as "STOP",
the following events can occur :
1) The text following the alarm will not be received.
2) In a case when the test requisition is received real-time, the "STOP" designation is ignored
and the test requisition will be received in real-time at the start of the next analysis.
(2) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is designated as "Continue",
the test requisition for the next sample will be received.
Cause
(1) Communication error occurs when transmitting the text for test requisition or receiving the test
requisition format.
(2) The display in the [ ] and its meaning are as follows.

aa : type of the errors


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 : Device name error
02 : Framing error
03 : Over run error
04 : Parity error
05 : Time out error
06 : Receive NAK when transmitting a text
07 : BCC error when receiving a text
08 : Other communication errors
09 : Function error
10 : Unit name error
11 : Parameter error
12 : Request cancel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-14
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

bbbbbbbbb : Text having error


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
RB : Start text for receiving the test requisition information
RE : End text for receiving the test requisition information
R_ _ _ nnnn : normal run, normal sample, sample No.
R_ _E nnnn : normal run, emergency sample, sample No.
R_ _P nnnn : normal run, STAT sample, sample No.
R_ U_ nnnn : normal run, urine sample, sample No.
R_ UE nnnn : normal run, urine emergency sample, sample No.
R_ UP nnnn : normal run, urine STAT sample, sample No.
R_ X_ nnnn : normal run, other sample, sample No.
R_ XE nnnn : normal run, other emergency sample, sample No.
R_ XP nnnn : normal run, other STAT sample, sample No.

RH _ _ nnnn : repeat run, normal sample, sample No.


RH _E nnnn : repeat run, emergency sample, sample No.
RH _P nnnn : repeat run, STAT sample, sample No.
RH U_ nnnn : repeat run, urine sample, sample No.
RH UE nnnn : repeat run, urine emergency sample, sample No.
RH UP nnnn : repeat run, urine STAT sample, sample No.
RH X_ nnnn : repeat run, other sample, sample No.
RH XE nnnn : repeat run, other emergency sample, sample No.
RH XP nnnn : repeat run, other STAT sample, sample No.

R_ _ _ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, normal sample, sample ID


R_ _E xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, emergency sample, sample ID
R_ _P xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, STAT sample, sample ID
R_ U_ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine sample, sample ID
R_ UE xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine emergency sample, sample ID
R_ UP xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, urine STAT sample, sample ID
R_ X_ xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other sample, sample ID
R_ XE xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other emergency sample, sample ID
R_ XP xxxxxxxxxxx : normal run, other STAT sample, sample ID

RH _ _ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, normal sample, sample ID


RH _E xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, emergency sample, sample ID
RH _P xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, STAT sample, sample ID
RH U_ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine sample, sample ID
RH UE xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine emergency sample, sample ID
RH UP xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, urine STAT sample, sample ID
RH X_ xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other sample, sample ID
RH XE xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other emergency sample, sample ID
RH XP xxxxxxxxxxx : repeat run, other STAT sample, sample ID
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-15
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2133 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : NO SAMPLE No.)


System Status
(1) Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2) Continue to receive the test requisition information text for samples following the alarm.
Cause
(1) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu SetUp, the T.R.I. receive is not designated as "YES" for the
necessary parameter.
(2) The display in the [ ] and its meaning are as follows.

aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.


cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)

es24-15.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-16
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2134 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : NO SAMPLE ID)


System Status
(1) Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2) Continue to receive the test requisition information text for samples following the alarm.

Cause
(1) In the Online Parameter menu, submenu SetUp, the T.R.I. receive is not designated as "YES" for the
necessary parameter.
(2) The display in the [ ] and its meaning are as follows.

aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.


-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.


cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)

es24-16.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-17
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2135 ONLINE ILLEGAL TEXT CODE (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dd)


eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for samples following the alarm.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, the text classification
code is out of specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dd : Received Text Code
eeeeeeeee : Transferred sample ID

es24-17.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-18
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2136 ONLINE ILLEGAL TEXT BLOCK No. (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dd->ee)


fffffffff

System Status

(1). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "STOP", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). System will not receive text for samples following the sample generting the alarm.
3). In a case when the test requisition is received in real-time, the "STOP" is ignored
and the test requisition text will be received with real-time again during the next
analysis.
(2). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "Continue", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). The test requisition information text for the next sample will be received.

Additional Information

(1). When receiving the requistion information text using online, the block identification No.
is out of specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dd : Previously received block identification No.
ee : Last received block identification No.
fffffffff : Transferred sample ID
es24-18.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-19
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2137 ONLINE ILLEGAL SAMPLE No. (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dddddd )


eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for other samples within the run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, sample No. of the
sample generating the alarm does not meet the specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.

cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)


dddddd : Received sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
eeeeeeeee : Transferred sample ID

es24-19.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-20
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2138 ONLINE ILLEGAL RACK No. (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : ddddd - ee) fffffffff

System Status

(1). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "STOP", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). System will not receive text for samples following the sample generating the alarm.
3). In a case when the test requisition is received in real-time, the "STOP" is ignored
and the test requisition text will be received with real-time again during the next
analysis.
(2). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "Continue", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). The test requisition information text for the next sample will be received.

Additional Information

(1). When receiving the requistion information text using online, the rack No. is out of
specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.


cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
ddddd : Received Rack No.
ee : Received Cup position (1 to 10)
fffffffff : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-21
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2139 ONLINE ILLEGAL SAMPLE KIND (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dd)

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, sample kind No. of
the sample generating the alarm does not meet the specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dd : Received Sample type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
__ : Normal sample
_E : Emergency sample
_P : Stat sample
U_ : Urine normal sample
UE : Urine emergency sample
UP : Urine stat sample

X_ : Other normal sample


XE : Other emergency sample
XP : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-22
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2140 ONLINE ILLEGAL GENDER TEXT (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : d ) eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for other samples within the run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the requistion information text using online, the sex of this text is not
within the specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
d : Sex Gender Received
eeeeeeeee : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-23
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2141 ONLINE ILLEGAL AGE/MONTH (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : ddd ee) fffffffff

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for other samples within the run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the requistion information text using online, age or month age (age of
baby before one year) of this text is out of the specification.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
ddd : Received age
ee : Received month age
fffffffff : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-24
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2142 ONLINE ANALYSIS METHOD MISMATCH (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dd <>


ee) fffffffff

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for other samples within the run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, sample type of this
text does not match the required sample type.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dd : Transferred Sample type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
__ : Normal sample
_E : Emergency sample
_P : Stat sample
U_ : Urine normal sample
UE : Urine emergency sample
UP : Urine stat sample
X_ : Other normal sample
XE : Other emergency sample
XP : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ee : Received sample type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
__ : Normal sample

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-25
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

_E : Emergency sample
_P : Stat sample
U_ : Urine normal sample
UE : Urine emergency sample
UP : Urine stat sample
X_ : Other normal sample
XE : Other emergency sample
XP : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
fffffffff : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-26
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2143 ONLINE SAMPLE No. MISMATCH(aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc<>dddddd)


eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, sample type of this
does not match the required sample.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dddddd : Received sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample

_P nnnn : Stat sample


U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
eeeeeeeee : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-27
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2144 ONLINE RACK No. MISMATCH (aaaaaa : bbbbb - cc<> ddddd - ee)
fffffffff

System Status

(1). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "STOP", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). System will not receive text for samples following the sample generating the alarm.
3). In a case when the test requisition is received in real-time, the "STOP" is ignored
and the test requisition text will be received with real-time again during the next
analysis.
(2). In the Online Parameter menu, submenu Error Control, if the T.R.I. receive is
designated as "Continue", the following events occur :
1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
2). The test requisition information text for the next sample will be received.

Additional Information

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, rack No. of this does
not match the required sample.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other that sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
ddddd : Received Rack No.
ee : Received Cup position (1 to 10)
fffffffff : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-28
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2145 ONLINE MISMATCH (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : ddddddddd<>eeeeeeeee)

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text uisng online, sample ID of this text
does not match the required ones.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
ddddddddd : Transferred sample ID
eeeeeeeee : Received sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL 24-28-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2146 ONLINE TEST ITEM ERROR (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, the test requisition
cannot be stored.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _ nnnn : Normal sample
_E nnnn : Emergency sample
_P nnnn : Stat sample
U_ nnnn : Urine normal sample
UE nnnn : Urine emergency sample
UP nnnn : Urine stat sample
X_ nnnn : Other normal sample
XE nnnn : Other emergency sample
XP nnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
ddddddddd : Transferred sample ID

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL 24-28-2
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

2147 ONLINE REPEAT ITEM ERROR (aaaaaa - bbbbb - cc : dddddd)


eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). Disregard the repeat run test requisition information for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text for repeat run using online, repeat
run test requisition cannot be stored with for the following reasons.
1). Original sample that is designated in the repeat run text is not stored in the normal
run/sample test requisition information.
2). Sample No. is not set to the original sample that is designated in the repeat run text.
3). Original sample that is designated in the repeat run text has already been stored as a
repeat run sample for another sample.
(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning are as follows.
aaaaaa : Transferred sample type and sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
H_ _ nnnn : repeat run,Normal sample
H_E nnnn : repeat run,Emergency sample
H_P nnnn : repeat run,Stat sample
HU_ nnnn : repeat run,Urine normal sample
HUE nnnn : repeat run,Urine emergency sample
HUP nnnn : repeat run,Urine stat sample
HX_ nnnn : repeat run,Other normal sample
HXE nnnn : repeat run,Other emergency sample
HXP nnnn : repeat run,Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
bbbbb : Transferred Rack No.
cc : Transferred Cup position (1 to 10)
dddddd : sample type and original sample No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_ _nnnn : Normal sample
_ _Ennn : Emergency sample
_ _Pnnn : Stat sample
_U_nnn : Urine normal sample
_UEnnn : Urine emergency sample
_UPnnn : Urine stat sample
_Xnnnn : Other normal sample

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL 24-28-3
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

_XEnnn : Other emergency sample


_XPnnn : Other stat sample
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
eeeeeeeee : Transferred sample ID

2148 ONLINE FORMAT ERROR (RECEIVE TEXT LENGTH NOT EQUAL)

System Status

(1). Disregard the test requisition information text for the sample generating the alarm.
(2). Continue to receive the test requisition information text for the other samples within the
run.

Cause

(1). When receiving the test requisition information text using online, length of this text is out of the specification.

es24-20.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-29
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2151 DTR SET ERROR


System Status
(1) System movies to the STOP mode.
(2) There is no communication between the DPR and the Analyzer.
(3) DPR functions not utilizing the analyzer may be performed.
User Action
(1) Perform system down using the END process function.
(2) Check the communication connectors at the back of the computer.
(3) Re-boot the system.
(4) If the alarm continues to occur, call the Technical Support.
Cause
(1) A communication error of setting a signal of DSR occurs between the computer and Analyzer.

2152 DSR CHECK TIMEOUT


System Status
(1) System movies to the STOP mode.
(2) There is no communication between the DPR and the Analyzer.
(3) DPR functions not utilizing the analyzer may be performed.
User Action
(1) Perform system down using the END process function.
(2) Check the communication connectors at the back of the computer.
(3) Re-boot the system.
(4) If the alarm continues to occur, call the Technical Support.
Cause
(1) A communication error of time out a signal of DTR occurs between the computer and Analyzer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-30
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2201 ANL Communication Overrun First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Communication overrun error occurs when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and
communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2202 ANL Communication Parity First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Parity error occurs when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2203 ANL Communication Framing First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Framing error occurs when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2204 ANL Communication other SIO First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Other SIO error occurs when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-31
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2205 ANL Communication ENQ sent First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Communication error occurs when transmitting ENQ to ANL. However, DPR was retried and
communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2206 ANL Communication NAK Receive First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) DPR received NAK from ANL. However, DPR was retried and communication completed without
trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2207 ANL Communication Timeout First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) Timeout error occurs when transmitting to ANL. However, DPR was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2208 ANL Communication Not Receive STX First Time Error (aa,bb,c)
Cause
(1) DPR received except STX with the top of text when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried
and communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-32
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2209 ANL Communication Receive Text length not equal First Time
Error (aa,bb,c)
Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal length of the text when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and
communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2210 ANL Communication Receive Illegal ETX Location First Time


Error (aa,bb,c)
Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal position of ETX when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and
communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2211 ANL Communication BCC First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) BCC error occurs when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2212 ANL Communication Text Code First Time Error (aa,bb,c)


Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal text when receiving from ANL. However, ANL was retried and
communication completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-33
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2213 ANL Communication Text Sending Char Receive First Time Error
(aa,bb,c)
Cause
(1) DPR received text under transmitting to ANL. However, ANL was retried and communication
completed without trouble.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2214 ANL Communication Overrun Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Communication overrun error occurs when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2215 ANL Communication Parity Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Parity error occurs when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-34
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2216 ANL Communication Framing Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Framing error occurs when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2217 ANL Communication other SIO Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Other SIO error occurs when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2218 ANL Communication ENQ send Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Communication error occurs when transmitting ENQ to ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-35
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2219 ANL Communication NAK Receive (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received NAK from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2220 ANL Communication Timeout Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Timeout error occurs when transmitting to ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2221 ANL Communication Not Receive STX (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received except STX with the top of text when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-36
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2222 ANL Communication Receive Text length not equal (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal length of the text when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2223 ANL Communication Receive Illegal ETX Location (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal position of ETX when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2224 ANL Communication BCC Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) BCC error occurs when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-37
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2225 ANL Communication Text Code Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received the illegal text when receiving from ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2226 ANL Communication Text Sending Char Receive Error (aa,bb,c)


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) DPR received text under transmitting to ANL.

Error details
aa : Message No.
bb : Error No.
c : Retry No.

2251 PRINTER NOT SELECTED


System Status
(1) No printout the user selected list.
User Action
(1) Please check the menu parameter of [parameter][Format][Printer].
Cause
(1) There is no printer for the printing of the list.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-38
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

2301 NO FLOPPY DISK


System Status
(1) Floppy drive operations stop.
User Action
(1) Insert a floppy disk and retry the operation.
Cause
(1) Floppy disk is not inserted into the floppy drive.

2302 FLOPPY DISK READ/WRITE ERROR


System Status
(1) Floppy disk operations stop.
User Action
(1) If the data on the disk is no longer needed, perform the following.
a) Select the “maintenance “menu-“Data operation”-“FD initialize”.
b) Initialize the floppy disk generating this error according to the menu prompt.
c) If the disk initialize without any problems, use this floppy disk for the operation
d) If the error re-occurs, use another floppy disk.
(2) If the disk generating the error is not a disk that is used to store data, please do not use this disk on this
or any other AU400 system.
User Action
(1) An error occurred when attempting to read or write the data off the floppy disk.

3103 POWER FAILURE DETECTED


System Status
(1) An advisory alarm is given.
Cause
(1) The power supply to the system was interrupted.
User Action
(1) Press the power failure detection reset switch.
(2) As the power to the refrigerator was cut, the reagents on board could be compromised. Re-calibration
and a QC check are advised.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-39
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3104 PHOTOMETER CPU INITIAL ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the
photometry boards (MV1005 and MV1006) and restart the system. If an error reoccurs, replace the
MV1019, MV1005 and / or MV1006 boards.
(2) In case of a ROM error, check connection of the photometry ROM (MV2078) and restart the system. If
an error reoccurs, replace the MV2078 board.
(3) The following error occurs in the photometry unit sub-CPU in initialization.

aa : Error details (Hex.)


bit 0 : The ROM check sum is not correct
bit 1 : Data cannot be read and written from / into the S-RAM properly
bit 2 : An error is present in the ARCK NET
bit 3 : An error is present in the OPMC

3105 COM. CONTROL CPU INITIAL ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable. The communications control CPU
has failed initialization.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connection of the ISE interface communication ROM (MV2310) and restart the system. If an
error reoccurs, replace the ANL control board MV1019.
(2) In case of a ROM error, replace the board MV2310.
(3) The following error occurs in the communication control CPU during initialization.

aa : Error details (Hex.)


bit 0 : Initialization is not completed in time
bit 1 : The ROM check sum is not correct
bit 2 : Data cannot be read and written from / into the S-RAM properly
bit 3 : Data cannot be read and written from / into the DP-ROM properly

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-40
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3106 OPTICAL COM. MASTER INITIAL ERROR (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
Cause
(1) Communications via the fiber optic subsystem has failed during initialization.
User Action
(1) Restart the system.
(2) If the problem reoccurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Any of the following errors occurs in the optical communication CPU.

Error details

aa : Primary station status (Hex.)


bit 0 : DMA error
bit 1 : Reception error
bit 2 : Transmission error
bit 3 : System error (in initialization)
bit 4 : Undefined
bit 5 : In the downloading mode
bit 6 : In transmission
bit 7 : Ready to receive a command

bb : Primary station system error status (Hex.)


bit 0 : Rom error
bit 1 : S-RAM error
bit 2 : DP-RAM error
bit 3 : communication error

cc : Error in primary station status (Decimal)


(When primary station status is "disconnect circuit")
01H : LAN master or Reagent container
02H : Reagent container or Reagent probe
03H : Reagent probe or Mixer
04H : Sample probe or Rack unloading
05H : Rack unloading or Rack recovery
06H : Rack recovery or Dispensor
07H : Dispenser or Mixer
08H : Mixer or LAN master

Error factor (Hex.)


(When primary station status is reception / transmission)
bit 0 : Undefinition
bit 1 : Undefinition
bit 2 : CRC error
bit 3 : Over-run
bit 4 : Fraction bit is detected
bit 5 : Abort
bit 6 : Short frame is detected
bit 7 : Reception is not completed

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-41
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

(2) Check connection of the optical communication connectors (U39 and U40) on the optical
communication master ROM (MV1030) and ANL control board (MV1019), then restart the system. If a
ROM error recurs, replace the MV1030.
(3) If an S-RAM or DP-RAM error occurs, replace the board MV1019.
If the line is disconnected or a communication error occurs, check connection of all connectors on the
secondary error station board and restart the system.
(4) If an error reoccurs, replace the secondary error station board.

3107 OPTICAL COM. SLAVE INITIAL ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred in the optical communications system during initialization.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the analyzer. If the problem recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check all connectors on the secondary error station board and restart the system. If an error reoccurs,
replace the secondary error station board.
(2) The following errors occurs in the motor controller of the secondary optical communication in station
during initialization.

aa : secondary error (Hex.)


01H : Reagent container
02H : Reagent probe
03H : Sample probe
04H : Rack unloading
05H : Rack recovery
06H : Dispenser
07H : Mixer

3108 PHOTOMETER CPU -> ANL COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) A communications error has occurred between the photometry CPU and the analyzer's main CPU.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the analyzer. If the problem recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-42
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

Additional Information
(1) Check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the
photometry boards (MV1005 and MV1006) then restart the system. If an error reoccurs, replace the
MV1019, MV1005 and / or MV1006 boards.
(2) Reset the system. If an error reoccurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. If an error still
recurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.
(3) The ANL receives an invalid message code from the photometry sub-CPU.

Error details
aa : Received message code (Hex.)
bb : Data in the ARCK NET status register (Hex.)
cc : Data in the ARCK NET status configuration register (Hex.)
dd : Data in the ARCK NET DIAG register (Hex.)

3109 PHOTOMETER CPU -> ANL TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) The analyzer has not received a message from the photometry sub-CPU.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the analyzer. If the problem recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the
photometry boards (MV1005 and MV1006) then restart the system. If an error reoccurs, replace the
MV1019, MV1005 and / or MV1006 boards.
(2) Reset the system. If an error reoccurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. If an error still
reoccurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.

Error details
aa : Message code to be received (Hex.)
bb : Data in the ARCK NET status register (Hex.)
cc : Data in the ARCK NET status configuration register (Hex.)
dd : Data in the ARCK NET DIAG register (Hex.)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-43
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3110 ANL -> PHOTOMETER CPU COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) A communications error has occurred during a message from the analyzer to the photometer CPU.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the
photometry boards (MV1005 and MV1006) then restart the system. If an error recurs, replace the
MV1019, MV1005, and / or MV1006.
(2) Reset the system. If an error recurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. If an error still
recurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.

Error details

aa : Message code causing the error (Hex.)

bb : Data in the ARCK NET status register (Hex.)


bit 0 : Ready to send
bit 1 : ACK is received
bit 2 : Configuration occurs
bit 3 : Test is executed
bit 4 : Resetting is completed
bit 5 : Undefined
bit 6 : Undefined
bit 7 : Reception is completed

cc : Data in the ARCK NET configuration register (Hex.)


bit 0 : Sub address
bit 1 : Sub address
bit 2 : Back plane mode
bit 3 : Test is executed
bit 4 : Extended time
bit 5 : Extended time
bit 6 : TXEN
bit 7 : Reset

dd : Data in the ARCK NET diagnostic register (HEX.)


bit 0 : Undefined
bit 1 : Undefined
bit 2 : TENTTD
bit 3 : EXNAK
bit 4 : TOKEN
bit 5 : RCVACT
bit 6 : DUPID
bit 7 : MYRECON

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-44
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3111 PHOTOMETER CPU ERROR (aa,b)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) The mode changes to Stop.
Cause
(1) Any of the following errors occurs in the photometry sub-CPU.
a) Sub-CPU fails to become ready to write a command reception.
b) The CPU receives an undefined command.
c) Parameter error.
User Action
(1) Reinitialize the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Reset the system. If an error recurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. If an error still
recurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.

Error details
aa : Send command (Hex.)

b : System status
1 : System busy
2 : Wheel rotation disable
3 : Parameter error
4 : Unknown command
5 : Double receive command
6 : Initial position error after INITIALIZE
7 : Stop position error after photometry

3112 OPTICAL COM. ERROR (aa,bb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) In initialization
Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) On completion of initialization (except for DIAG and MAINTENANCE)
The mode changes to STOP.
(3) During DIAG or MAINTENANCE
Operation stops.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred in the fiber-optic communications system.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-45
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

Additional Information
(1) In initialization
Check the optical communication connectors (U39 and U40) on the ANL control board (MV1019),
then restart the system.
If an error recurs, check connection of all connectors on the secondary error station board, then restart
the system.
If an error recurs, replace the secondary error station board.
(2) In Operation (2) or (3)
Reset the system. If an error recurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. If an error still
recurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.

Error Details
aa : Error type (Hex.)
10 : DMA error when writing primary station command
11 : Cannot write command to primary station
20 : Semaphore error when writing parameter to secondary station t
40 : DMA / Transfer / receive error when writing command to non-selected secondary station
41 : Cannot write command when writing command to non-selected secondary station

bb : Primary station status (Hex.)


bit 0 : DMA error
bit 1 : Reception error
bit 2 : Transmission error
bit 3 : System error (in initialization)
bit 5 : In the download mode
bit 6 : In transmission
bit 7 : Ready to receive a command

cc : Error primary / secondary station (Hex.)


Case 1 (except aa=20)
02H : CRC error
03H : Overrun error
04H : Sample probe
05H : Abort
06H : Detecting short flame
07H : Missing the end of receive

Case 2 (aa=20)
01H : Reagent container
02H : R probe
03H : Sample probe
04H : Rack unloading
05H : Rack recovery
06H : Dispenser
07H : Mixer

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-46
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3113 OPMC ERROR (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) In initialization
Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) On completion of initialization (except for DIAG and MAINTENANCE)
The mode changes to STOP.
(3) During DIAG or MAINTENANCE
Operation stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs in the motor controller of the secondary optical communication station.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) In initialization
Check the optical communication connectors (U39 and U40) on the ANL control board (MV1019),
then restart the system.
If an error recurs, check connection of all connectors on the secondary error station board, then restart
the system.
If an error recurs, replace the secondary error station board.
(2) In case of Operation (2) or (3)
Reset the system. If an error recurs in resetting, check the sub-CPU using ANL DIAG. if an error still
recurs, take the same measures as taken for an error in initialization.

Error Details
aa : Error Secondary station
bb : Time table No.
cc : Phase No.

3114 ANL -> COM. CONTROL CPU I/F ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) In Initialization :
Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
(2) On completion of initialization (except for DIAG and MAINTENANCE)
The mode changes to STOP.
(3) During DIAG or MAINTENANCE
Operation stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ANL is accessing the communication sub-CPU.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-47
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

Additional Information
(1) In Initialization
Check connectors (375 and 385) on the ANL control board (MV1019), ISE I / F ROM (MV2310), all
connectors on the ISE control board (MV2190) and ISE control ROM (MV2191), then restart the
system. If an error recurs, replace MV2310, MV1019, MV2191 and MV2190.
(2) In case of Operation (2) or (3)
Reset the system. If an error recurs in resetting, take the same measures as taken for an error in
initialization.

aa : Error details (Hex.)


bit 0 : Request to send is issued but the ISE is not connected
bit 1 : Invalid command is received
bit 7 : Not ready to receive a command

3115 ANL -> BAR CODE READER COM. ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) During Initialization
For a rack ID, Reagent error the ANL becomes inoperable.
For a S.ID or STAT error the mode changes to STOP.
(2) On completion of initialization (except for DIAG and MAINTENANCE)
The mode changes to STOP.
(3) During DIAG or MAINTENANCE
Operation stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ANL is sending data to the communication sub-CPU.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) In Initialization
1) Check integrity of connector 385 on the ANL control board (MV1019), ISE I / F ROM
(MV2310), and the bar code reader that triggered the error, then restart the system.
If an error recurs, confirm that the communication parameters of the bar code reader are set to
4800 and no parity, then restart. If an error recurs, replace the MV2310, MV1019 and the bar
code reader.
2) If an error occurs in the Reagent ID, or rack ID reader and bar code analysis is not carried
out, it is possible to replace the bar code reader with the S.ID or STAT reader.

Error details
aa : (Hex.)
01H : Rack ID / S.ID
03H : STAT
04H : Reagent

bb : (Hex.)
bit 1 : No acknowledgment is received in time
bit 2 : NAK is received
bit 3 : One-character transmission is not completed in time

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-48
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3116 ANL <- BAR CODE READER COM. ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) During Initialization :
For a rack ID, Reagent ID error the ANL becomes inoperable.
For S.ID or STAT errors, the mode changes to STOP.
(2) On completion of initialization (except for DIAG and MAINTENANCE)
The mode changes to STOP.
(3) During DIAG or MAINTENANCE :
Operation stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ANL is sending data to the communication sub-CPU.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the integrity of the connector 385 on the ANL control board (MV1019), the ISE I / F ROM
(MV2310) and the bar code reader that triggered the error, then restart the system.
If an error recurs, confirm that the communication parameters of the bar code reader are set to 4800 and
no parity, then restart. If an error recurs, replace the MV2310, MV1019, and the bar code reader.
(2) If an error occurs in the Reagent, or rack ID reading and bar code analysis is not carried out, it is
possible to replace the bar code reader with the S.ID or STAT reader.

Error details
aa : (Hex.)
01H : Rack ID / S.ID
03H : STAT
04H : Reagent

bb : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Message length error
bit 1 : Failure to complete from STX to LF
bit 2 :
bit 3 :
bit 4 : Over-run error
bit 5 : Framing error
bit 6 :
bit 7 : Overwriting the message

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-49
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3118 ANL <- DPR COM. ERROR-1 (aa,bb)


Cause
(1) An error has occurred while the ANL is receiving a message from the DPR.
(2) This error is triggered if the message fails two attempts at transmission.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connection of the communication circuit between ANL (COM) and connector 378 on the ANL
control board (MV1019), then restart the system.
(2) If an error recurs, replace MV1019 and communication cable.
If necessary, also replace the DPR.

Error details
aa : Message number (Hex.)

bb : (Hex.)
bit 0 : STX cannot be received within time
bit 1 : Received except STX
bit 2 : Failure to complete from STX to BCC
bit 3 : BCC error
bit 4 : No EXT
bit 5 : Framing error or over-run error

3119 ANL <- DPR TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR can continue functioning, the ANL is inoperable.
Cause
(1) The ANL failed to receive a message from the DPR.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connection of the communication circuit between DPR and ANL (COM) and connector 378 on
the ANL control board (MV1019), then restart the system.
(2) If an error recurs, replace MV1019 and communication cable.
If necessary, also replace the DPR.

Error details
aa : Message No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-50
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3121 ANL -> DPR COM. ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) Although the DPR and ANL can continue functioning.
Cause
(1) The ANL has failed in a second attempt at transmitting a message to the DPR.
User Action
(1) Restart the system. If the error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An acknowledge (ACK or NAK) to a message sent by the ANL to the DPR is not received in time.
(2) Check connection of the communication circuit between the DPR and ANL (COM) and connector 378
on the ANL control board MV1019, then restart the system.
(3) If an error recurs, replace MV1019 and communication cable.
If necessary, also replace the DPR.

Error details
aa : Message No. (Hex.)

bb : (Hex.)
bit 0 : An acknowledge to ENQ is not received in time
bit 1 : ENQ is returned in response to ENQ
bit 2 : An acknowledge to transmission is not received in time
bit 3 : NAK is returned in response to transmission
bit 4 : Non ACK / NAK is returned in response to transmission
bit 5 : Text is received in transmission
bit 6 : Time-out is in transmission

3122 RACK/SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aa)


Cause
(1) The analyzer has not read a bar code label correctly.
User action
(1) Check the bar code label for scratches, cleanliness, and position on the tube.
Description
(1) An error has occurred when reading the S.ID bar code during DIAG.

Error details
aa : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Reading is not completed in time
bit 1 : Check character check error
bit 2 : Wrong number of digits

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-51
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3123 STAT SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aa)


Cause
(1) The analyzer has failed to read a Stat bar code correctly.
User Action
(1) Check the bar code for scratches, cleanliness and position on the tube.
Description
aa : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Reading is not completed in time
bit 1 : Check character check error
bit 2 : Wrong number of digits

3124 RACK ID READ ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) During MEASURE
Mode changes to MEASURE-2
User Action
(1) Check the rack bar code for scratches, cleanliness and position.
Additional Information
(1) An error has occurred when reading the rack ID bar code label.

Error details
aa : Rack type (Hex.)
1 : General
2 : Emergency
3 : Repeat run
4 : ACAL
5 : QC

bb : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Reading is not completed in time
bit 1 : Check character check error
bit 2 : Wrong number of digits

3127 REAGENT ID READ ERROR (aa)


Cause
(1) The analyzer has failed to read a REAGENT bar code in DIAG-MODE.
User Action
(1) Check the bar code for scratches, cleanliness and position.
Additional Information
Error details
aa : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Reading is not completed within time
bit 1 : Check character check error
bit 2 : Wrong number of digits

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-52
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3129 ORIGINAL DETERGENT B EMPTY


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs while refilling detergent B, the detergent preparation pump stops.
(2) The mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY; the system will not start with this alarm.
(3) Detergent B preparation in DIAG is not executed.
Cause
(1) Non-diluted detergent B is low.
User Action
(1) Refill non-diluted detergent B and confirm that the ANL status error is reset. If it is not reset, check the
connector of the non-diluted detergent float switch.

3130 ORIGINAL DETERGENT A EMPTY


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs while refilling detergent A, the detergent preparation pump stops.
(2) The mode changes to the WARM-UP or STAND-BY mode. The system will not start with this alarm.
(3) Detergent A preparation in DIAG is not executed.
Cause
(1) Non-diluted detergent A is low.
User Action
(1) Refill non-diluted detergent A and confirm that the ANL status error is reset. If it is not reset, check the
connector of the non-diluted detergent float switch.

3131 DETERGENT B SHORT


System Status
(1) The detergent preparation pump should turn on and prepare diluted detergent B.
(2) The mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY. The system will not start with this alarm.
(3) The mode changes to PAUSE.
(4) The Detergent B pump stops.
Cause
(1) Detergent B is low.
User Action
(1) If a non-diluted detergent B insufficient alarm hasn't been given before this alarm takes place, check the
tubing of detergent B and the float switch connector.
If a detergent B overflow alarm is triggered, check for air bubbles in the tubing.
If the undiluted detergent bottle is full, the overflow sensor is off, the deionized water tank is full, and
the level does not increase in STAND-BY, check if the detergent preparation pump is running.
If the detergent preparation pump is running, touch the detergent preparation valve to check if it is
opening and closing.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-53
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3132 DETERGENT A SHORT


System Status
(1) The detergent preparation pump should turn on and prepare diluted detergent A.
(2) The mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY. The system will not start with this alarm.
(3) The mode changes to PAUES.
(4) The Detergent A pump stops.
Cause
(1) Detergent A is low.
User Action
(1) If a non-diluted detergent A insufficient alarm hasn't been given before this alarm takes place, check the
tubing of detergent A and the float switch connector.
If a detergent A overflow alarm is triggered, check for air bubbles in the tubing.
If the undiluted detergent bottle is full, the overflow sensor is off, the deionized water tank is full, and
the level does not increase in STAND-BY, check if the detergent preparation pump is running.
If the detergent preparation pump is running, touch the detergent preparation valve to check if it is
opening and closing.
(2) Unless corrected, Detergent B will overflow.

3133 DI WATER SHORT


System Status
(1) The deionized water and detergent pumps stop.
(2) The system cannot be started with this alarm.
(3) If deionized water does not fill in 1 minute, an alarm is given to indicate that the water supply is off.
The mode changes to STOP.
(4) No operation is carried out.
User Action
(1) Check the main valve of the ion exchange water. If the main valve is open, check the flow rate and
operation of the ion exchange water feed valve and CLB.
(2) If there is sufficient deionized water, check the float switch connector.

3134 DI WATER EMPTY


System Status
(1) The deionized water and detergent pumps stop.
(2) The system cannot be started with this alarm.
(3) This alarm indicates that the water supply is off. The mode changes to STOP.
(4) No operation is carried out.
User Action
(1) Check the main valve of the ion exchange water. If the main valve is open, check the flow rate and
operation of the ion exchange water feed valve and CLB.
(2) If there is sufficient deionized water, check the float switch connector.
Additional Information
(1) Deionized water is below specifications for one minute.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-54
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3135 DETERGENT B OVERFLOW


System Status
(1) The diluted Detergent B tank has overfilled.
(2) This error will not prevent the system from starting.
User Action
(1) Check the tubing for air bubbles. If no air bubbles are found, check the float switch connector. Also
check the detergent B dilution valve for leakage.
Additional Information
(1) Unless corrected, Detergent B will overflow.

3136 DETERGENT A OVERFLOW


System Status
(1) The diluted Detergent A tank has overfilled.
(2) This error will not prevent the system from starting.
User Action
(1) Check the tubing for air bubbles. If no air bubbles are found, check the float switch connector. Also
check the detergent A dilution valve for leakage.
Additional Information
(1) Unless corrected, Detergent A can overflow.

3137 DI WATER OVERFLOW


System Status
(1) Although this alarm will not stop the system from starting, it should be immediately addressed.
User Action
(1) Confirm that the water level in the deionized water tank has stopped rising.
(2) If the water level is still rising, turn off the water supply to the system.
Additional Information
(1) Unless corrected, the deionized water tank will overflow.

3138 REAGENT REF. COVER OPEN


System Status
(1) Reagent check functions are not started. The system switches to Warm-Up, Stand-By, or Stop modes.
Cause
(1) The Reagent lid is open during a reagent check.
User Action
(1) Close the lid and retry the reagent check.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-55
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3140 INCUBATION. BATH/REAGENT REF. TMP. A/D ERROR


System Status
(1) The incubator bath temperature display cannot be updated.
User Action
(1) If this alarm occurs frequently, restart the system. If restarting does not eliminate the error, call
Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) EOC of the temperature measuring A / D is not detected in time.
(2) Replace the ANL control board (MV1019).

3141 LAMP OFF


System Status
Case in PHOTOCAL and Measure starting
(1) The mode is no changes.
Case in Measure mode
(2) The mode changes to STOP; the system cannot be started.
Cause
(1) Usually, this indicates that the photometry lamp has burned out.
User Action
(1) If the lamp is off, replace it and perform a PHOTO CAL. If the lamp is on, call Olympus Technical
Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the light
measurement boards (MV1005 and MV 1006). Restart operation.

3142 LAMP DARK


System Status
(1) The mode is no changes.
Cause
(1) The photometry lamp is too dim.
User Action
(1) Perform a W1 and start the system. If an error recurs, perform a Photocal and check the WB data. If the
overall O.D. is too large, replace the lamp.
If some of the cuvettes are abnormal, clean or replace the cuvettes. If the error continues, call Olympus
Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) If no abnormality is found, check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all
connectors on the photometry boards (MV1005 and MV1006). Restart operation.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-56
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3143 PHOTOMETER DATA ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP; the system cannot be started.
Cause
(1) Photometry data is abnormal.
User Action
(1) Execute W1, then retry Start. If an error recurs, call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check connectors 370 and 379 on the ANL control board (MV1019) and all connectors on the
photometer boards (MV1005 and MV1006) Restart operation.

aa : (Decimal)
1 : Lamp brightness
2 : 0% data error
3 : Gain error
4 : Offset error

3144 NO VACUUM PRESSURE


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP; the system cannot be started.
(2) No operation generating waste liquid is performed.
Cause
(1) There is insufficient vacuum for liquid waste.
User Action
(1) Reset the system. Check for the sound of the vacuum pump operating.
If the sound is abnormal or no sound is heard, check for the sound of an air leak from near the cuvette
cleaning unit.
If the sound is always heard during system resetting, check for a leak from the atmospheric pressure
relief valve, suction valves, and vacuum tank waste liquid valve.

3145 VACUUM TANK FULL


System Status
(1) Waste liquid is discharged until the full sensor turns off.
The waste pump will continue operation for one additional minute.
(2) The mode changes into STOP mode; the system cannot be started.
(3) No operation generating waste liquid is performed.
User Action
(1) Wait until the status of the ANL is reset (the status will not change for one minute after the waste sensor
turns off).
If the tank status does not reset, visually inspect the tank. If waste liquid remains in the tank, check
operation of the atmospheric pressure relief valves, aspiration valves, and vacuum tank waste liquid
valves.
Additional Information
(1) Unless corrected, waste liquid will overflow the waste liquid tank.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-57
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3146 RACK DETECTED ON FEEDER BELT (aa)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP ; the system cannot be started.
User Action
(1) Remove the rack. If no rack is present, call Olympus Technical Support to check function of the sensor.
Additional Information
(1) There is a rack on the unloading belt when the STOP mode changes to the WARM-UP, STAND-BY or
MEASURE1 modes.

aa : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Unloading backward motion prohibition sensor(S7) turns on
bit 1 : Unloading rack arrival sensor(S17) turns on
bit 2 : Cup detection sensor(S8) turns on
bit 4 : Error of Rack step at dispensing sample position (S16)

3147 RACK DETECTED ON RERUN FEEDER BELT (aa)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP; the system cannot be started.
Cause
(1) There is a rack on the recovery belt when the STOP mode changes into the WARM-UP, STAND-BY,
or MEASURE1 modes.
User Action
(1) Remove the rack. If no rack is present, call Olympus Technical Support to check function of the
sensors.
Additional Information
aa : (Hex.)
bit 0 : Recovered rack detection sensor(S20) is on
bit 1 : Pushing prohibition sensor(S21) is on
bit 2 : Repeat run rack passing sensor(S27) is on
bit 3 : Repeat run rack arrival sensor(S28) is on

3149 RACK RECEIVER FULL


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
(2) The mode changes to STAND-BY without starting operation.
(3) The mode changes to MEASURE-2 without starting operation.
(4) The mode changes to PAUSE (MEASURE to PAUSE) without starting operation.
(5) If the rack is removed when next rack is pushed out, mode changes from MEASURE to PAUSE.
(6) Operation stops.
Cause
(1) The rack storage is full.
User Action
(1) Remove the racks. If no racks are present, call Technical Support to check function of the sensor.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-58
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3150 NO RACK
System Status
(1) The mode is no change.
Cause
(1) No rack is found on the rack loading mechanism during MEASURE start.
User Action
(1) Set a rack on the rack feed caterpillar. If there is a rack, call Olympus Technical Support to check
operation of the sensor.

3151 NO STAT CUP


System Status
(1) Any samples in racks are analyzed without performing STAT.
Cause
(1) Usually, no cup is set on the STAT table.
User Action
(1) Set a sample on the STAT table. If there is a cup, call Olympus Technical Support to check the function
of the sensor.

3152 NO SAMPLE PROBE DETERGENT (aa)


System Status
(1) During STAND-BY to MEASURE
A RESTART inquiry is made.
(2) When W2 starts
The mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY without starting operation.
Cause
(1) The sample probe detergent on the STAT table is low when MEASURE or W2 starts.
User Action
(1) In either case, set a tube filled with sample probe detergent in the sample detergent 1 position. If the
probe does not detect detergent call Olympus Technical Support to check function of the level sensor.
Additional Information
Error details
aa : cup type (Hex.)
bit 0 : Cleaning cup 1
bit 1 : Cleaning cup 2

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-59
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3153 REAGENT PROBE DETERGENT SHORT


System Status
(1) When W2 starts
The mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY.
(2) During W2
Operations continue.
Cause
(1) The REAGENT detergent is low when W2 starts.
User Action
(1) When W2 starts
Set detergent in sample pre-dilution position.
If the probe does not detect detergent, check the function of the level sensor.
(2) During W2
Stop operation at once, refill the detergent bottle, and restart W2.

3155 RACK CLASS ERROR


System Status
(1) The mode changes to Measure 2 or Measure 3.
Cause
(1) The rack type is not being read properly.
User Action
(1) Reset the rack. If it is set properly, check operation of the sensors using the DIAG function.

3157 SAMPLE INFORMATION UNMATCH (aa,bbbb,cc,dd,eeeee)


System Status
(1) The mode changes from MEASURE to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-60
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

Additional Information
(1) Received sample data is inconsistent with the S.No. inquiry from the ANL to the DPR.

Error details
aa (Hex) :
bit 0 : sequential No.
bit 1 : Kind of Rack
bit 2 : Rack No.
bit 3 : Cup position

bbbb : Sequence number of Text

cc : 1 : General
2 : Emergency
3 : Calibration
4 : QC control
5 : Reagent blank
7 : Repeat of standard
8 : Stat

dd : Inquired cup position (1 to 10)


eeeeeeeeee : Sample No. of response

3160 ACAL INCOMPLETE


System Status
(1) The calibrator sample number is increased to measure the next ACAL sample.
Cause
(1) The last number of ACAL rack are not set or the rack feeder was stopped during ACAL.
User Action
(1) Check if the cups and racks are set according to the calibrator position programming. If they are set
properly, call Olympus Technical Support to check for a faulty cup sensor.

3161 QC INCOMPLETE
System Status
(1) The system proceeds to the next QC sample.
Cause
(1) The last number of QC rack are not set or the rack feeder was stopped during QC.
User Action
(1) Check if the cups and racks are set according to the control position programming. If they are set
properly, call Olympus Technical Support to check for a faulty cup sensor.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-61
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3162 RB/ACAL SAMPLE PROHIBITED


System Status
(1) Manual STAT Reagent blank / calibration was interrupted.
User Action
(1) The system will request the repeat of the reagent blank and the calibration prior to sample analysis.
Cause
(1) STAT QC/Calibration requested during measuring STAT QC/ACAL

3163 AUTOMATIC REPEAT ILLEGAL RACK No. (aa,bbbbbbb)


System Status
(1) The mode is no changes.
Cause
(1) Data returned in response to a automatic repeat run rack inquiry is inconsistent with the rack number.
User Action
(1) IF it was exits the pending repeat sample when checking repeat list, it is changing the repeat mode from
auto-repeat to standard-repeat.
And it is measure the pending repeat sample in the standard-repeat.
(2) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
Error details
aa : Rack type (Decimal)
1 : General
2 : Emergency

bbbbbbb : Rack number (7 ASCII character)

3164 AUTOMATIC REPEAT RACK OVER


System Status
(1) The mode changes from MEASURE to STOP.
User Action
(1) This error is caused by removing racks from the rack unloader.
Do not remove the rack collected on the unloader side if the system is programmed to perform
automatic repeats.
Cause
(1) The automatic repeat run rack buffer is full.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-62
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3165 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK STEP DISABLED T (aa)


System Status
(1) The mode is changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred while the rack unloading belt is running.
User Action
(1) Remove any racks on the feeder belts. Rerun samples as necessary.
Additional Information
(1) An error has occurred while the rack unloading belt is running.

Error details
T : Time table No.
aa : (Decimal)
1 : Except Upper position where sample probe is Rack position.
2 : Up/Down motor is busy where sample probe is Rack position.

3166 RACK SUPPLIER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode is changes to STOP.
User Action
Refer to the Additional Information below.
(1) Contact Technical Support Department.
Additional Information
(1) An error has occurred when unloading racks.

Error code
T : Time Sequence No.
aa : (Decimal)
1 : Motor busy
2 : The unloading-side disable motion sensor(S7) turns on when operation starts
3 : The rack pass sensor(s27) turns on when operation starts
4 : The backward prohibition sensors(S28) turns on when backward motion starts
5 : The unloading-side stop position sensor(S1) turns off when forward motion is completed
6 : The recovery-side stop position sensors(S2) turns off when backward motion is
completed
bb : Time Table No.
cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-63
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3167 RACK BUFFER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) Operations stop.
User Action
Refer to the Additional Information below.
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error has occurred while unloading racks.

Error codes
T : Time Sequence No.
aa : (Decimal)
1 : Motor busy
2 : The unloading disable sensor turn on when operation starts (S20)
3 : The recovery rack detection sensor(S18) turns on when motion to the recovery position
starts
4 : The unloading-side stop position sensor(S19) turns off when motion to the unloading
position is completed
5 : The recovery-side stop position sensor(S17) turns off when motion to the recovery
position is completed
bb : Time Table No.
cc : Phase No.

3168 CUP DETECTION POSITION, RACK STEP UNIT ERROR T


(aa,bb,cc)
System Status
(1). Operations stop.
User Action
Refer to the Additional Information below.
(1). Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1). An error occurs when the rack stepping pawls are moving at the cup detecting position.

Error details
T : Time Sequence No.
aa : (Decimal)
1 : Motor busy
2 : The origin sensor(S11) turns off after the pawls move to the origin
3 : The origin sensor turns(S11) off after the pawls move to the stop or open position

bbbb : (Decimal)
Time table No.
cccc : (Decimal)
Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-64
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3169 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK STEP UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the rack stepping pawls are moving at the sample aspirate position.

Error details
T : Time Sequence No.
aa : (Decimal)
1 : Motor busy
2 : The origin sensor(S14) turns off after the pawls move to the origin
3 : The origin sensor(S14) turns off after the pawls move to the stop or open position

bbbb : (Decimal)
Time table No.
cccc : (Decimal)
Phase No.

3171 SAMPLING POSITION, RACK JAM T (aa)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Check for slipping of the unloading belt.
Additional Information
(1) The rack has not advanced to the sample aspirate position.

T : Time Sequence No.


aa : Stepping position (1 to 9)

3172 RACK BUFFER JAM T


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) If the racks did not reach the recovery caterpillar(S17), check for slipping of the unloading belt.
Additional Information
(1) Racks are not being loaded onto the rear rack caterpillar.
T : Time Sequence No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-65
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3173 RACK RECEIVER JAM T


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) If a rack has reached the proper position, call Olympus Technical Support.
If any of the racks have not reached the proper position, check for slipping of the unloading belt.
Additional Information
(1) Racks have not been moved from the rack recovery position to the storage position; the unloading
prohibition sensor (S21)has not turned on.
T : Time Sequence No.

3174 RACK RECEIVER UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred while the system was moving a rack to the storage position.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
: 2 : The rack full sensor(S26) turns on when pushing operation starts
3 : The rack pushing prohibition sensor(S21) turns on when pushing operation starts
4 : The unloading prohibition sensor(S27) turns on when pushing operator starts
5 : The pushing sensor(S25) turns off when pushing is completed.
6 : The drawing position sensor(S24) turns off when drawing is completed
7 : The drawing position sensor(S25) turns on when the mechanism moves away from origin
8 : The pulling position sensor(S24) turns on when the mechanism moves away from origin

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-66
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3175 STAT TABLE ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred when the STAT table is moving.
User Action
Please refer to the error codes below :
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The sample probe is at the STAT position and the up / down motor is busy when operation
starts
3 : The sample probe is at the STAT position and the upper position(S36) sensor is off when
operation starts
4 : No rotate
5 : The stop position sensor(S30) turns off after the mechanism has moved to the origin
6 : The origin sensor(S29) turns off when operation is completed
7 : The origin sensor(S29) turns on when the mechanism gets out of the origin
8 : The stop position sensor(S30) turns on when the mechanism gets out of the origin

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-67
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3176 SAMPLE PROBE UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred while the sample probe was moving up or down.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Description
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The sample probe rotating motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The cuvette wheel rotating motor is busy when downward motion starts at the cuvette
position
4 : The rack carrying belt is busy when downward motion starts at the sample aspirate
position
5 : The sample position rack stepper is busy when downward motion starts at the sample
aspirate position
6 : The STAT wheel is busy when downward motion starts at the STAT position
7 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns off when downward motion starts at
the cuvette position
8 : The sample position rack stepping origin sensor(S14) turns off when downward motion
starts at the sample aspirate position
9 : The sample position rack stepping check sensor(S16) turns off when downward motion
starts at the sample aspirate position.
10 : The STAT stop position sensor(S30) turns off when downward motion starts at the STAT
position
11 : The sample position sensor() turns off when downward motion starts at the sample
aspirate position.
12 : The sample probe origin sensor turns off when downward motion starts at the cuvette
position
13 : The sample probe stop position sensor(S35) turns off when downward motion starts at
the sample aspirate, ISE aspirate, cleaning, ISE discharge, or out-of-STAT position
14 : The sample probe upper position sensor(S36) turns off after completion of upward
motion
15 : The sample probe upper position sensor(S36) turns on after completion of downward
motion
16 : The detection sensor(S37) turns on afterd completion of downward motion.
17 : The inside of the STAT is not located at the cup position when downward motion starts
at the STAT position

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-68
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3177 SAMPLE PROBE ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Description
(1) An error occurs while the sample probe is rotating.
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The sample probe up / down motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The sample probe upper position sensor(S36) turns off when operation starts
4 : The sample probe cuvette sensor(S34) turns off when the mechanism has moved to the
cuvette position
5 : The sample probe STAT position sensor(S35) turns off when the mechanism has moved
to the inside of the STAT
6 : The sample probe stop position sensor(S35) turns off when the mechanism has moved to
the sample aspirate, ISE aspirate, cleaning, or ISE discharge position
7 : The sample probe rack position sensor(S33) turns on after the mechanism gets out of the
origin
8 : The sample probe cuvette position sensor(S34) turns on after the mechanism has moved
to the origin
9 : The sample probe stop position sensor turns on after the mechanism has moved to the
origin

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

3178 SAMPLE DISPENSER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Description
(1) An error occurs when the sample dispenser is running.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The sample probe rotating motor is busy when discharging starts
3 : The sample probe upper position sensor(S36) turns on when discharging starts.
4 : The sample dispenser upper position sensor(S38) turns off.
5 : The sample dispenser lower position sensor(39) turns off.
6 : The sample dispenser upper position sensor(S38) turns on
7 : The sample dispenser lower position sensor(S39) turns on

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-69
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3179 SAMPLE PROBE LEVEL DETECTOR ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) During MEASURE or WASH initialization the mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY without
starting operation.
User Action
(1) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs in the sample liquid level sensor(S40).
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The liquid level sensor(S40) turns off on completion of downward motion at the cleaning
position.
2 : The liquid level sensor(S40) turns on completion of upward motion at the cleaning
position
3 : The liquid level latch signal turns on completion of upward motion at the cleaning
position

3180 SAMPLE PROBE INTERNAL WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) The sample probe cleaning valve fails to open for any of the following reasons.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The sample probe rotating motor is busy when opening the valve
2 : The sample probe is rotating or not at the cleaning position when opening the valve
3 : The sample probe upper sensor(S36) turn on when opening the valve.

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-70
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3181 REAGENT PROBE UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the Reagent probe is moving up or down.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The reagent probe rotating motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The cuvette wheel rotating motor is busy when downward motion starts at the cuvette
position
4 : The reagent refrigerator rotating motor is busy when downward motion starts at the
reagent aspirate position
5 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns off when downward motion starts at
the cuvette position
6 : The reagent refrigerator rotation inside stop position sensor(S50) turns off when
downward motion starts at the reagent aspirate position
7 : The reagent refrigerator rotation outside stop position sensor(S49) turns off when
downward motion starts at the reagent aspirate position.
8 : The reagent probe cuvette sensor(S43) turns off when downward motion starts at the
cuvette position
9 : The reagent probe reagent position sensor(S45) turns off when downward motion starts at
the reagent aspirate position
10 : The reagent probe reagent position sensor(S44) turns off when downward motion starts at
the cleaning position/pre-dilution position/DI exchange position..
11 : The reagent probe upper position sensor(S46) turns off after moving up
12 : The reagent probe upper position sensor(S46) turns on after moving down
13 : The clash error sensor(S47) turns on after moving down.

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-71
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3182 REAGENT PROBE ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
Please refer to the error codes below :
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the Reagent probe is rotating.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The up / down motor is busy with the reagent probe at the reagent aspirate position when
operation starts
3 : The reagent probe upper position sensor(S46) turns off when operation starts
4 : The reagent probe cuvette sensor(S43) turns off when after moving to the cuvette
position
5 : The reagent probe reagent position sensor(S45) turns off after moving to the reagent
aspirate position
6 : The reagent probe stop position sensor turns off after moving to the cleaning
position/pre-dilution position/DI exchange position.
7 : The reagent probe cuvette sensor(S43) turns on after getting out of the origin
8 : The probe reagent position sensor(S45) turns on after moving to the origin
9 : The probe stop position sensor turns on after moving to the origin

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-72
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3183 REAGENT REF. ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
Please refer to the error codes below :
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the Reagent tray is rotating.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The up / down motor is busy with the reagent probe at the reagent position when
operation starts
3 : The upper position sensor(S46) turns off with the reagent probe at the reagent position
when operation starts
4 : No rotation
5 : The inside stop sensor(S50) turns off after moving to the stop position
6 : The reagent refrigerator origin position sensor(S48) turns off after moving to the origin
7 : The reagent refrigerator origin sensor(S48) turns on after moving out of the origin
8 : The reagent refrigerator inside stop position(S50) sensor turns on after moving out of the
origin
9 : The reagent refrigerator outside stop position sensor(S49) turns on after moving out of
the origin
10 : The reagent refrigerator outside stop position sensor(S49) turns off after moving to the
stop position.

3184 REAGENT DISPENSER ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
Please refer to the error codes below :
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Description
(1) An error occurs when the reagent dispenser is running.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The sample probe rotating motor is busy when discharging starts
3 : The sample probe upper position sensor(S53) turns on when discharging starts.
4 : The sample dispenser upper position sensor(S53) turns off.
5 : The sample dispenser lower position sensor(S54) turns off.
6 : The sample dispenser upper position sensor(S53) turns on
7 : The sample dispenser lower position sensor(S54) turns on

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-73
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3185 REAGENT PROBE LEVEL DETECTOR ERROR T(aa)


System Status
(1) During MEASURE or WASH starts, the mode changes to WARM-UP or STAND-BY without starting
operation.
User Action
(1) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Any of the following errors occurs in the Reagent liquid level sensor.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The liquid level sensor(S55) turns off on completion of downward motion at the cleaning
position.
2 : The liquid level sensor(S55) turns on completion of upward motion at the cleaning
position
3 : The liquid level latch signal turns on completion of upward motion at the cleaning
position

3187 REAGENT PROBE INTERNAL WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
System Status
(1) The reagent probe cleaning valve fails to open for any of the following reasons.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The reagent probe rotating motor is busy when opening the valve
2 : The reagent probe rotating position is not at the cleaning position(S44) when opening the
valve
3 : The reagent probe upper sensor(S46) turn on when opening the valve.

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-74
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3195 MIX UP/DOWN ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the mixing unit moves up or down.
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The mixbar unit rotating motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The cuvette wheel rotating motor is busy when downward motion starts
4 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns off when downward motion starts
5 : The mixbar unit stop position sensor(S59) turns off when downward motion starts
6 : The mixbar unit upper position sensor(S60) turns off after moving up
7 : The mixbar unit upper position sensor(S60) turns off after moving down

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

3196 MIX ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
Please refer to the error codes below :
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the mixing unit rotates.
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The mixbar unit up/down motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The mixbar unit upper position sensor(S60) turns off when operation starts
4 : The mixbar unit stop position sensor(S59) turns off after moving to the stop
5 : The mixbar unit origin position sensor(S58) turns off after moving to the origin position
6 : The mixbar unit origin position sensor(S58) turns on after getting out of the origin
7 : The mixbar unit stop position sensor(S59) turns on after moving to the origin

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-75
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3197 MIXING ERROR T


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) The agitator is busy after its rotation is completed.
T : Time sequence No.

3201 CUVETTE WASH UNIT ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) Mode shifts to STOP.
Cause
(1) A mechanical error has occurred in the Cuvette Washer.
User Action
(1) Reset the machine following procedures described below.
a). If the alarm occurred during MEASURE, wait until MEASURE is finished.
Then remove racks on the rack transfer belt.
b). Press STOP / STANDBY key.
c). Wait until the mode shifts to WARM UP or STAND BY.
(2) When restarting MEASURE, follow procedures described below.
a). Confirm the last sample using the data log list or the Data Edit menu.
b). Set unmeasured samples into racks or the Stat Rotor.
c). Confirm the start number is correct; set the first sample number as the start S.No. in the Start
Condition menu.
(3) If the alarm recurs contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the cuvette washer is moving.
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The cuvette wheel rotation motor is busy when downward operation starts
3 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns off when downward operation starts
4 : The upper position sensor(S61) turns off after moving to the upper position
5 : The lower position sensor(S62) turns off after moving to the lower position
6 : The upper position sensor(S61) turns on after getting out of the upper position
7 : The lower position sensor(S62) turns on after getting out of the upper position.

bb : Time table No.


cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-76
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3202 CUVETTE WASH DISABLED T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Any of the following will prevent the cleaning valve from opening.
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The cuvette cleaning lower position check sensor(S61) turns off when the discharge
valve opens
bb : Time table No.
cc : Phase No.

3203 CUVETTE WHEEL ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error occurred while the cuvette wheel is rotating.
User Action
Refer to the error codes below :
(1) If the error code is 1 or 7, contact Olympus Technical Support.
(2) If the error code is 8 to 19, execute the DIAG function to check operation of the motors.
Additional Information
(1) An error occurs when the cuvette wheel is rotating.
Error codes (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Motor busy
2 : The cuvette cleaning motor is busy when operation starts
3 : The mixer-bar unit motor is busy when operation starts
4 : The sample probe cuvette position sensor(S34) turn on and the sample agitation unit up /
down motor is busy when operation starts
5 : The reagent probe cuvette position sensor(S43) turn on and the reagent agitation unit up /
down motor is busy when operation starts
6 : The cuvette cleaning upper sensor(S61) turn off when operation starts
7 : The mixer bar unit upper sensor(S60) turn off when operation starts
8 : The sample probe cuvette position sensor turns on and the upper position sensor turns off
when operation starts
9 : The reagent probe cuvette position sensor(S43) turns on and the upper position
sensor(S46) turns off when operation starts
10 : The cuvette wheel fails to rotate
11 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns off on completion of operation
12 : The cuvette wheel origin sensor(S56) turns off after moving to the origin
13 : The cuvette wheel origin sensor(S56) turns on after getting out of the origin
14 : The cuvette wheel stop position sensor(S57) turns on after getting out of the origin
bb : Time table No.
cc : Phase No.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-77
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3204 PHOTOMETER ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) During MEASURE or PHOTOCAL the mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) An error occurred in the photometry unit.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
Error details (Decimal)
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : The photometry unit is busy after completion of photometry
2 : A / D error after completion of photometry

3206 LBF RACK EXIST $T


Under making

3212 STRONG DRAIN TANK FULL


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP (except during DIAG).
Cause
(1) The non-diluted waste liquid tank is full.
User Action
(1) Check for any crimped waste lines. The waste should drain automatically; confirm that the error clears.
(2) If not, check the connection of the non-diluted waste liquid float switch connector.

3213 WEAK DRAIN TANK FULL


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP (except during DIAG).
Cause
(1) The diluted waste liquid tank is full.
User Action
(1) Discharge diluted waste liquid and make sure that the error is cleared.
(2) If not, check connection of the diluted waste liquid float switch connector.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-78
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3214 R1 REAGENT SHORT (aaaaa,bb)


Cause
(1) The R1 reagent for the test listed in the alarm is running low.
If additional bottles of the reagent are on board, the system will switch to them.
User Action
(1) Replenish the reagent.
Additional Information
(1) The R1 reagent quantity is below the programmed alarm level.
aaaaa : Item name
bb : Reagent position

3215 R2 REAGENT SHORT (aaaaa,bb)


Cause
(1) The R2 reagent for the test listed in the alarm is running low.
If additional bottles of the reagent are on board, the system will switch to them.
User Action
(1) Replenish the reagent.
Additional Information
(1) The R2 reagent quantity is below the programmed alarm level.
aaaaa : Item name
bb : Reagent position

3216 R1 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaaaaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) An "R" is printed for the sample that generated the alarm.
The test will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By, replenish the reagent.
(2) If the reagent volume is adequate, call Olympus Technical Support to check the status of the level
sensor at it's aspiration position.
Additional Information
(1) An R1 reagent level error occurs during MEASURE.

aaaaaaaaaa : Sample No.


bbbbb : Item name
cc : Reagent position
dd 1:The level detect sensor(S55) turn off on the completion of downward operation.
2:The effective value is short on the completion of downward operation.
3:The level detect sensor(S55) turn of on the completion of absorbing operation.
4:The level detect signal is latch on the completion of absorbing operation.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-79
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3217 R2 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaaaaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd)


System Status
(1) An "R" is printed for the sample that generated the alarm.
The test will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By, replenish the reagent.
(2) If the reagent volume is adequate, call Olympus Technical Support to check the status of the level
sensor at it's aspiration position.
Additional Information
(1) An R2 reagent level error occurs during MEASURE.

aaaaaaaaaa : Sample No.


bbbbb : Item name
cc : Reagent position
dd 1:The level detect sensor(S55) turn off on the completion of downward operation.
2:The effective value is short on the completion of downward operation.
3:The level detect sensor(S55) turn of on the completion of absorbing operation.
4:The level detect signal is latch on the completion of absorbing operation.

3218 INCUBATION BATH TEMP. ERROR


System Status
(1) The system will not change modes from WARM-UP to STAND-BY.
Cause
(1) The temperature has not equilibrated in the allotted 20 minutes.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-80
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3220 SAMPLE EMPTY LEVEL DETECT (aaaaaa,bb,cc,ddddd-ee)


Cause
(1) The sample level detector has not found any liquid.
System Status
(1) Once this alarm is given, the sample will no longer be aspirated.
User Action
(1) Confirm that adequate sample is present in the sample cup.
If there is adequate sample call Olympus Technical Support to check the status of the level sensor at the
aspiration position.
Additional Information
aaaaaaa : Sample number
bb : Item number (1 to 99)
cc : Error details
1 : The liquid level sensor(S40) turns off when downward motion is completed at the sample
aspirate position
2 : The number of remaining pulses is insufficient when downward motion is completed at
the sample aspirate position
3 : The liquid level sensor(S40) turns off when aspiration is completed at the sample aspirate
position
4 : The inactive liquid level sensor is latched when aspiration is completed at the sample
aspirate position
ddddd : Rack No.
ee : Cup position (1 to 10)

3222 AUTOMATIC REPEAT BELT FEEDER JAM


System Status
(1) The mode changes to STOP.
Cause
(1) A rack hasn't moved from the storage position to the rack unloading position.
User Action
(1) Check the rack feeder belts to determine the location of the rack jam.
(2) Contact Olympus Technical Support.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-81
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3232 AUTOMATIC REPEAT RECEIVER JAM


System Status
(1) Mode is no change.
User action
(1) Reset the machine following procedures described below.
1). If the alarm occurred during MEASURE, wait until MEASURE is finished. Then remove
racks on the rack transfer belt.
2) Press STOP / STANDBY key.
3) Wait until the mode shifts to WARM UP or STAND BY.
(2) When restarting MEASURE, follow procedures described below.
1) Confirm the last sample using the data log list or the Data Edit menu.
2) Set unmeasured samples into racks or the Stat Rotor.
3) In the case of Sequential Requisition, set the first sample number as the start S.No. in the Start
Condition menu.
(3) If this alarm occurs again, contact Technical Support Department
Cause
(1) A rack is not transferred on the belt of the Rack Stocker correctly.
During the Auto Repeat Run, please do NOT remove the rack until the rack is transferred into the Rack
Stocker.

3237 SAMPLE PROBE STUFF SENSOR ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) `Stop aspirating the sample and the mode changes to STOP.
User Action
(1) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The clot sample is detected When aspirating a sample.

aa : 1: Stuff sensor doesn’t turn on


2: Stuff sensor doesn’t turn off

3238 STUFF SAMPLE DETECT (aaaaa,bb,ccccc-dd)


System Status
(1) An "%" is printed for the sample that generated the alarm.
The sample will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By, please check the error detected sample.
Cause
(1) The clot sample is detected When aspirating a sample.

aaaaaa : Sample no.


bb : Item name
ccccc : Rack No.
dd : Cup position (1 to 10)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-82
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3253 DETERGENT A EMPTY


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs while refilling detergent A, the detergent preparation pump stops.
(2) The mode changes to the WARM-UP or STAND-BY mode. The system will not start with this alarm.
(3) The mode changes to the STOP during measure mode.
(4) Detergent A preparation in DIAG is not executed.
Cause
(1) Diluted detergent B is low.
User Action
(1) Refill diluted detergent A and confirm that the ANL status error is reset. If it is not reset, check the
connector of the non-diluted detergent float switch.

3254 DETERGENT B EMPTY


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs while refilling detergent B, the detergent preparation pump stops.
(2) The mode changes to the WARM-UP or STAND-BY mode. The system will not start with this alarm.
(3) The mode changes to the STOP during measure mode.
(4) Detergent B preparation in DIAG is not executed.
Cause
(1) Diluted detergent B is low.
User Action
(1) Refill diluted detergent B and confirm that the ANL status error is reset. If it is not reset, check the
connector of the non-diluted detergent float switch.

3255 ISE COVER OPEN


System Status
(1) Mode changes to STOP
(2) The sample aspirating is stop and Mode changes to STOP during measure.
User Action
(1) Close the ISE cover.
(2) If ISE cover is closed, Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The ISE cover is open when Sample probe is moving to the position of ISE/STAT aspirating position

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-83
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3256 STAT COVER OPEN


System Status
(1) Mode changes to STOP
(2) The sample aspirating is stop and Mode changes to STOP during
User Action
(1) Close the STAT cover.
(2) If STAT cover is closed, Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The STAT cover is open when Sample probe is moving to the position of ISE/STAT aspirating position

3257 STAT SET OVER TIME


System Status
(1) Mode changes to PAUSE
User Action
(1) Restart measure with STAT SET switch.
If END LED is turned on a light, you must remove all of STAT samples
except RB/QC/ACAL samples before restart.
Cause
(1) Measurement for STAT Samples are interrupted by use of STAT SW and then Measurement for all of
the Sample (already aspirated) are finished. .(STAT SET LED turn on a light)
Please Re-start the Measurement for STAT Samples as fast as you can, after interruption of STAT.

3258 AUTO REPEAT RUN RACK DISABLED


System Status
(1) Mode change to PAUSE
User Action
(1) Restart measure.
Cause
(1) Auto repeat run rack is getting the recovering timing during measure-2.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-84
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3259 MIRROR ROTATION ERROR T (aa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) Mode changes to STOP, when initializing
(2) Stop the aspirating a sample and Mode changes to STOP, when measuring.
User Action
(1) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
T : Time sequence No.
aa : Error information
1 : Motor busy
2 : The origin sensor(S9) turns off after moving to the origin position.
3 : The rack position sensor(S10) turns off after moving to the rack position.
4 : The origin sensor(S9) turns on after moving to the sample reading position.
5 : The rack position sensor(S10) turn on after moving to the sample reading position.
bb : Time table No.
cc : Phase No.

3260 R2 REAGENT EMPTY (aaaaa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The test will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By , replenish the reagent.
Cause
(1) Error occurs during MEASURE, when R2 reagent rest volume is 0

aaaaa : Sample number


bb : Item number (1 to 99)
cc : Reagent position (1 to 76)

3261 PRE DILUTION WATER SHORT


System Status
(1) Mode is no change
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By or Pause , replenish the pre-dilution water.
Cause
(1) Pre-dilution water is less than alarm shot volume during measure.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-85
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3262 PRE DILUTION WATER EMPTY LEVEL DETECT (aaaaaa,bb,cc)


System Status
(1) The pre-diluted test will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
aaaaa: Sample number
bb : Item number (1 to 99)
cc : Error details
1 : The liquid level sensor(S55) turns off when downward motion is completed at the sample
aspirate position
2 : The number of remaining pulses is insufficient when downward motion is completed at
the sample aspirate position
3 : The liquid level sensor(S55) turns off when aspiration is completed at the sample aspirate
position
4 : The inactive liquid level sensor is latched when aspiration is completed at the sample
aspirate position

3264 REAGENT TRANSPOSITION DISABLED (aa)


System Status
(1) The test will not be performed on any subsequent samples.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By , replenish the reagent.
Cause
(1) Error occurs during MEASURE, when Reagent volume is not enough for the measure of reagent
blank/calibration.

aa : Item number (1 to 99)

3266 QC SAMPLE PROHIBITED


System Status
(1) STAT QC is not measuring.
User Action
(1) Executing the STAT QC after finishing the measuring RB/ACAL/STAT/QC
Cause
(1) Request to measure STAT QC during the measuring of STAT QC

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-86
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3267 MEAURE RESTART DISABLE


System Status
(1) Mode is no changing
User Action
(1) Start measurement by use of STAT SW.
If END LED is turned on a light, you must remove all of STAT Samples except RB/ACAL/QC samples
before restart.
Cause
(1) Measurement for RB/ACAL/QC samples on STAT table are interrupted by use of STAT SW. (SET
LED is turned on a light)
(2) Measurement for RB/ACAL/QC samples on STAT table occur, during STAT SET status.(SET LED is
turned on a light)

3268 REG. PROBE DETERGENT SHORT T (CLN-a,bb)


Cause
(1) The probe detergent for the test listed in the alarm is running low.
If additional bottles of the reagent are on board, the system will switch to them.
User Action
(1) Replenish the probe detergent.
Additional Information
(1) The R1 reagent quantity is below the programmed alarm level.

aaaaa : Item name


bb : Reagent position

3269 REG. PROBE DETERGENT EMPTY T (CLN-a,bb)


System Status
(1) An "(" is printed for the sample that generated the alarm.
User Action
(1) Once the system returns to Stand-By, replenish the probe detergent.
(2) If the reagent volume is adequate, call Olympus Technical Support to check the status of the level
sensor at it's aspiration position.
Cause
a : 1-3 (Detergent No.)
bb : Reagent position(1 to 76)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-86-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

3275 R1 REAGENT EMPTY T (aaaaa,bb,cc)

System Status

The test will not be performed

User Action

(1) If there are not another filled up reagent bottle, once the system returns to Stand-By,
replenish the reagent bottle.

(2) If the reagent volume is adequate, call Olympus Technical Support.

Cause

R1 reagent rest volume is getting empty in the middle of measuring


the Advanced RB/ACAL/QC samples.

Additional Information

T : Time Sequence No.

aaaaa : Sample number


bb : Item number (1 to 96)
cc : Reagent position(1 to 76)

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-87
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3301 NO ISE
Cause
(1) There has been a complete loss of communications with the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) The ISE power is turned off.
(2) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connector (106) between the ANL control board (MV1019)
and ISE control board (MV2190).

3302 ISE INITIAL ERROR (aa)


Cause
(1) There has been a loss of communications with the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connector (106) between the ANL control board (MV1019)
and ISE control board (MV2190).
(2) Any of the following errors occurs in the ISE :

Error details
aa : bit 0 : The check sum of the IPL block of the ISE FROM is not correct
bit 1 : The check sum of the control block of the ISE FROM is not correct
bit 2 : Data cannot be read or written from / into the ISE RAM
bit 3 : An error occurs in ISE's pulse motor control 1
bit 4 : An error occurs in ISE's pulse motor control 2
bit 6 : The ISE does not get ready
bit 7 : The ISE cannot transmit or receive an ANL message properly in ISE communication
check
(It considers it is not A55A.)

3303 ISE MID STANDARD SHORT


System Status
(1) This is an advisory alarm.
Cause
(1) The Mid-Standard solution in the ISE is low.
User Action
(1) Replenish the ISE Mid Standard supply. If the bottle has sufficient standard, contact Technical Support
Department to check the sensor.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-88
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3304 ISE BUFFER SHORT


System Status
(1) An advisory alarm is given.
Cause
(1) The ISE Buffer is low.
User Action
(1) Replenish the ISE Buffer supply. If there is sufficient buffer, contact Technical Support Department.

3305 ISE REFERENCE SHORT


System Status
(1) An advisory alarm is given.
Cause
(1) The ISE Reference solution is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Replenish the ISE Reference supply. If there is sufficient solution, contact Olympus Technical Support
to check the sensor.

3306 ISE CLEANING SOLUTION SHORT


System Status
(1) The system interrupts the cleaning cycle.
Cause
(1) The cleaning solution in the ISE is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Refill the ISE cleaning solution cup. If it appears sufficient, contact Olympus Technical Support to
check the level sensor at the aspiration position.

3307 ISE STANDARD L SHORT


System Status
(1) The system will stop calibration.
Cause
(1) The external low standard of the ISE is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Refill the Low Standard cup and repeat calibration.
(2) If the error recurs, contact Olympus Technical Support to check the level sensor at the aspiration
position.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-89
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3308 ISE STANDARD H SHORT


System Status
(1) The system will stop calibration.
Cause
(1) The external high standard of the ISE is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Refill the High Standard cup and repeat calibration.
(2) If the error recurs, contact Olympus Technical Support to check the level sensor at the aspiration
position.

3309 ISE SELECTIVITY CHECK (Na) SHORT


System Status
(1) The system will stop calibration.
Cause
(1) The amount of NA Selectivity solution is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Refill the NA Selectivity cup and repeat selectivity check.
(2) If the error recurs, contact Olympus Technical Support to check the level sensor at the aspiration
position.

3310 ISE SELECTIVITY CHECK(K) SHORT


System Status
(1) The system will stop calibration.
Cause
(1) The amount of K Selectivity solution is insufficient.
User Action
(1) Refill the K Selectivity cup and repeat selectivity check.
(2) If the error recurs, contact Olympus Technical Support to check the level sensor at the aspiration
position.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-90
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3311 ISE LOW DATA


System Status
(1) If "Move to stop" is specified in the System Maintenance, the mode changes into the STOP mode.
Cause
(1) The ISE values of three consecutive NA samples are 70 or less.
User Action
(1) If the sample probe is clogged, replace it using the MAINTENANCE function.
If the sample probe is clear, prime the standards, recalibrate the ISE, and check the slope.
(2) If the slopes are out of range, check the thermistor under DIAG.
If the DIAG results fail, replace the thermistor.
If the DIAG results are OK, replace the electrode.

3313 ISE SAMPLE No. ILLEGAL PROCEDURE (aaaa)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) A sample number sent to the ISE is different from a sample number contained in requisition data.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
aaaa : Inquired sample number (2-byte BCD)

3314 ANL <- ISE COM. ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ANL receives a message from the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connectors (106) of the ANL control board (MV1019) and ISE
control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number

Error details
bb : bit 0 : Message length error
bit 1 : Communication is not completed within time from STX to BCC
bit 2 : BCC error
bit 3 : No ETX
bit 4 : Framing error
bit 5 : Over-run error
bit 6 : Undefined message
bit 7 : Message overwriting

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-91
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3315 ANL <- ISE TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) The ANL cannot receive a message from the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connectors (106) of the ANL control board (MV1019) and ISE
control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number
bb : Detail of operation command ("0" if non-received message is not an operation response.)

3316 ANL -> ISE COM. RECEPTION ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ANL transmits a message to the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connectors (106) of the ANL control board (MV1019) and ISE
control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number

Error details
bb : bit 0 : An ENQ response is not received in time
bit 2 : A transmission response is not received in time
bit 4 : One character is not transmitted in time

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-92
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3351 ISE <- ANL COM. ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurs when the ISE receives a message from the ANL.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connectors (106) of the ANL control board (MV1019) and ISE
control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number

Error details
bb : bit 0 : Message length error
bit 1 : Communication is not completed within time from STX to BCC
bit 2 : BCC error
bit 3 : No ETX
bit 4 : Framing error
bit 5 : Over-run error
bit 6 : Undefined message
bit 7 : Message overwriting

3352 ISE <- ANL TEXT NOT RECEIVED (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) The ISE cannot receive a message from the ANL.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connection of the connectors (106) of the ANL control board
(MV1019) and ISE control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number
bb : Details of operation command ("0" if non-received message is not an operation response.)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-93
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3353 ISE SEQUENCE ERROR T


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) The ISE receives sample data before the processing of the previous sample is completed.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connection of connectors (106) of the ANL control board
(MV1019) and ISE control board (MV2190).
T : Time sequence No.

3354 ISE SYNC SIGNAL ERROR T (aa,bb,cc,dd,ee,ff,gg)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) The interval of the ISE synchronization signal is less than 18 seconds.

Error details
aa : ISE command 1
bb : ISE command 2

3355 ISE A/D ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) IE stops.
Cause
(1) ISE analog to digital conversion error.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
Error details
aa : 1 : EOC is not completed in time
2 : Error in transmission from A / D to CPU

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-94
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3356 ISE TEMP. ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1)The ISE stops.
Cause
(1). An error occurred with the thermistor of the ISE.
User Action
(1). Replace the thermistor.
Additional Information
Error details
aa : 1 : The thermistor wire is broken
2 : The temperature is above or below the allowable range

3357 ISE BUFFER DISPENSER ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) An error occurred in the ISE buffer pump.
Additional Information
(1) If error detail data is 1, replace the ISE control board (MV2190).
(2) If it is 3 to 8, refer to the LED on the MV2190 to check the sensor.

Error details
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : OPMC busy
2 : Motor busy
3 : The upper position sensor turns on after discharging
4 : The lower position sensor turns off after aspiration
5 : The upper position sensor turns off after moving to the upper position
6 : The lower position sensor turns on after moving to the upper position
7 : The upper position sensor turns on after getting out of the upper position
8 : The lower position sensor position turns off after moving to the lower position

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-95
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

3358 ISE MID STANDARD PUMP ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurred in the ISE internal mid-standard pump.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) If error detail data is 1, replace the ISE control board (MV2190).

Error details
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : OPMC busy
2 : Motor busy

3359 ISE SAMPLE ASPIRATION PUMP ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error has occurred in the ISE sample aspirate pump.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) If error detail data is 1, replace the ISE control board (MV2190).

T : Time sequence No.


aa : 1 : OPMC busy
2 : Motor busy

3360 ISE SAMPLE MIXER ERROR T (aa)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1). An error occurred in the ISE sample agitation motor.
User Action
(1). Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1). If error detail data is 1, replace the ISE control board (MV2190).

T : Time sequence No.


aa : 1 : OPMC busy
2 : Motor busy

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-96
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

3361 ISE D-POT OVERFLOW


SENSOR ERROR T (aa)
System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) Liquid overflows the ISE dilution pot.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the overflow sensor using the ISE DIAG function.
Refer to LED DS6 on the ISE control board (MV2190) to check the sensor condition.

Error details
T : Time sequence No.
aa : 1 : Overflow
2 : The overflow sensor turns off on checking

3362 ISE -> ANL COM. RECEPTION ERROR (aa,bb)


System Status
(1) The ISE stops.
Cause
(1) An error occurred while the ANL was receiving a message from the ISE.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Additional Information
(1) Check the source voltage of the ISE and connection of the connector (106) of the ANL control board
(MV1019) and ISE control board (MV2190).

aa : Message number

Error details
bb : bit 2 : A communication response was not received in time

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-96-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4001 NO SAMPLE CUP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). No sample cup has been detected for the sample ordered.

User Action

(1). Verify the test assays selected on the test requisition menu.

Cause

(1). No sample cup is detected though there is a test requsition ordered for the sample

generating the alarm.

aaaaa : Sample No.


bbbbb : Rack number
cc : Cup position (1 to 10)
ddddddddd: Sample ID

4002 SAMPLE NOP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). Default panel is requested for the sample generating the alarm.

User Action

(1). Verify that test items have been selected for the sample.

Cause

(1). No tests have been requisitioned for the sample.


aaaaa : Sample number
bbbbb : Rack number
cc : Cup position 1-10
ddddddddd: Sample ID

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-97
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4003 SAMPLE ID NOT FOUND (aaaaa,bbbbb,cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). Preset default panel of tests is requested for the sample generating the alarm.

Cause

(1). Unable to locate requisition for the sample id detected.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position or STAT position
ddddddddd: Sample ID

4004 REPEAT SAMPLE ID NOT FOUND (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) No MEASURE is carried out.
Cause
(1) There are no test requisitioned for the repeat sample id detected.

aaaaa : Sample No.


bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position or STAT position

4005 REPEAT SAMPLE NOP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) No MEASURE is carried out.
Cause
(1) There are no tests requisitioned for the repeat sample.

aaaaa : Sample No.


bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position or STAT position

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-98
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4006 ILLEGAL SAMPLE ID (aaaaa-bbbbb)


System Status
(1) When the alarm is generated, communication between the analyzer and DPR is discontinued and the
system moves to the STOP mode.
User Action
(1) Contact Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1). Sample No. requested by the analyzer does not match the sample No. sent by the DPR.

Error detail
aaaaa : Requested sample No. from ANL
bbbbb : Responded sample No. from DPR

4008 BROKEN LABEL (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) The sample with the same bar code is not measured.
Cause
(1) The same bar code is read for two consecutive sample cups.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position or STAT position

4009 REPEAT BROKEN LABEL (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) The repeat sample with the same bar code is not measured.
Cause
(1) The same bar code is read for two consecutive repeat sample cups.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position or STAT position

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-99
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4010 SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) Default panel test items are selected for the sample.
User Action
(1) Verify proper placement of label on tube.
(2) Verify label type and condition.
Cause
(1) The sample bar code label cannot be read.

Error detail
aaaaa : space
bbbbb : Rack No. or STAT table No.
cc : Cup position (1 to 10) or STAT position

4011 REPEAT SAMPLE ID READ ERROR (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)


System Status
(1) The sample that generates the alarm is not measured.
Cause
(1) Rerun sample ID could not be read.
(2) The display of [ ] and its meaning as follows.

aaaaa : Space
bbbbb : Rack No. or Stat table No.
cc : Cup position or stat position

4012 MEASURE COMPLETED FOR THE READ SAMPLE ID (aaaaa-bbbbb-


cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). An advisory alarm is given.


(2). The sample is measured again.

Cause

(1). Sample ID read has already been run.


(2). The display of [ ] and its meaning as follows.
aaaaa : Space
bbbbb : Rack No. or Stat table No.
cc : Cup position or stat position
ddddddddd: Sample ID

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-100
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4013 CALIBRATION FACTOR RANGE OVER (aaaaa) c


System Status
(1). The calibration curve is not updated.
User Action
(1) Verify calibration factor range.
(2) Verify proper calibrator position and reagent position.
(3) Verify the integrity of the calibrator material.
Cause
(1) The factor found for drawing a calibration curve in type AB calibration is over the set range.

Error detail
aaaaa : Item name
c : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)

4014 CALIBRATION FACTOR RANGE UNDER (aaaaa) c


System Status
(1) The calibration curve is not updated.
User Action
(1) Verify the calibration factor range parameters.
(2) Verify the position of the calibrator and reagent.
(3) Verify the calibrator integrity.
Cause
(1) The factor found for drawing a calibration curve in type AB calibration is below the set range.

Error detail
aaaaa : Item name
b : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)

4015 CALIBRATION OD RANGE OVER (aaaaa) b,c


System Status
(1) The calibration curve is not updated.
User Action
(1) Verify calibrator parameters.
(2) Verify the position of the calibrator and reagents.
(3) Verify the integrity of the calibrator.
Description
(1) The factor found for drawing a calibration curve in multi-point calibration is over the set range.

Error detail
aaaaa : Item name
b : calibration point (1 to 7)
c : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-101
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4016 CALIBRATION OD RANGE UNDER (aaaaa) b c


System Status
(1) The calibration curve is not updated.
User Action
(1) Verify calibration parameters.
(2) Verify calibrator and reagent positions.
(3) Verify calibrator integrity.
Cause
(1) The factor found for drawing a calibration curve in multi-point calibration is under the set range.

Error detail
aaaaa : Item name
b : calibration point (1 to 7)
c : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)

4017 CALIBRATION ERROR (aaaaa) c


System Status
(1) The calibration curve is not updated.
User Action
(1) Verify the calibrator and reagent positions.
(2) Verify the integrity of the calibrator.
Cause
(1) The calibration curve in multi-point calibration cannot be drawn.

Error detail
aaaaa : Item name

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-101-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4018 QC DATA RANGE OVER (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). An error flag is added to the printout data.

User Action

(1). Verify the QC range parameters.


(2). Verify the positioning of the QC material.
(3). Verify the integrity of the QC material.

Cause

(1). QC data is over the set range.

Error detail

aaaaa : Sample No.


bb : QC control No. (1 to 60)
ccccc : Item name
d : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)
eeeeeeeee : Control ID

4019 QC DATA RANGE UNDER (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). An error flag is added to the printout data.

User Action

(1). Verify the QC range parameters.


(2). Verify the positioning of the QC material.
(3). Verify the integrity of the QC material.

Cause

(1). QC data is below the set range.


Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bb : QC control No. (1 to 60)
ccccc : Item name
d : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)
eeeeeeeee : Control ID
es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-102
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4020 QC DATA CHECK ERROR (aaaaa,bb,ccccc,d) eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). An error flag is added to the printout data.

User Action

(1). Verify QC parameters.


(2). Verify the integrity of the QC material.

Cause

(1). The QC data causes QC multi-check error.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bb : QC control No. (1 to 60)
ccccc : Item name
d : Sample type (serum: space urine:U other:X)
eeeeeeeee : Control ID

4021 PANIC VALUE (aaaaa,bbbbb,cc,dd) eeeeeeeee

System Status

(1). An error flag is added to the printout data.

Description

(1). The data is over or below the set panic range.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack ID or Stat No.
cc : Cup position (1 to 10 ) 1 to 22 for stat sample
dd : Item name
eeeeeeeee : Sample ID

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-103
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4023 PHOTCAL DATA ERROR


System Status
(1) A system status alarm is generated.
(2) Samples are measured but data maybe questionable.
User Action
(1) Perform photocal and recheck cuvette status.
(2) Clean / Replace cuvettes that do no pass photocal.
If a large number of cuvettes fail, check for flooding of the cuvette wheel.
Cause
(1) Some cuvettes did not pass the photocal.

4024 REAGENT REF. TEMPERATURE LOW


System Status
(1) A system status alarm is generated.
(2) Samples can be measured but the data is questionable.
User Action
(1) Perform end process and re-boot the system.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) The temperature of the reagent refrigerator is below the specified temperature.

4025 REAGENT REF. TEMPERATURE HIGH


System Status
(1) A system status alarm is generated.
(2) Samples can be measured but the data is questionable.
User Action
(1) Perform end process and re-start the system.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) The temperature of the reagent refrigerator is over the specified temperature.

4026 INCUBATION BATH TEMPERATURE HIGH


System Status
(1) A system status alarm is generated.
(2) Samples can be measured but the data is questionable.
User Action
(1) Perform the end process and re-start the system.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) The temperature of the incubation bath is over the specified temperature.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-104
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4027 INCUBATION BATH TEMPERATURE LOW


System Status
(1) A system status alarm is generated.
(2) Samples can be measured but the data is questionable.
User Action
(1) Perform end process and re-start the system.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) The temperature of the incubation bath is below the specified temperature.

4028 STAT SAMPLE MEASURE START CANCELED


System Status
(1) The STAT sample cannot be measured.
User Action
(1) Verify the stat sample requested.
Cause
(1) The STAT module transmits a negative message in response to a request sent by the analyzer.

4029 DPR <-> ANL COM. START TIMEOUT


System Status
(1) The communication to the analyzer is discontinued.
The system changes to the STOP mode.
User Action
(1) Verify proper placement of communication cables.
(2) Perform end process and re-start the system.
(3) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) Analyzer does not respond to DPR in the allotted time frame when starting communication with the
analyzer.

4030 DPR <-> ANL COM. TIMEOUT (aa)


System Status
(1) System status depends on the condition.
User Action
(1) Verify proper placement of the communication cables.
(2) Perform the end process and re-start the system.
(3) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) Analyzer does not respond in the specified time frame upon start of communication.
aa : Number of a message to be transmitted

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-105
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4031 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (aaaaa,b,c,d,e)


System Status
(1) Cannot start operation.
User Action
(1) Review the parameter menu generating the alarm.
(2) Correct the parameter generating the alarm.
(3) If the alarm is generated but parameters are correct, contact Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) There is an improper entry in the parameter specified.
(2) The display in ( ) and its meaning is as follows.

aaaaa : Parameter menu having improper entry


b, c, d, e : Error Information

4035 NO SAMPLE REQUISITION (aaaaa)


System Status
(1) System moves to the next sample.
Cause
(1) No tests have been requested for the sample generating the alarm.
(2) The display in the ( ) and its meaning is as follows.

aaaaa : Sample No. having this error

4036 DATA WRITE DISABLED (aaaaa)


System Status
(1) Data is not automatically rewritten.
Cause
(1) Before rewriting the data of a sample, the analyzer sends the information to the DPR to be saved and
reviewed without deleting the existing data.
(2) The display in the ( ) and its meaning is as follows.

aaaaa : Sample No. having this error

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-106
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4040 SAMPLE BLANK CORRECTION WITHOUT COLOR DATA (aaaaa-


bbbbb-cc ddddd eeeee) fffffffff

System Status

(1). The result of sample blank test is not output.

Cause

(1). The color test was not analyzed.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No.
cc : Cup position
ddddd : Color Test Name
eeeee : Blank Test Name
fffffffff : Sample ID

4041 SAMPLE BLANK CORRECTION WITHOUT BLANK DATA (aaaaa-


bbbbb-cc ddddd eeeee)
System Status
(1) The result of sample blank test is not output.
Cause
(1) The blank test was not analyzed.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No.
cc : Cup position
ddddd : Color Test Name
eeeee : Blank Test Name

4042 STAT SAMPLE MEASURE START ERROR


System Status
(1) There were some errors when you performed measure start with STAT switch. And the errors was
displayed in error list of Start Window.
User Action
(1) Check the errors which is displayed in Start Window.
(2) Eliminate the errors as the need.
Cause
(1) There were some errors when you performed measure start with STAT switch.

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-107
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4051 REPEAT SAMPLE NO


CUP (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc)
System Status
(1). The analyzer sends a NOP error and continues MEASURE mode.
Cause
(1). In the automatic repeat run mode, there are no sample cups detected even though the rack number and
cup position indicate that a sample cup should be present for repeat analysis.

Error detail
aaaaa : Original Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No.
cc : Cup position

4052 ILLEGAL REPEAT SAMPLE ID (aaaaa)


System Status
(1) The analyzer sends a NOP alarm and continues MEASURE mode.
Cause
(1) In automatic repeat run mode, the bar code ID read for the repeat sample does not match an ID
contained in the sample IDs calculated from the sample type, rack number and cup position assigned
by the ANL.

Error detail
aaaaa : Repeat run sample ID

4053 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SAMPLE (aa) bbbbbbbbb

System Status

(1). The system moves to the Measure 2 mode.

User Action

(1). Change the index.

Cause

(1). The number of samples reaches the maximum in the M1 mode, or the sample number
reaches the upper limit.

Error detail
aaaaa : S.No. having reached the upper limit
bbbbbbbbb: Sample ID

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-107-1
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0600 0400

4055 Can't calculate Sample


No. of this Rack No. (aaaaa-bb)
System Status

(1). The system moves to the Measure 2 mode.

User Action

(1). Confirm the rack ID and Rack No. Limit in [Parameter][System][ System] menu. If you
find that sample No. can not calculate because of wrong rack ID or wrong Rack No.
Limit, correct them.

Cause

(1). In the case of Rack ID analysis, sample No. can not be calculated based on Rack No.

Error detail
aaaaa : Rack No.
bb : Cup position (1 to 10)

4057 NO TESTS REQUISITIONED (aaaaa-bbbbb-cc) ddddddddd

System Status

(1). System moves to the next sample without analyzing the sample.

User Action

(1). After requesting tests or confirm tests being requisitioned in HOST, re-run the sample
according to the necessity.
(2). In the case of Sequential Requisition, set the start S.No. in the Start Condition menu for
the system to process the sample as the correct S.No.

Cause

(1). There are no tests requisitioned for the sample generating the alarm even after receiving
the test requisition information text using online or being requested according to default
panel.

Error detail
aaaaa : Sample No.
bbbbb : Rack No.
cc : Cup position
ddddddddd: Sample ID

es24-86-1.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-108
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4101 NO STAT CUP (CALIBRATION NO. aa bb)


System Status
(1) STAT check is going to OK
(2) If measure start, the STAT calibration of the displayed calibrator No. is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check the calibrator sample cups on STAT table whether the parameter of STAT calibration is same.
(2) If not needed this calibration, don’t care.
(3) If the calibrator setting is correct, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Not enough STAT Calibrator on STAT table.

Error detail
aa : Calibrator No. (1-80)
bb : Position No. of STAT table (1-22)
Cup position is displayed in checking whether there are the cups in measure start with STAT
switch in Calibrator Barcode Operation.

4102 NO STAT CUP (CONTROL NO. aa bb)


System Status
(1) STAT check is going to OK
(2) If measure start, the STAT QC of the displayed QC No. is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check the QC sample cups on STAT table whether the parameter of STAT QC is same..
(2) If not needed this QC, don’t care.
(3) If the calibrator setting is correct, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Not enough STAT QC on STAT table, when operation the STAT check operations

Error detail
aa : QC No. (1-60)
bb : Position No. of STAT table (1-22)
Cup position is displayed in checking whether there are the cups in measure start with STAT
switch in Barcode QC Operation.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-109
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4103 STAT CAL/QC DUPLICATE ID (aaaaa) bb


System Status
(1) STAT check is going to OK
(2) If measure start, the STAT CAL/QC of the displayed CAL/QC bar-code is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check the bar-code label of CAL/QC sample cups on STAT table whether the parameters of STAT
CAL/QC is same.
(2) If not needed this CAL/QC, don’t care.
(3) If the calibrator setting is correct, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) There are same bar-code of STAT CAL/QC on STAT table, when operation the STAT check
operations
Error detail
aaaaa : ID. (max. 20)
bb : Position No. of STAT table (1-22)

4104 STAT CAL/QC ID READ ERROR (aa)


System Status
(1) STAT check is going to OK
(2) If measure start, the STAT CAL/QC of the displayed position of CAL/QC samples is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check the bar-code label of CAL/QC sample cups on STAT table.
(2) If not needed this CAL/QC, don’t care.
(3) If the calibrator setting is correct, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Bar-code reading error occurs according STAT CAL/QC on STAT table, when operation the STAT
check operations
Error detail
aa : Position No. of STAT table (1-22)

4105 NO STAT CUP (RB)


System Status
(1) STAT check is going to OK
(2) If measure start, the STAT RB/calibration is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check whether the RB sample cup exists in the correct position on STAT table.
(2) If not need RB, don’t care.
(3) If the RB setting is correct, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) Not exists RB on STAT table.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-110
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

4106 INVALID STAT CUP (CALIBRATION NO. aa)


System Status
(1) If measure start, the STAT calibration of the displayed calibrator No. is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check whether the calibrator sample cups existed on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in
STAT Status menu.
(2) If not need this calibration, don’t care.
(3) If the calibrator setting is correct and the calibrator sample cups existed on STAT table when you
performed STAT Check in STAT Status menu, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The calibrator sample cups did not exist on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in STAT
Status menu. But you request to measure the calibrator sample cups on STAT table now. (Auto/Manual
ACAL)
Error detail
aa : Calibrator No. (1-80)

4107 INVALID STAT CUP (CONTROL NO. aa)


System Status
(1) If measure start, the STAT QC of the displayed QC No. is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check whether the QC sample cups existed on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in STAT
Status menu.
(2) If not need this QC, don’t care.
(3) If the QC setting is correct and the QC sample cups existed on STAT table when you performed STAT
Check in STAT Status menu, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The QC sample cups did not exist on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in STAT Status
menu. But you request to measure the QC sample cups on STAT table now. (Auto/Manual QC)
Error detail
aa : QC No. (1-60)

4108 INVALID STAT CUP (RB)


System Status
(1) If measure start, the STAT RB/calibration is not performed.
User Action
(1) Check whether the RB sample cup existed on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in STAT
Status menu.
(2) If not need RB, don’t care.
(3) If the RB setting is correct and the RB sample cup existed on STAT table when you performed STAT
Check in STAT Status menu, contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) The RB sample cup did not exist on STAT table when you performed STAT Check in STAT Status
menu. But you request to measure the RB sample cups on STAT table now. (Auto/Manual ACAL)

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-111
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9001 LOGIN [aa]

9002 LOGOUT [aa]

9003 TEMPORARY LOGIN [aa]

9004 MENU [aa]

9005 MENU [aa] EXIT

9141 Hard Copy Error


System Status
(1) Printing stops.
User Action
(1) Perform the following :
1) Confirm the status of the printer.
a) Verify that there is adequate paper.
b). Verify that the printer Online LED is on.
2) Restart printing.
(2) If the alarm re-occurs, conduct the following :
1) Re-boot the printer. Wait at least two seconds before powering on.
2) Restart printing.
(3) If the alarm re-occurs contact Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) Error occurs during printing due to one of the following :
1) No paper.
2) The printer Online LED is not on.
3) Other mechanical trouble.

9143 PRINTER BUSY


System Status
(1) Printing stops.
Cause
(1) When requesting a print job, the printer is in use.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-112
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9173 SECONDARY PRINTER BUSY


Operation
(1) The print job requested will not be printed.
(2) Unable to use the standard printer.
User Action
(1) Re-start the print job after printer finishes printing.
(2) Verify that the printer is turned on and set correctly.
(3) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) The printer was in use when the additional print job was requested.

9174 PRINTOUT ERROR


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs during real-time data log printing, the following events can occur :
1) After error occurs, next data is not printed out.
2) In such a case, the data after the alarm are saved on the hard drive and can be reprinted once
corrective action has been taken.
(2) If the alarm occurs while printing in batch mode on print screen mode, the print job will be terminated.
User Action
(1) Verify that printer is set up correctly.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) When printing on the standard printer, the error can occurs due to the following :
1) No paper.
2) Other mechanical problems.

9176 SECONDARY PRINTER PRINTOUT ERROR


System Status
(1) If the alarm occurs during real-time data log printing, the following can occur :
1) After error occurs, next data is not printed.
2) In such a case, the data is saved on the hard drive and can be reprinted after corrective action
has been taken.
(2) If the error occurs during batch printing or using the print screen function, the print job will be
terminated.
User Action
(1) Verify that the printer is set up correctly.
(2) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) When printing on the option printer, error occurs due to the following :
1) No paper.
2) The option printer is not on-line.
3) The option printer is off.
4) The option printer is not connected to the computer properly.
5) Other mechanical problems.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-113
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9231 PASSWORD ERROR [aa]

9232 NEW PASSWORD IS NOT IDENTICAL WITH CONFIRMATION


PASSWORD

9241 PRINTER BUSY


System Status
(1) The print job requested will be terminated.
(2) Unable to perform print jobs that use the optional printer.
User Action
(1) Verify that the printer is set up correctly.
(2) Re-start the print job after the printer finishes printing.
(3) Call Olympus Technical Support.
Cause
(1) An additional print job was requested while the printer was in use.

9291 Database Inf [aa]

9292 Database Error [aa]

9401 Access is denied


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-114
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9402 This account is currently disabled and cannot be logged on to


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9403 The user's account has expired


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9404 Some user account restriction has prevented successful


authentication
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9405 Attempt to create file that already exists


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-115
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9406 The system is currently running with the last-known-good


configuration
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9407 The storage control blocks were destroyed


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9408 The specified user name is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9409 The configuration registry database is damaged


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-116
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9410 The configuration registry key is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9411 The requested resource is in use


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9412 Cannot complete function for some reason


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9413 The directory or file cannot be created


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-117
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9414 The configuration registry key cannot be opened


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9415 The configuration registry key cannot be read


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9416 The configuration registry key cannot be written


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9417 An attempt was made to create a stable subkey under a volatile


parent key
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-118
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9418 Data error


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9419 The database specified does not exist


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9420 The directory is not empty


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9421 The directory name is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-119
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9422 The disk structure is damaged and nonreadable


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9423 There is not enough space on the disk


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9424 While accessing the hard disk, a disk operation failed


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9425 While accessing the hard disk, a recalibrate operation failed


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-120
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9426 A hard disk controller reset was needed, but even that failed
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9427 An extended error has occurred


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9428 The file or directory is damaged and nonreadable


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9429 The system cannot find the file specified


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-121
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9430 The file name or extension is too long


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9431 The disk is full


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9432 Reached End Of File


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9433 This operation cannot be completed due to on-disk data


structure corruption
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-122
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9434 The system cannot find the specified drive


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9435 The flag passed is incorrect


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9436 The flags are invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9437 The user account has time restrictions and cannot be logged
onto at now
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-123
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9438 The parameter is incorrect


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9439 The specified network password is incorrect


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9440 The format of the specified password is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9441 The printer command is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-124
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9442 The printer name is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9443 The user account is restricted and cannot be used to log on


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9444 The attempted logon is invalid


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9445 The global filename characters * or ? are entered incorrectly


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-125
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9446 An attempt was made to move the file pointer before the
beginning of the file
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9447 System could not allocate required space in a registry log


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9448 The drive is not ready


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9449 The system cannot open the specified device or file


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-126
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9450 The I/O operation was aborted due to either thread exit or
application request
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9451 The printer is out of paper


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9452 File waiting to be printed was deleted


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9453 The printer queue is full


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-127
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9454 The registry is damaged


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9455 The registry initiated an I/O operation that had an unrecoverable


failure
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9456 The drive cannot locate a specific area on the disk


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9457 The file pointer cannot be set on the specified device or file
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-128
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9458 Insert the disk for drive 1


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9459 The credentials supplied conflict with an existing set of


credentials
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9460 The process cannot access the file because it is being used by
another
System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-129
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9461 The system cannot open the file


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9462 The disk media is not recognized. It may not be formatted


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9463 The media is write protected


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9471 File genric Error [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-130
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9472 File not found [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9473 Bad pathname [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9474 Too many open files [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9475 File access denied [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-131
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9476 Invalid File handle [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9477 Can't remove current directory [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9478 Full directory [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9479 Bad seek pointer [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-132
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9480 File Hardware I/O Error [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9481 File sharing violation [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9482 File lock violation [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

9483 File disk full [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
24-133
Chapter 24 Alarm list 0400

9484 File end of file [%s]


System Status
(1) Proceed to the next process or Unknown.
User Action
(1) Verify that the data is correct.
(2) Contact Technical Support Department.
Cause
(1) When running programs in the data processing unit, error occurs due to the hardware or software of the
computer.

es24_01.doc
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-1
Chapter 26 Maintenance diagnosis (User Maintenance)

n User Maintenance type


• User maintenance for chemical analyzer is as follows. The following action is used.
• Information about each action is given starting on the next page.

Maintenance items Action / Check contents Selection action


Check how to discharge the water Discharge inner wash water Wash line prime
of the S/R probe
S/ R probe replacement Waste water in the probe Probe and syringe replacement
Full water in probe/ Initial wash Wash line prime
S/ R probe wash Waste water in the tube Probe and syringe replacement
Full water in the tube Wash line prime
S/ R dispense syringe Waste water in the syringe Probe and syringe replacement
replacement Full water in syringe / initial wash Wash line prime
Wash S/ R probe wash pot Probe movement Wash pot cleaning
Clean inside of wash pot (Clogging Wash line prime
check)
Mix rod replacement Initial wash for mix rod Mix rod replacement
Wash mix rod wash pot Reagent probe movement Wash pot cleaning
Clean wash pot inside (Clogging Wash line prime
check)
Wash nozzle replacement Waste water of wash nozzle tube Wash nozzle replacement
Joint replacement Full water in wash nozzle tube Wash line prime
Tube replacement
DI water filter cleaning Air extraction from the tube (full Wash line prime
replacement water)
DI water tank cleaning Air extraction from the tube (full Wash line prime
water)
Sample inner wash filter cleaning Air extraction from the tube (full Wash line prime
replacement water)
Cuvette (wheel ) cleaning Air extraction from the tube (full Wash line prime
replacement water)
Detergent tube replacement Waste water in wash tube Detergent tube replacement
Filling detergent water in the Detergent tube replacement
detergent tube

* Activation method
Select using the DPR menu and start the operation with the DIAG switch.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-2

n Replacing of probe syringe


1. Abstract
This action is selected individually for sample dispense & reagent dispense.
2. Action contents
1) Sample dispense (S)
1. Sample line is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t done.
2. S probe & syringe are replaced. (As for the action, refer to the timechart.)
Syringe action pulse numbers are set by action information file.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results.

2) Reagent dispense (R)


1. R probe transfer is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
2. R dispense motor is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
3. R probe & syringe is replaced. (As for the action, refer to the timechart.)
Syringe action pulse numbers are set by action information file.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-3
Chapter 26 Maintenance diagnosis (User Maintenance)

Probe & Syringe replacing 8)SR outer wash valve (V10) & DI water pump (P10) &
Degasser (P3) Degassed supply pump(P11) is turned OFF.
< Explanations of action >
1)Power ON of DI water pump (P1) & degasser (P3) 1)DI water pump (P1) & Degasser (P3) is turned ON.
2)Turn ON inner wash back valve (V9). 2)Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned ON.
3)Turn ON degassed supply pump (P11). 3)Degassed supply pump (P11) is turned ON.
4)Turn OFF inner wash back valve (V9). 4)Inner wash back valve (V9) is turned OFF.
5)If the non-concentrated waste water isn’t full (when 5)If the non-concentrated waste water isn’t full (when
option exists), SR outer wash valve (V10) is turned ON. option exist), SR outer wash valve is turned ON. In the
I case non-concentrated waste water is full, error results.
6)If the non-concentrated waste water isn’t full (when 6)If the weak waste water isn’t full (when option exist), R
option exists), S inner wash valve (V5) is turned ON. In inner wash valve (V6) is turned ON. In the case non-
the case non-concentrated waste water is full, error concentrated waste water is full, it becomes error.
results. 7)R inner wash valve (V6) is turned OFF.
7)S inner wash valve (V5) is turned OFF. 8)SR outer wash valve (V10) & DI water pump (P1) &
Degasser (P3) & Degassed supply pump (P11) is turned
OFF.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-4

Probe & Syringe replacing 10) SR outer wash valve (V10) & DI water pump (P10) &
Degasser (P3) Degassed supply pump(P11) is turned OFF.
11)If the upper sensor (S53) is OFF and lower point sensor (S54)
< The explanation for action >
is OFF, R dispense motor (M17) is moved for specified amount
1) Power ON of DI water pump (P1) & degasser (P3) at high speed for discharge. If the upper point sensor or
2) Turn ON inner wash back valve (V9). lower point sensor is ON, error results.
3) Turn ON degassed supply pump (P11). 12)Check the action end of R dispense motor (M17).
4) Turn OFF inner wash back valve (V9). If the mode is BUSY, error results.
5) If the non-concentrated waste water isn’t full (when option If the upper point sensor or lower point sensor
exist), SR outer wash valve (V10) is turned ON. is ON, error results.
6) If the upper sensor (S53) is OFF and lower point sensor (S54) is
OFF, R dispense motor (M17) is moved for specified amount for
high speed aspiration. If the upper point sensor or lower
point sensor is ON, error results.
7) If the non-concentrated waste water isn’t full (when option
exists), R inner wash valve (V6) is turned ON. In the
case non-concentrated waste water is full, error results
8) Check the action end of R dispense motor (M17).
If the mode is BUSY, error results.
If the upper point sensor or lower point sensor
is ON, error results.
9) R inner wash valve (V6) is turned OFF.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-5
Chapter 26 Maintenance diagnosis (User Maintenance)

n Mix rod replacing


1. Contents
1. Mix line is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
2. If the curette position is unstable, photometry line is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
3. “ Preparation / End action / Mix rod wash ” of detergent wash is performed.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.

n Washing for wash pot


1. Contents
This action moves the each probe to stand by position when the wash pot of sample probe & reagent probe is
cleaned for maintenance.

1. S probe transfer is initialized.


If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
R probe transfer is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
Let the above actions be performed simultaneously.

2. If the S probe rotation motor (M10) is in the wash position, the probe is moved left to the cuvette aspiration
position.
If the motor is in the cuvette aspiration position, the probe is moved right to the wash position.
In the case the action doesn’t end within 4 seconds, error results (when the corresponded sensor is OFF).

If the R rotation motor (M14) is in the wash position, the probe is moved right to the cuvette position.
If the motor is in the cuvette position, the probe is moved left to the wash position.
In the case the action doesn’t end within 4 seconds, error results (when the corresponded sensor is OFF).

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-6
Chapter 26 Maintenance diagnosis (User Maintenance)

n Wash nozzle
1. Contents
1) Photometry line is initialized.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
* If this action is selected continuously and ended normally, this action isn’t performed.
2) Negative pressure setting action is performed.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and shifts to No.5.
3) If the cuvette position 80 isn’t empty, low speed aspiration action is performed.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and shifts to No.5.
4) Wash action for one cuvette by detergent A or B or water is performed.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and shifts to No.5.
5) Negative pressure cancel action is performed.

(* Cuvette wheel stays in stopped condition.)

n Wash line prime


1. Contents
1) Probe & syringe (sample dispensing) is replaced.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
2) Probe & syringe (reagent dispensing) is replaced.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
3) Mix rod is replacing.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results and the following action isn’t performed.
4) Wash nozzle is replaced.
If an error occurs, abnormal end results.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
26-7
Chapter 26 Maintenance diagnosis (User Maintenance)

n Detergent supply rolling tube replacing


1. Contents
• For replacing detergent A & B Rolling Pump Tube, drain and fill in the liquid.
• Operations are in the order 1) then 2). When a continuous action is selected (DIAG SW), 2) is operated. When
ending, 3) is operated.

1. Stop the Detergent generation.

2. Operation starts with 1) then 2), 1), 2), etc.


1) Draining action of detergent A supply pump (P12) is executed by 14 full actions.
Draining action of detergent B supply pump (P13) is executed by 14 full actions
2) Filling up action of detergent A supply pump (P12) is executed by 14 full actions
Filling up action of detergent B supply pump (P13) is executed by 14 full actions

3. Restart the Detergent generation

* “ Draining ” & “ Filling up ” are repeated every time the SW is pressed.

ES26_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-1
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

n DIAG outline
1. Outline
• Here, the general contents of the operations for maintenance operation, diagnosis operation, etc. will be
treated.
2. Operation Selection
• Operation selection is performed from the DPR menu.
• The selected operation is held until the next operation is selected.
• To deselect, operation selection cancellation (deselection) must be performed.
3. Operation Start
• Operation is started by DPR menu operation or with the ANL DIAG switch.
1) Operation for start by DPR menu operation
• Sub-CPU check
• Program version
• 0 - 100% (not continuous, continuous)
• Rotation measuring (not continuous, continuous)
2) Operation for start using the ANL DIAG switch
• All operations other than the above
4. Operation Completion
• Operation is completed after the previously arranged processing has been completed.
• The selected operation is held even after operation completion.
• For ANL, when operations require time for preparations etc., the preparations are performed with the first
operation, and control for return to the initial status is performed with the last operation.
1) Operations requiring explicit completion (deselection) at the time of operation completion
• Maintenance operation: Washing nozzle exchange
• Maintenance operation: Washing tube exchange
• Diagnosis operation: Washing sequence

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-2
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

n Control system diagnosis list


1. Types
• The following items can be considered as control system diagnosis items, but here only the items which can
be confirmed by diagnosis operation (excepting the mechanical system) are treated.
Check item Confirmation contents Confirmation method
ROM Sum check Automatic confirmation at the time of power on
RAM Read/Write check Automatic confirmation at the time of power on
2PRAM Read/Write check (only on the slave side) Automatic confirmation at the time of power on
Interrupt Entry of a timer or communication Normal start possible or not possible?
interrupt
DPR communication Check message transmission and Automatic confirmation at the time of power on
reception
Arcnet communication Initialization confirmation Diagnosis operation
LED SET, END, rack, 8 bit Diagnosis operation
Switches ON/OFF input confirmation At the time of normal operation, LED board
Timers General confirmation of the time intervals Normal operation, diagnosis operation
Slave Confirmation by operation of the Diagnosis operation (mechanical system)
(ISE communication) mechanical system
Slave Initialization confirmation Diagnosis operation
(photometry control)
Slave (optical LAN, Initialization confirmation Diagnosis operation
primary, secondary)
ISE sync signal Confirmation by ISE operation Diagnosis operation (mechanical system)
Sample counter Count confirmation Diagnosis operation
Power failure detection Detection confirmation LED board
Reloading ON/OFF confirmation Diagnosis operation
Control program Version confirmation Diagnosis operation

n Contents of the operations


l LEDs etc. (including the reloading flag)
• The LED board setting is set to “FF”. (LED indication by switch setting becomes invalid.)
1) Output of A5h to the 8 bit LED and lighting of the STAT END LED.
2) Waiting for 1 sec.
3) Output of 00h to the 8 bit LED and extinguishing of the STAT END LED.
4) Waiting for 1 sec.
5) Output of 5Ah to the 8 bit LED and lighting of the STAT SET LED.
6) Waiting for 1 sec.
7) Output of 00h to the 8 bit LED and extinguishing of the STAT SET LED.
8) Waiting for 1 sec.
9) Output of A5h to the 8 bit LED and lighting of the RACK prohibition LED.
10) Waiting for 1 sec.
11) Output of 00h to the 8 bit LED and extinguishing of the RACK prohibition LED.
12) Waiting for 1 sec.
13) Output of 5Ah to the 8 bit LED.
Reading in of reloading and setting of the reloading flag reversing the data.
• If reloading is not reversed, lighting of STAT END, STAT SET, and RACK prohibition LED.
When normal, setting to return reloading.
• If reloading is not returned, lighting of STAT END, STAT SET, and RACK prohibition LED.
14) Waiting for 1 sec.
15) Output of 00h to the 8 bit LED.
• Extinguishing of STAT END, STAT SET, and RACK prohibition LED.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-3
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sub-CPU check
• The following processing is performed, and each CPU responds as normal or abnormal.
For each processing, abnormal completion is made in case of an error. (Each CPU shall be independent.)
<Check of the photometry control sub-cpu>
1) Perform initialization of photometry control.
2) Perform initialization of the photometry constants.
<Check of the LAN master cpu>
1) Perform LAN master initialization.
2) Perform initialization of the mechanical control system.
l Sample counter
1) Output of 1 to the sample counter.
2) Waiting for 100 msec.
3) Output of 0 to the sample counter.
l Program version
• The version of the program being used is given as response.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-4
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

n Diagnosis list for the ANL system


l There are the following types of diagnosis operations for the ANL system.
l Refer to the following pages for operation details.
There are the following types of diagnosis operations for the mechanical system.
Check item Operation contents Remarks
1. Overall
(1) Reset Full initialization of the mechanical system is
performed.
(2) Excitation OFF. The excitation of all motors is switched ON/OFF
(3) Rack feed (storage) Rack transport measuring operation (storage) is S, R bar code specification
performed.
(4) Rack feed (reanalysis) Rack transport measuring operation (reanalysis) S, R bar code specification
is performed.
(5) Probe washing Discharge of washing water (quantity S, R, both, frequency
confirmation) specification
2. Rack Transport
1. Rack Detection
1. Rack Supply
(1) Reset The rack supply is reset.
(2) Supply step One-step transfer to the supply side.
(3) Acceptance step One-step transfer to the reception side.
(4) Reading by rack type Reading by rack type at the present position.
2. ID Rotation
(1) Reset ID rotation reset is performed.
(2) Step 1 (R↔S) Step movement is performed for the rack/sample
ID position.
(3) Step 2 (S↔S’) Performing of fine steps for the sample ID
position.
(4) Pulse ID rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and number
3. Detection Stepping
(1) Reset Detection stepping reset is performed.
(2) Step 1 (1 pitch) Rack feed one-step operation is performed.
(3) Step 2 (release) Release step operation is performed.
4. Bar Code Reader for S/R
(1) Rack. ID stopped The rack ID is read once without any operation.
reading
(2) Rack. ID moving The rack ID is read with normal ID rotation
reading operation.
(3) S. ID stopped reading The S. ID is read once without any operation. Specification by bar code type
(4) S. ID moving reading The S. ID is read with normal ID rotation Specification by bar code type
operation.
2. Rack Aspiration
1. Aspiration Stepping
(1) Reset Aspiration stepping reset is performed.
(2) Step 1 (1 pitch) Rack feed one-step operation is performed.
(3) Step 2 (release) Release step operation is performed.
2. Rack Recovery
(1) Reset Rack recovery reset is performed.
(2) Recovery step Transfer is made by one step to the recovery side.
(3) Return step Transfer is made by one step to the return side.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-5
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

Check item Operation contents Remarks


3. Rack Storage
1. Rack Storage
(1) Reset Rack storage reset is performed.
(2) Step Confiscation/Sheltering step operation is
performed.
2. Storage Stop
(1) Step ON/OFF operation is performed.
3. STAT Transport
1. STAT Rotation
(1) Reset STAT rotation reset is performed.
(2) Specified position Movement is made to the specified position. Specification of direction and
rotation position
(3) Pulse STAT rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
2. Bar Code Reader for STAT
(1) STAT. ID stopped reading The STAT. ID is read once without operation. Specification by bar code type
(2) STAT. ID moving reading The STAT. ID is read continuously with normal Specification by bar code type
operation.
4. Sample Dispensing
1. S Probe Transfer
(1) Reset S probe transfer reset is performed.
(2) Vertical step S vertical step operation is performed.
(3) Rotation step S rotation step operation is performed. Specification of the
aspiration/discharge position
(4) Vertical pulse S vertical pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(5) Rotation pulse S rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(6) Sequence Sequence operation is performed only for S probe Specification of the
transfer. aspiration/discharge position
2. S Dispensing
(1) Reset S dispensing reset is performed.
(2) Aspiration/discharge step Aspiration/discharge is performed for the max.
dispensing quantity.
1. R Probe Transfer
(1) Reset R probe transfer reset is performed.
(2) Vertical step R vertical step operation is performed.
(3) Rotation step R rotation step operation is performed. Specification of the aspiration
position
(4) Vertical pulse R vertical pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(5) Rotation pulse R rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(6) Sequence Sequence operation is performed only for R probe Specification of the aspiration
transfer. position
2. R Dispensing
(1) Reset R dispensing reset is performed.
(2) Aspiration/discharge step Aspiration/discharge is performed for the max.
dispensing quantity.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-6
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

Check item Operation contents Remarks


3. Reagent Storage Refrigerator
(1) Reset Reagent storage refrigerator reset is performed.
(2) Specified position Movement is made to the specified position. Specification of direction and
rotation position
(3) Pulse of direction and Pulse movement is performed for the reagent Specification
number storage refrigerator.
4. Bar Code Reader for R
(1) R. ID stopped reading The R. ID is read once without any operation.
(2) R. ID moving reading The R. ID is read continuously with normal
operation.
6. Reaction Photometry
(1) Reset C rotation reset is performed.
(2) Specified position rotation Movement is made to the specified position. Specification of direction and
position
(3) Pulse C rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(4) Magnetization ON/OFF C rotation excitation is switched ON/OFF.
(5) 0 - 100% Photometry is performed for the specific cuvette CUV designation,and
at same position. continuous
photometry can be set.
(6) Rotation measuring Rotation photometry is performed. Continuous photometry is
possible.
7. Mixing
(1) Reset Mixing rod transfer reset is performed.
(2) Vertical step M vertical step operation is performed.
(3) Rotation step M rotation step operation is performed.
(4) Vertical pulse M vertical pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(5) Rotation pulse M rotation pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(6) Mixing rod rotation M mixing is performed for the specified time.
(7) Sequence Mixing sequence operation is performed.
8. Washing
(1) Reset Washing nozzle transfer reset is performed.
(2) Vertical step Washing vertical step operation is performed.
(3) Vertical pulse Washing vertical pulse movement is performed. Specification of direction and
number
(4) Sequence Washing sequence operation is performed.
9. Water Supply and Discharge
(1) Pump on/off All pumps are switched ON/OFF.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-7
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

n Operation details
l Overall - reset
(1) Full mechanical initialization is performed.
l Overall - excitation OFF
• Initially, (1) is performed, and in case of consecutive selection, operation is performed in the order of (2), (1),
(2), ... .

(1) Excitation is switched OFF for rack supply (M1), ID rotation (M3), detection stepping (M4), aspiration
stepping (M5), rack recovery (M6), rack storage (M8), STAT rotation (M9), S rotation (M10), S vertical
(M11), S dispensing (M12), R rotation (M14), R vertical (M15), refrigerator rotation (M16), R dispensing
(M17), C rotation (M18), M rotation (M19), M vertical (M20), M mixing (M21), washing vertical (M22).
(2) Excitation is switched ON for the motors of (1).

l Overall - rack feed (storage)


• Specification of rack ID yes/no and sample ID yes/no is possible.
• Initially, (1) and (2) are performed, and in case of consecutive selection and normal completion, only (2) is
performed.
(1) Rack system initialization is performed.
Rack discharge operation is performed.
Rack confirmation operation is performed.
• Abnormal completion is made in case of an error.
(2) Rack one-sequence operation is performed.
• Abnormal completion is performed when an error occurs for each operation sequence.
• Rack detection
Each time this operation is selected, each sample sequence operation is performed.
1) When there is a rack, sequence operation is performed for the first sample.
• When there is a rack ID, sample ID, the respective data are transmitted.
2) Sequence operation is performed for the second sample.
• When there is a sample ID, the respective data are transmitted.
3) In the same way, sequence operation is performed for the third to the tenth sample.
• When there is a sample ID, the respective data are transmitted.
• Rack aspiration
Each time operation is selected when a rack has been sent from rack detection, each sample sequence
operation is performed.
1) Sequence operation is performed for the first sample.
2) Sequence operation is performed for the second sample.
3) In the same way, sequence operation is performed for the third to the tenth sample.
• Rack storage
Each time operation is selected when a rack has been sent from rack aspiration, each sample sequence
operation is performed.
1) Whenever operation has been selected eight times, rack storage pitch feed sequence operation is
performed.
2) When a rack has come to recovery prohibition (S20), rack storage sequence operation is performed.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-8
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Overall - rack feed (reanalysis)


• Same as “3. Rack Feed (storage)”, except for the following.
• Rack storage
Each time operation is selected when a rack has been sent from rack aspiration, each sample sequence
operation is performed.
1) Whenever operation has been selected eight times, rack storage pitch feed sequence operation is
performed.
2) When a rack has come to recovery prohibition (S20), rack reanalysis sequence operation is
performed.
l Overall - probe washing
• Selection of sample, reagent, or simultaneous sample/reagent is possible.
• Operation is performed for the specified number of times.
(1) Sample
1) S probe transfer initialization is performed.
• Abnormal completion is made in case of an error.
2) S probe washing operation is performed for the specified number of times.
• Abnormal completion is made in case of an error.
(2) Reagent
1) R probe transfer initialization is performed.
• Abnormal completion is made in case of an error.
2) R probe washing operation is performed for the specified number of times.
• Abnormal completion is made in case of an error.
l Rack transport - rack detection - rack supply
(1) Reset
1) Rack supply (M1) initialization is performed.
(2) Supply step
1) When supply prohibition (S7) is OFF, rack supply (M1) supply operation is performed.
• An error is caused when supply prohibition (S7) is ON.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
2) Rack supply (M1) fine supply operation is performed.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
• An error is caused when the supply point (S1) is OFF at the time of operation completion.
3) The rack identification (S4, S5, S6) is read after 1 sec.
• Output is made to the 8 bit LEDs DB0, 1, and 2.
* The operation timing for 1) and 2) is the same as for analysis operation.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-9
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport, rack detection, rack supply


(3) Reception step
1) When supply passage (S27) is OFF and rack arrival (S28) also is OFF, reception operation is
performed for rack supply (M1).
• When supply passage or rack arrival is ON, an error is caused.
• An error is caused in case of BUSY at the time of operation completion.
2) Fine reception is performed for rack supply (M1).
• An error is caused in case of BUSY at the time of operation completion.
• An error is caused in case of return in point (S2) OFF at the time of operation completion.
* The operation timing for 1) and 2) is the same as for analysis operation.
(4) Reading by rack type
1) The rack identification (S4, S5, S6) is read.
• The identification information is transmitted as the result.
• Output is made to the 8 bit LEDs DB0, 1, and 2.
l Rack transport, rack detection, ID rotation
(1) Reset
1) ID rotation (M3) initialization is performed.
(2) Step 1 (R ↔ S)
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of consecutive selection, execution
is made in the sequence of 2), 3), 1), .. .
1)
a) ID rotation (M3) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is performed only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When S position (S9) is ON, ID rotation (M3) performs S → R operation.
• An error is caused when the S position is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when R position (S10) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When R position (S10) is ON, ID rotation (M3) performs R → R’ operation.
• An error is caused when the S position is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
3) ID rotation (M3) performs R’ → S operation.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when S position (S9) is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-10
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport - rack detection - ID rotation


(3) Step 2 (S ↔ S’)
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) ID rotation (M3) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is performed only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When S position (S9) is ON, ID rotation (M3) performs S → S’ operation.
• An error is caused when S position is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
2) ID rotation (M3) performs S’ → S operation.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when S position (S9) is OFF after operation completion.
(4) Pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when it is CCW.
1) Pulse R operation is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse S operation is performed for the specified number of pulses.
l Rack transport - rack detection - detection stepping
(1) Reset
1) Detection stepping (M4) initialization is performed.
(2) Step 1 (1 pitch)
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Detection stepping (M4) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and when the entire operation is completed normally,
this operation is performed only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When origin (S11) is ON, detection stepping (M4) is performed for half a step.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is ON after operation completion.
2) Detection stepping (M4) is returned for half a step.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-11
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport - rack detection - detection stepping


(3) Step 2 (release)
• 1) is performed at the time of initial operation selection, and with following continuous selection,
execution is made in the sequence of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Detection stepping (M4) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and when the entire operation is completed normally,
this operation is performed only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When origin (S11) is ON, detection stepping (M4) evacuation operation is performed.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is ON after operation completion.
2) Detection stepping (M4) evacuation return operation is performed.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF after operation completion.
l Rack transport - rack detection - S/rack bar code reader
(1) Rack ID stopped reading
1) Bar code reader (rack ID) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) Rack ID reading is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.
(2) Rack ID moving reading
1) Bar code reader (rack ID) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) ID rotation (M3) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
3) Rack ID reading including ID rotation is performed. (For details, refer to the time chart.)
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
4) The read data are checked and then transmitted.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-12
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport - rack detection - S/rack bar code reader


(3) S. ID stopped reading
1) Bar code reader (sample ID) initialization is performed according to the set contents.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) Sample ID reading is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.
(4) S. ID moving reading
1) Bar code reader (sample ID) initialization is performed according to the set contents.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) ID rotation (M3) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
3) Sample ID reading including ID rotation is performed. (For details, refer to the time chart.)
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
4) The read data are checked and then transmitted.
l Rack transport - rack aspiration - aspiration stepping
(1) Reset
1) Aspiration stepping (M5) initialization is performed.
(2) Step 1 (1 pitch)
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Aspiration stepping (M5) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and is completed normally, this operation is performed
only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When origin (S14) is ON, aspiration stepping (M5) is performed for half a step.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is ON after operation completion.
2) Aspiration stepping (M5) is returned for half a step.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-13
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport - rack aspiration - aspiration stepping


(3) Step 2 (release)
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Aspiration stepping (M5) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and is completed normally, this operation is performed
only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When origin (S14) is ON, aspiration stepping (M5) evacuation is performed.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is ON after operation completion.
2) Aspiration stepping (M5) evacuation return is performed.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec.
• An error is caused when origin is OFF after operation completion.
l Rack transport - rack aspiration - rack recovery
(1) Reset
1) Rack recovery (M6) initialization is performed.
(2) Recovery step
1) When recovery prohibition (S20) is OFF, rack recovery (M6) recovery operation is performed.
• An error is caused when recovery prohibition (S20) is ON.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
2) Rack recovery (M6) fine recovery is performed.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
• An error is caused when the recovery point (S18) is OFF at the time of operation completion.
* The operation timing for 1) and 2) is the same as for analysis operation.
(3) Return step
1) When recovery prohibition (S20) is OFF, rack recovery (M6) performs return recovery.
• An error is caused when recovery prohibition is ON.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
2) Rack recovery (M6) fine recovery is performed.
• An error is caused when BUSY exists at the time of operation completion.
• An error is caused when the recovery OUT point (S19) is OFF at the time of operation
completion.
* The operation timing for 1) and 2) is the same as for analysis operation.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-14
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Rack transport - rack storage - rack storage


(1) Reset
1) Rack storage (M8) initialization is performed.
(2) Step
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Rack storage (M8) initialization is performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and is completed normally, this operation is performed
only the first time and not afterwards.
b) When storage passage (S21) is OFF and supply passage (S27) also is OFF, while storage full (S26) is
OFF and the evacuation point (S24) is ON, rack storage (M8) push-out is performed.
• An error is caused when rack passage, supply passage, storage full, and evacuation point are OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 2 sec.
• An error is caused when the push storage point (S25) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When storage point (S25) is ON, rack storage (M8) evacuation is performed.
• An error is caused when the push storage point is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 2 sec.
• An error is caused when the evacuation point (S24) is OFF after operation completion.
l Rack transport - rack storage - storage stop
(1) Step
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed, and in case of subsequent operation selection,
execution is made in the order of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1) When storage passage (S21) is OFF, rack stop operation is performed for storage stop (M13).
• An error is caused when storage passage is ON.
2) Rack passage operation is performed for storage stop (M13).

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-15
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l STAT transport - STAT rotation


(1) Reset
1) STAT rotation (M9) initialization is performed.
(2) Rotation to the specified position
• Stop position and rotation direction are specified from DPR.
1)
1) When the present position is not established, STAT rotation (M9) initialization is performed.
2) When the top point (S36) of S vertical (M11) is ON and the fixed point (S30) of STAT rotation (M9)
also is ON, STAT rotation (M9) is performed as specified position left movement (for CCW
movement)/specified position right movement (for CW movement) from the present position to the
specified position.
• An error is caused when top point and fixed point are OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 3 sec.
• An error is caused when the fixed point (S30) is OFF at the time of operation completion.
(3) Pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
l STAT transport - STAT bar code reader
(1) STAT. ID stopped reading
1) Bar code reader (STAT. ID) initialization is performed according to the set contents.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) STAT. ID reading is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.
(2) STAT. ID moving reading
1) Bar code reader (STAT. ID) initialization is performed according to the set contents.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
When the excitation of STAT rotation (M9) is OFF, or when the position is not established, STAT
rotation initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) STAT check operation is performed once at the present position.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-16
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sample dispensing - S probe transfer


(1) Reset
1) S probe transfer initialization is performed.
(2) Vertical step
• According to the present position and the rotation direction, operation is performed as follows.
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
1) When the rotation and the present position in vertical direction are not established, S probe transfer
initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) In case of the washing position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the washing position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed by 2 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the washing
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
3) In case of the rack position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the rack position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed by 5 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the rack position
will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
4) In case of STAT inner/outer position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the STAT position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed by 5 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the STAT
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
5) In case of the ISE position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the ISE position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the ISE position
will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-17
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sample dispensing - S probe transfer


6) In case of the cuvette discharge position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
• The fluid quantity in the cuvette shall be 600 µL.
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the cuvette position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the cuvette
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
7) In case of the cuvette aspiration position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the cuvette position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), and when the top point (S36) is OFF, rise to the cuvette
aspiration position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
l Sample dispensing - S probe transfer
(3) Rotation step
• Operation is performed as follows according to selection of aspiration or discharge position.
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
1) When the rotation and the present position in vertical direction are not established, S probe transfer
initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) In case of aspiration : rack position, discharge : cuvette position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the rack position.
• An error is caused when the rack position (S33) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the rack position to the cuvette
position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S34) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the cuvette position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
3) In case of aspiration : rack position, discharge : ISE position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the rack position.
• An error is caused when the rack position (S33) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the rack position to the ISE position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the ISE position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-18
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sample dispensing - S probe transfer


4) In case of aspiration : STAT inner/outer position, discharge : cuvette discharge position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the STAT inner/outer
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the STAT inner/outer position to the
cuvette position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S34) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the cuvette discharge position to the
washing position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
5) In case of aspiration : STAT inner/outer position, discharge : ISE position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the STAT inner/outer
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the STAT inner/outer position to the
ISE position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the ISE position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
6) In case of aspiration : cuvette aspiration position, discharge : cuvette discharge position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 4), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the cuvette aspiration
position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S34) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the cuvette aspiration position to the
washing position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the washing position to the cuvette
discharge position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S34) is OFF after operation completion.
4) When at the completion position of 3), movement is made from the cuvette discharge position to the
washing position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S35) is OFF after operation completion.
(4) Vertical pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse upward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse downward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(5) Rotation pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-19
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sample dispensing - S probe transfer


(6) Sequence
• Analysis operation for one sample dispensing cycle is performed according to the selection of the
aspiration/discharge position.
• The sample quantity shall be 50 µL and this shall be set in the operation information file.
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed and then each operation is performed.
When consecutive operation is selected afterwards, 1) is not performed when it has been completed
normally.
1) Sample system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) In case of aspiration : rack position, discharge : cuvette discharge position
• Analysis operation is performed for one cycle.
3) In case of aspiration : rack position, discharge : ISE position
• Analysis operation is performed for one cycle.
4) In case of aspiration : STAT inner/outer position, discharge : cuvette discharge position
• Analysis operation is performed for one cycle.
5) In case of aspiration : STAT inner/outer position, discharge : ISE position
• Analysis operation is performed for one cycle.
6) In case of aspiration : cuvette aspiration position, discharge : cuvette discharge position
• One cuvette discharge cycle is performed after one cycle of predilution cuvette aspiration.
l Sample dispensing - S dispensing
(1) Reset
1) S dispensing (M12) initialization is performed.
(2) Aspiration/discharge step
• At the time of the first operation selection, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
1)
a) Sample system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
b) The first half of the S probe/syringe exchange operation is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
2) The last half of the S probe/syringe exchange operation is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-20
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Reagent dispensing - R probe transfer


(1) Reset
1) R probe transfer initialization is performed.
(2) Vertical step
• According to the present position in the rotation direction, operation is performed as follows.
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
1) When the rotation and the present position in vertical direction are not established, R probe transfer
initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) In case of the washing position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the washing position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed by 2 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S46) is OFF, rise to the washing
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
3) In case of the sample position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the reagent position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed by 5 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S46) is OFF, rise to the reagent
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
4) In case of the deionized water position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the deionized water position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), and when the top point (S46) is OFF, rise to the deionized
water position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
5) In case of the predilution fluid position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the predilution fluid position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), rise is performed for 5 mm.
3) When at the completion position of 2), and when the top point (S46) is OFF, rise to the predilution
fluid position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-21
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Reagent dispensing - R probe transfer


6) In case of the cuvette position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
• The fluid quantity in the cuvette shall be 600 µL.
1) When at the initial position, descent is made to the cuvette position.
2) When at the completion position of 1), and when the top point (S46) is OFF, rise to the cuvette
position will be performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
(3) Rotation step
• Operation is performed as follows according to selection of the aspiration position.
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
1) When the rotation and the present position in vertical direction are not established, R probe transfer
initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) In case of aspiration : reagent inner/outer position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the reagent inner/outer
position.
• An error is caused when the reagent position (S45) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the reagent inner/outer position to
the cuvette position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S43) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the cuvette position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S44) is OFF after operation completion.
3) In case of aspiration : deionized water position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the deionized water
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S44) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the deionized water position to the
cuvette position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S43) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the cuvette position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S44) is OFF after operation completion.
4) In case of aspiration : Predilution fluid position
• Each time operation is selected, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 3), 1), ... .
1) When at the initial position, movement is made from the washing position to the predilution fluid
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S44) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When at the completion position of 1), movement is made from the predilution fluid position to the
cuvette position.
• An error is caused when the cuvette position (S43) is OFF after operation completion.
3) When at the completion position of 2), movement is made from the cuvette position to the washing
position.
• An error is caused when the position confirmation (S44) is OFF after operation completion.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-22
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Reagent dispensing - R probe transfer


(4) Vertical pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse upward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse downward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(5) Rotation pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(6) Sequence
• Analysis operation for one reagent dispensing cycle is performed according to the selection of the
aspiration position.
• The reagent quantity shall be 200 µL, and this shall be set in the operation information file.
• At the time of the first operation selection, 1) is performed and then each operation is performed.
When consecutive operation is selected afterwards, 1) is not performed when it has been completed
normally.
1) Reagent system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) Analysis operation for one cycle is performed for the selected aspiration position.
• Abnormal completion is made when an error occurs.
l Reagent dispensing - R dispensing
(1) Reset
1) R dispensing (M17) initialization is performed.
(2) Aspiration/discharge step
• At the time of operation selection, execution is made in the order of 1), 2), 1), ... .
1)
a) R probe transfer initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and has been completed normally, this operation is
not performed.
b) R dispensing (M17) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and has been completed normally, this operation is
not performed.
c) The first half of R probe/syringe exchange operation is performed.
• Abnormal completion is made when an error occurs.
2) The last half of R probe/syringe exchange operation is performed.
• Abnormal completion is made when an error occurs.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-23
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Sample dispensing - reagent storage refrigerator


(1) Reset
1) Refrigerator rotation (M16) initialization is performed.
(2) Specified position rotation
• Stop position and rotation direction are specified from DPR.
1)
1) When the present position is not established, refrigerator rotation (M16) initialization is performed.
2) When the top point (S46) of R vertical (M15) is ON and the inner fixed point (S49) or the outer fixed
point (S50) of storage refrigerator rotation (M16) is ON, storage refrigerator rotation (M16) is
performed from the present position as specified position left movement (CCW movement) or
specified position right movement (CW movement).
• An error is caused when the top point and/or the inner/outer fixed point is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 3 sec.
• An error is caused when the inner/outer fixed point by the specified position is OFF after
operation completion.
(3) Pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
l Reagent dispensing - reagent bar code reader
(1) R. ID stopped reading
1) Bar code reader (R. ID) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) R. ID reading is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.
(2) R. ID moving reading
1) Bar code reader (R. ID) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
When the excitation of storage refrigerator rotation (M16) is OFF, or when the position is not
established, storage refrigerator rotation initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
* When this operation is selected consecutively and the entire operation is completed normally, this
operation is not performed.
2) R. ID check operation is performed once from the present position.
3) The read data are checked and then transmitted.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-24
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Reaction photometry
(1) Reset
1) Photometry system initialization is performed.
(2) Specified position rotation
• Stop position and rotation direction are specified from DPR.
1)
1) When the present position is not established or when the top point (S36) of S vertical (M11) is OFF
or when the top point (S46) of R vertical (M15) is OFF or when the top point (S60) of M vertical
(M20) is OFF or when the top point (S61) of washing vertical (M22) is OFF, photometry system
initialization is performed.
2) When the top point (S36) of S vertical (M11), the top point (S46) of R vertical (M15), the top point
(S60) of M vertical (M20), the top point (S61) of washing vertical (M22), and the top point (S57) of
C rotation (M18) all are ON, C rotation (M18) is performed from the present position to the specified
position as specified position left movement (CCW movement) or specified position right movement
(CW movement).
• An error is caused when the above sensors are OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 5 sec.
• An error is caused when the fixed point is OFF after operation completion.
(3) Pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(4) Excitation ON/OFF
• 1) is performed for the first operation, and in case of following consecutive selection, the operation will be
2), 1), 2), ... .
1) The C rotation (M18) excitation is switched OFF.
2) The C rotation (M18) excitation is switched ON.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-25
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Reaction photometry
(5) 0 - 100%
• The following operations are performed according to the specification of single/continuous or cuvette.
• 1) is performed for the first operation, and in case of following consecutive selection after normal
completion, the operation will be from 2) on.
1) Photometry system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
2) The photometry constants are initialized.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) 0% photometry is performed.
• The measured data are transmitted.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
4) C rotation (M18) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
5) When S probe transfer is (not at the cuvette position (S34) or at the top point (S36)), R probe transfer is
(not at the cuvette position (S43) or at the top point (S46)), mixing rod transfer is at the top point (S60),
washing nozzle transfer is at the top point (S61), and the fixed point (S57) of C rotation (M18) is ON,
C rotation to the right is performed to the specified position.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 5 sec or when it is completed
abnormally.
6) Static photometry is performed when the fixed point (S57) of C rotation (M18) is ON.
• An error is caused when the fixed point of C rotation is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 1 sec or when it is completed
abnormally.
• The photometry data are transmitted.
* In case of continuous operation, 6) is performed 20 times.
7) C rotation (M18) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
(6) Rotation photometry
• The following operations are performed according to the specification of single/continuous or cuvette.
• 1) is performed for the first operation, and in case of following consecutive selection after normal
completion, the operation will be from 2) on.
1) Photometry system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
2) The photometry constants are initialized.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
3) When S probe transfer is (not at the cuvette position (S34) or at the top point (S36)), R probe transfer is
(not at the cuvette position (S43) or at the top point (S46)), mixing rod transfer is at the top point (S60),
washing nozzle transfer is at the top point (S61), and the fixed point (S57) of C rotation (M18) is ON,
C rotation to the right is performed to the specified position.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 5 sec or when it is completed
abnormally.
4) DIAG photometry is performed when the fixed point (S57) of C rotation (M18) is ON.
• An error is caused when the fixed point of C rotation is OFF.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 7 sec or when it is completed
abnormally.
• The photometry data are transmitted.
* In case of continuous operation, 6) is performed 20 times.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-26
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Mixing
(1) Reset
1) Mixing system initialization is performed.
(2) Vertical step
• The time-out for each operation shall be 2 sec.
• 1) is performed for the first operation, and in case of following operation selection, the operation will be
performed in the sequence of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) When the present position in regard to rotation and vertical direction is not established, mixing
system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
b) When the top point (S60) of M vertical (M20) is ON, downward movement is performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF.
2) When the top point is OFF, upward movement is performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF after operation completion.
(3) Rotation step
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
1)
1) When the present position in regard to rotation and vertical direction is not established, mixing
system initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) When the top point (S59) of M rotation (M19) is ON, right movement is performed.
• An error is caused when the fixed point is OFF.
• An error is caused when the fixed point is OFF after operation completion.
(4) Vertical pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse upward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse downward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(5) Rotation pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse right movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse left movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(6) Mixing rod rotation
1) The mixing rod (M21) performs mixing.
• An error is caused when the operation is not completed within 2 sec.
(7) Sequence
• At the first selection of this operation, all operations are performed from 1) on.
When continuous operation is selected afterwards and the operation has been completed normally, 1) is
not performed.
1) Mixing system initialization is performed.
C rotation (M18) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
2) The detergent washing of “2.4.6. Mixing Rod Washing” is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-27
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Washing
(1) Reset
1) Washing vertical (M22) initialization is performed.
(2) Vertical step
• The time-out for completion of each operation shall be 2 sec.
• 1) is performed for the first operation, and in case of following operation selection, the operation will be
performed in the sequence of 2), 1), 2), ... .
1)
a) Washing vertical (M22) initialization is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made and the following operations are not performed.
b) When the top point (S61) of washing vertical (M22) is ON, downward movement is performed.
• An error is caused when the top point is OFF.
• An error is caused when the bottom point (S62) is OFF after operation completion.
2) When the bottom point (S62) is ON, upward movement is performed.
• An error is caused when the bottom point is ON.
• An error is caused when the top point (S61) is OFF after operation completion.
(3) Vertical pulse
• 1) is performed when the operation instruction is CW, and 2) is performed when the operation instruction
is CCW.
1) Pulse upward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
2) Pulse downward movement is performed for the specified number of pulses.
(4) Sequence
• At the first selection of this operation, 1) is performed, and then 2) is performed.
When continuous operation is selected afterwards and the operation has been completed normally, 1) is
not performed. 3) is performed at the time of operation completion.
1) Washing vertical (M22) initialization is performed.
C rotation (M18) initialization is performed.
Negative pressure setting is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made, and the following operations are not performed.
2) Low-speed aspiration operation is performed when the cuvette position 80 is not empty.
When it is empty, the sequence for one cycle at the time of analysis operation is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made, 3) is executed, and the operation is ended.
3) Negative pressure cancellation operation is performed.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-28
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

l Water supply and discharge


(1) Pump ON/OFF
• At the time of the first selection, 1) is performed, and with following consecutive selection, operation is
performed as 2), 1), 2), ... .
1) Deionized water (P1), degassor (P3), detergent A (P4), and detergent B (P5) are switched ON.
Negative pressure setting operation is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.
2) Deionized water (P1), degassor (P3), detergent A (P4), and detergent B (P5) are switched OFF.
Negative pressure cancellation operation is performed.
• In case of an error, abnormal completion is made.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-29
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)

n ISE DIAG
l Types
ISE diagnosis operations are divided roughly into mechanism-related, data-related, and priming measuring
operation. Division according to the operation start method is made into the following two types.
Priming : Selection from the DPR menu and start by a switch on the ANL side.
Others : Selection/start from the DPR menu.
The operation details are described in the following.

l Mechanism-related
• A time-out until completion is set for each operation, and the completion information is gathered or error
completion is performed.
(1) Reset
• ISE of “2.2.3. Mechanical System Initial Operation” is performed.
(2) Sample mixing
1) Mixing operation (MIX) is performed.
(3) Overflow sensor check
1) Start check 2 (STARTCHECK2) is performed.
(4) Thermistor check
1) Start check 1 (STARTCHECK1) is performed.
l Data-related
• A time-out until completion is set for each operation, and the completion information is gathered or error
completion is performed.
(1) Calibration (serum)
1) “Serum CAL” is performed.
• The same sync signal as for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is put out.
• From the S-L position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 20 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• From the S-H position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 20 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
2) The measuring data are put out.
(2) Calibration (urine)
1) “Urine CAL” is performed.
• The sync signal for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is put out.
• From the U-L position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 25 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• From the U-H position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 25 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
2) The measuring data are put out.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-30
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)
n ISE DIAG
(3) Calibration (serum + urine)
1) “Serum + urine CAL” is performed.
• The sync signal for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is put out.
• From the U-L position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 25 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• From the U-H position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 25 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
• The sync signal for washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is put out.
• From the S-L position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 20 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• From the S-H position at the STAT inner circumference, mixture is dispensed with a liquid quantity
of 20 µL, a diluent quantity of 10 µL, and 1 µL of air, and the sync signal is put out. (This is done
four times.)
• Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
2) The measuring data are put out.
(4) Selectivity check
• The selectivity check of “2.5.7. ISE” is performed.
l Priming
• A time-out until completion is set for each operation, and the completion information is gathered or error
completion is performed.
(1) Full priming
• Full priming of “2.4.5. ISE” Washing is performed.
(2) Buffer priming
1) Buffer liquid priming (PRIME_2) is performed.
(3) Internal standard solution priming
1) MID/REF priming (PRIME_1) is performed.
(4) Fluid discharge (electrode)
1) Fluid discharge (via the flow cell) (PRIME_3) is performed.
(5) Fluid discharge (bypass)
• Fluid discharge (bypass) of “2.5.7. ISE” is performed.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 27 Maintenance and Diagnosis 27-31
(manufacturer's maintenance/DIAG)
n ISE DIAG
l Measuring operation
• A time-out until completion is set for each operation, and the completion information is gathered or error
completion is performed.
(1) One-sample measuring (rack)
1) When not at the initial position, sample system aspiration stepping (M5) initialization operation is
performed.
2) With sample aspiration as the rack position, sample dispensing and ISE measuring are performed in the
same way as for analysis operation, and analysis of the urine or serum is executed.
3) The measuring data are put out.
(2) One-sample measuring (STAT)
1) When not at the initial position, sample system initialization operation is performed.
2) With sample aspiration as the STAT outer position, the same operations as 2) and 3) of (1) are
performed.
(3) Continuous measuring 1 (rack)
1) When not at the initial position, sample system aspiration stepping (M5) initialization operation is
performed.
2) Washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is performed.
3) With sample aspiration as the rack position, sample dispensing and ISE measuring are performed in the
same way as for analysis operation, and urine (M1_U) or serum (M1_S) analysis is executed.
4) 3) is performed nine times (for a total of 10 times).
5) Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
6) The measuring data are put out.
(4) Continuous measuring 1 (STAT)
1) When not at the initial position, sample system initialization operation is performed.
2) With sample aspiration as the STAT outer position, the same operations as 2) to 6) of (3) are performed.
(5) Continuous measuring 2
1) Washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is performed.
2) Internal standard solution measuring (M_2) is performed.
3) 2) is executed nine times (for a total of 10 times).
4) Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
5) The measuring data are put out.
(6) Continuous measuring 3
1) Washing before analysis (FLUSH_1) is performed.
2) Static measuring (M_3) is performed.
3) 2) is executed nine times (for a total of 10 times).
4) Washing after analysis (FLUSH_2) is performed.
5) The measuring data are put out.

ES27_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-1

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Maintenance - calibration
[ Outline ]
Calibration uses two types of standard solutions (H, L) with known densities to obtain the slope value required
for ISE analysis. At this time, the internal standard solution (M) is used as the base standard solution. The
internal standard solution is compensated according to the result of the calibration with the standard solutions
with known densities.
There are the following six types of calibration operations.
1) Serum CAL : Performed only with serum
2) Urine CAL : Performed only with urine
3) Urine + serum CAL : Performed consecutively with urine and serum
4) Serum CAL (with PRE-check) : Performed only with serum
5) Urine CAL (with PRE-check) : Performed only with urine
6) Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check) : Performed consecutively with urine and serum
Note : PRE-check means that preliminary measuring is performed before the CAL operation,
and when the data are within the specified range, CAL is not executed and the previous
CAL data are used.
At the time of calibration, the operator must set the standard solutions H and L for calibration at positions on
the STAT table specified in advance. There are four types of standard solutions, H and L for serum and urine
each.
The six calibration types can be specified by operation commands from DPR.
When a PRE-check is performed, ANL makes requests to ISE with expansion into the following eight types of
operation commands.
• FLUSH1
• Stability check
• Serum H-STD PRE-check
• Serum L-STD PRE-check
• Urine H-STD PRE-check
• Urine L-STD PRE-check
• Serum CAL (stability check/no H-L STD PRE-check)
• Urine CAL (stability check/no H-L STD PRE-check)
With calibration operation, differing from analysis operation, sync signals are sent several times, with a timing
decided in advance, after an operation command has been sent, in order to perform a series of operations. The
sync signal interval is 18 sec.
The output method for the sync signal is the same as in the case of individual calibration for serum and urine,
but care is required as the number of times is different when urine + serum CAL is performed without a PRE-
check.
In case of urine + serum calibration, urine calibration is performed first, and then serum calibration is
performed.
After completion of calibration, the operation command response is put out, and then the calibration result is
put out.

Note : In case of urine + serum (with PRE-check), ANL performs urine CAL (with PRE-check)
and then serum CAL (with PRE-check).

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-2

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


• Calibration (without PRE-check)
(1) Calibration operation flow

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-3

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents 28-6


(2) Calibration mechanical operation processing
Calibration has a composition with a mixture of several cyclic operations. Each one is an analysis or washing
operation with the possibility of cyclic operation, but differing from operation at the time of analysis, there is
no output of individual operation commands and transmission of sync signals. After reception of a
calibration operation command, operation is performed by sending sync signals to ISE matched to ANL
standard solution dispensing.
A) Message reception processing
During calibration operation, only a stop command will be accepted.
Other messages will be disregarded even if they are received.
When a stop command has been received :
A stop response is made.
When during operation at that time, the respective operation cycle is completed, and then abnormal
completion of the calibration command response is made.
Return is made to READY mode.
At this time, the calibration measuring data and the result message are not transmitted.
B) Sync signal reception processing
All mechanical operations are performed with a sync signal as the start point. Accordingly, the process
continues to wait forever when there is no sync signal. However, a stop command will be accepted.
The sync signal is used to correct the time of the 100 m S basic timer. The method is the same as at the
time of analysis. The reception timing for the sync signal is checked. The check method is the same as at
the time of analysis.
In case of an error with the above checks, an alarm is put out, response is made with abnormal
completion of the calibration command response, and return is made to READY mode. At this time, no
calibration result message is put out.
C) ANL connection interruption
When the ANL connection has become interrupted, the cyclic operation is ended and READY mode is
entered.
D) At the time of a mechanical error
In case of a mechanical error or an A/D error, an alarm is put out and calibration is aborted. Abnormal
completion of the calibration command response is responded to ANL, and return is made to READY
mode. At this time, no calibration result message is put out.

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-4

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


(3) Calibration data processing
Calculations for the slope and the internal standard solution density correction value are performed
separately for serum and urine. In case of urine + serum calibration, the calculation for urine is started after
calibration for urine has been completed. After completion of the calculations, the results are sent to ANL in
one transmission, and they are stored for use with future measuring.
A) Compensation of the voltage value
Temperature compensation and contamination compensation are made in the same way as for sample
analysis.
This compensation is performed in regard to the measuring data for internal and external standard
solutions.
B) Data check
*Stability check*
1) Internal standard solution before CAL
It is checked that the potential difference between the two measured voltage values is within the
tolerances given by the analysis conditions.
2) During CAL
At the time of STD-H measuring, at the time of STD-L measuring, and at the time of STD-M
measuring, the difference between the third and the fourth measured voltage is compared with the
tolerance given by the analysis conditions.
When the check result is NG in the cases 1) and 2), the following processing is done.
1) An error is set as stability check error.

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-5

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


C) Slope calculation

The data from (1) to (8) out of the voltage data obtained with the above calibration procedure are used.
The third and forth voltage mean values are calculated for STD-H, for STD-L, and for STD-M (internal
standard solution).
EH : Mean voltage of (1) and (3) (STD-H voltage value)
EMH : Mean voltage of (2) and (4) (STD-M voltage value)
EL : Mean voltage of (5) and (7) (STD-L voltage value)
EML : Mean voltage of (6) and (8) (STD-M voltage value)
The following formula is used to calculate the slope. S = 0 is used when the stability check is NG.

CH : STD-H density value


CL : STD-L density value
k : The following value with the electrode output gain value
k
NA 10
K 10
CL 10

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-6

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


D) Internal standard solution density calculation
The internal standard solution density CM' is calculated according to the following formula, separately
for urine and serum.

The factor with the internal standard solution density CM given by the analysis conditions message is
calculated.

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-7

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l At the time of calibration (without PRE-check)

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-8

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Calibration (with PRE-check)
(1) Calibration operation flow

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-9

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


(2) Operation contents
A. Stability PRE-check
In the same way as for the case without PRE-check, confirmation is made that the potential difference
between two measurements for the internal standard solution is within the "washing check potential
fluctuation tolerance range before calibration" specified by the analysis conditions for Na, K, and CL. In
case of NG, a stability check is executed.
B. Stability check
The operation is the same as in case of no PRE-check.
When the result is NG, response to ANL is made with abnormal completion for the operation result.
In case of normal completion, response to ANL is made with normal completion for the operation result.
Note : 1. In case of abnormal completion, ANL sends CAL data to DPR with 0 for all slope
values and the internal standard solution density, and CAL is ended.
2. In case of normal completion, urine (serum in case of specification of only serum) H-
STD checking is instructed from ANL after completion.
C. Urine H-STD check
Measuring is performed in the order of urine H-STD → internal standard solution, and the urine HIGH-
STD density is calculated with the urine slope/factor from the previous CAL.
When the calculated density shows that Na, K, or CL exceeds the “permissible HIGH-STD width at the
time of urine PRE-calibration” set in the analysis conditions, the operation result is notified to ANL as
abnormal completion.
When all values are within the range, the operation result is notified to ANL as normal completion.
Note : 1. The permissible HIGH-STD width at the time of urine PRE-calibration is a * value in
regard to the HIGH-STD standard solution density for urine as set in the analysis
conditions.
2. In case of normal completion, ANL then instructs execution of the urine H-STD check.
3. In case of abnormal completion, ANL then instructs execution of urine CAL without a
stability/H-L PRE-check.
D. Urine L-STD check
Measuring is performed in the order of urine L-STD → internal standard solution, and the urine LOW-
STD density is calculated with the urine slope/factor from the previous CAL.
When the calculated density shows that Na, K, or CL exceeds the “permissible LOW-STD width at the
time of urine PRE-calibration” set in the analysis conditions, the operation result is notified to ANL as
abnormal completion.
When all values are within the range, the operation result is notified to ANL as normal completion.
Note : 1. The permissible LOW-STD width at the time of urine PRE-calibration is a * value in
regard to the LOW-STD standard solution density for urine as set in the analysis
conditions.
2. In case of normal completion, ANL then instructs execution of urine FLUSH-2.
3. In case of abnormal completion, ANL then instructs execution of serum CAL without a
stability/H-L PRE-check.

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-10

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


E. Serum H-STD check
This is done in the same way as the urine H-STD check.
F. Serum L-STD check
This is done in the same way as the urine L-STD check.
G. Urine CAL (without stability check/H-L STD PRE-check)
The following operations are performed, and CAL data are calculated in the same way as for urine CAL
without PRE-check.
1) Urine HIGH-STD measuring
The urine HIGH-STD is measured four times in the same way as for urine CAL without PRE-check.

2) Urine LOW-STD measuring


The urine LOW-STD is measured four times in the same way as for urine CAL without PRE-check.

3) FLUSH-2
FLUSH-2 is performed.
H. Serum CAL (without stability check/H-L STD PRE-check)
The following operations are performed, and CAL data are calculated in the same way as for urine CAL
without PRE-check.
1) Serum HIGH-STD measuring
The serum HIGH-STD is measured four times as follows in the same way as for serum CAL without
PRE-check.
2) Serum LOW-STD measuring
The serum LOW-STD is measured four times as follows in the same way as for serum CAL without
PRE-check.
3) FLUSH-2
FLUSH-2 is performed.

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-11

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check: case when the previous values are used for urine and serum)

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-12

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check: case with use of the previous value only for serum)

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-13

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check: case when the previous value is used only for urine)

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-14

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check: retry OK with abnormal stability data)

ES28_01.DOC
M514 EL SOFTWARE MANUAL
Chapter 28 ISE Maintenance, Diagnosis Outline
28-15

n Maintenance/diagnosis mechanical operation contents


l Urine + serum CAL (with PRE-check: stability data abnormal and retry NG)

l Urine + serum CAL (ISE mechanical error occurrence)


When the operation response is mechanical error, ANL cuts the subsequent sequence with ISE at that time.
However, abnormal completion is set for DPR by the 15H message response, and the CAL data (34H) are set to
all 0 and are transmitted.

ES28_01.DOC

You might also like